JP6751942B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

There are multiple types of errors including a specific type error and a predetermined type error other than the specific type error, and only one of the specific type error and the predetermined type error is displayed on the error information display unit. There is a game machine that can be displayed as information.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-12148

Such a game machine has an aspect that it can promptly notify the occurrence of a serious error that requires early resolution by limiting the display of some error information when a plurality of errors are duplicated. Have. However, restrictions on the display of some error information may not necessarily contribute to quick error cancellation, and improvement is required.

In one aspect, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of promptly dealing with errors even when a plurality of errors are duplicated.

In order to achieve the above object, a game machine as shown below is provided. The game machine includes a display device, a sound output device, and a control unit capable of controlling error notification by the display device and the sound output device . When the detected error is accompanied by the first notification mode by the sound output device , the control unit displays the notification display of the detected error in the first display area of the display device, and the detected error is the first notification display by the sound output device. When a second notification mode different from the notification mode is involved, the notification display of the detected error is displayed in the second display area different from the first display area of the display device, and two or more are displayed in the first display area or the second display area. When displaying the error notification display , the two or more error notification displays are displayed in a cascade display arranged in a predetermined order.
Further, in order to achieve the above object, a game machine as shown below is provided. The game machine includes a display device, a sound output device, and a control unit capable of controlling error notification by the display device and the sound output device. When the detected error is accompanied by the first notification mode by the sound output device, the control unit displays the notification display of the detected error in the first display area of the display device, and the detected error is the first notification display by the sound output device. When a second notification mode different from the notification mode is involved, the notification display of the detected error is displayed in the second display area different from the first display area of the display device.

According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, even when a plurality of errors are duplicated, it is possible to quickly deal with the errors.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing a flow chart of main processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the probability setting value change processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the probability setting value confirmation processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory map of the game control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the winning number counter area of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port 1 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure hold information determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 2 game processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 of the first embodiment is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing. FIG. 2 of the first embodiment is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing a flow chart of change start information setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the variation start information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check processing in the production control control equipment of 1st execution form. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline of the information disclosure function of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the information disclosure processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting screen of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the collection process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collected data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the aggregation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the aggregated data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of securing the minimum information amount in the aggregated data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the in-game disclosure processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the information disclosure screen of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the information disclosure screen of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion mode of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the non-game disclosure process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the in-game disclosure processing of the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display sequence of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect control unit of the variation display of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a combination of a control program and a reference table group of a production control unit in the first half change of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program of the effect control unit, and the reference table group in the sub-effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program and the reference table group in the first half variation execution control of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first half variation of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the sub-effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table data of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the first half production distribution processing of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal loss processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the PB background change processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first half change which were amended in the development process of a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view (the 1) which shows an example of the game board of the game machine of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view (No. 2) which shows an example of the game board of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the item appearing from the baggage and its content in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the item appearing from the treasure box and the content thereof in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect content performed when the push button is pressed and when the push button is not pressed in the pseudo continuous effect using the push button in the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the baggage setting process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 2 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the effect in the modification 3 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 3 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 3 of the 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the third modification of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol in the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol used in the game state in the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparison of the case of deriving "777" in the special figure 1 variation display game and the case of deriving "777" in the special figure 2 variation display game in the modification 4 of the third embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of a display screen which a display in a modification 4 of a 3rd embodiment displays. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the fourth modification of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol used in the game state in the modification 5 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparison of two jackpots in the modification 5 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the symbol aspect of a decorative symbol in the variable display game of the modification 6 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen and the movable accessory of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen and movable accessory of the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the modification 2 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen and a movable accessory of modification 3 of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen and light guide plate of the modification 4 of 5th Embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart showing a temporal relationship between an error display (blinking display) and an effect for concealing the error display. It is a figure which shows the state display device which is a display means of a base, and the storage area for a base. It is a figure which shows the display example by a state display device. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the command system of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the command system of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the command at the time of a change of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution table of 6th Embodiment (the 1). It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution table of 6th Embodiment (the 2). It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship table of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of production distribution processing of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of production distribution of the modification 1 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of production distribution processing of the modification 1 of a 6th embodiment. It is a perspective view (the 1) which shows an example of the gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a perspective view (No. 2) which shows an example of the gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control state after power-on in the gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of transition from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification mode of the notification about the setting change and the notification about the RAM clear in the display device of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the notification mode of the notification about the setting change and the notification about the RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the notification mode of the notification about the setting change and the notification about the RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a notification mode for notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the output mode of the different notification sound in the case of controlling the sound output of different notification sounds of the seventh embodiment at the same time. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the output mode of the different notification sound in the case of controlling the sound output of different notification sounds of the seventh embodiment at the same time. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the notification setting process at the time of power-on of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the notification end setting process at the time of power-on of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification corresponding to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (No. 2) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification corresponding to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 4) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control state after power-on in the game machine of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of transition from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the output mode of the different notification sound in the case of controlling the sound output of different notification sounds of the modification 2 of the seventh embodiment at the same time. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the output mode of the different notification sound in the case where the sound output control of the different notification sound of the modification 2 of the seventh embodiment is performed at the same time. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the output mode of the different notification sound in the case where the sound output control of the different notification sound of the modification 2 of the seventh embodiment is performed at the same time. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in a normal time and the display screen in which an error occurs of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the error category for each error of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the error category for each error of the modification of the 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the error category for each error of the modification of the 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the error category for each error of the modification of the 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 4th) of the error category for each error of the modification of the 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display position and sound output for each error category of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound output mode for each error category of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound output apparatus for each error category of the modification of the 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormality notification mode determination process of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the error display mode of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the error display mode of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the error display mode of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the error display mode of the modification of the 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the error display mode of the modification of the 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the error display mode of the modification of the 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 4) of the error display mode of the modification of the 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the cascade display of the modification of the 8th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example,). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower plate (receiving plate) 23 that stores the game balls that have been paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, and an operating unit 24 of the ball striking device are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an option setting unit 25 in which the player sets various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting section 25, and a decision button switch 25b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting section 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the game machine 10 intervenes the operation of the player based on the operation of the player received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. Can be done. For example, the effect in which the operation of the player is intervened includes the effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the game machine 10 is the display device. The character displayed on the 41 can be operated, and the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b, the player can set, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, on the upper part of the center case 40, there is provided a board effect device 44 which produces an effect by playing. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 for providing a starting condition of the universal figure changing display game is provided. The game ball that has won the universal figure starting gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the universal figure starting gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variation winning device 38 described later. The winning opening 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) for giving a start condition of the first special drawing changing display game (special drawing 1 changing display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.
Further, at a position lower than the universal figure starting gate 34 and on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (for giving a start condition of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) A first start winning opening and a starting winning area) are provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 (starting port 1) is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right to facilitate the inflow of game balls. The 37b is always in a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is in the predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side falls to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state. The ordinary variable winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (general electric).

On the right side of the normal variation winning device 37, a downflow path 91 through which game balls can flow down is formed, and the game balls that have not won the normal variation winning device 37 flow down through the downflow path 91. A start winning port 92 is provided below the flow-down path 91, and a guide portion 93 is provided below the flow-down path 91. The upper surface 94 of the guiding portion 93 is an inclined surface that descends to the left, and the upper surface 94 receives a game ball that flows downward without winning the start winning port 92, and the special variable winning device 38 described later is present on the left. It is designed to guide you.

The starting winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a starting condition of the second special figure variation display game (special drawing 2 varying display game). The winning game ball is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variation winning device (big winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is set up. The special variation winning device 38 has an opening/closing member (opening/closing door) 38c, and the opening/closing member 38c closes the special winning opening depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game (a disadvantage to the player. The open/close member 38c retreats from the normal closed state) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. That is, the special variation winning device 38 includes a special winning opening (large winning opening) that is opened and closed by an opening/closing member 38c driven by a big winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and the special figure 1 variation display game. And during the big hit game state (first special game state) as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, and during the small hit game state (second special game state) as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the big winning opening By converting from the closed state to the open state, the game balls can be easily introduced into the special winning opening, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

The special variation winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality (eg, two) of the special winning opening switches 38a. Further, the number of special variation winning devices 38 is not limited to one, and two may be provided, and when there are a plurality of special winning openings, the special winning opening switch 38a is one or two for each. , X pieces (see FIG. 3) may be provided as a whole.

A warp opening (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side portion of the center case 40. The game ball flowing into the warp flow path from the warp opening 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp exit 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the starting winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warping exit 39b is easy to enter the starting winning opening 36.

In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left-side game area (so-called left hitting) to start the winning prize opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening on the right side of the special variation winning device 38). You can aim for a prize in (except for 35), and by launching a game ball to the right-side game area (so-called right-handed), a prize in the universal figure starting gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, the special variation winning device 38, etc. You can aim for.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure changing display game, the second special figure changing display game, and the general figure starting gate 34, which are special figure changing display games, are displayed. A collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game triggered by winning and various information is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display section 51 including LEDs, a special figure 1 hold display section 52, a special figure 1 symbol display section 53, a special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and a general symbol display section. 55, a universal figure hold display section 56, and a status display section 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the game machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. The CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110, the input unit 120 having an input port, the output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130 are connected to each other. It consists of a data bus 140 and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like that generate a clock. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a direct current voltage of a predetermined level such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC 12V, DC 5V generated by the power supply device 400. Enabled.

The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and the like. A normal power supply unit 410 having a power supply unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure in the game control device 100. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , It may be configured to be provided on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to remove the target from replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a set value changing switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to switch between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings relating to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. For example, the game control device 100 can change the hit probability of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in accordance with the setting of 6 levels.

The game control device 100 shifts the control state to a setting change mode in which the setting of the gaming machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power when the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 allows the settings 1 to 6 to be cyclically changed by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying the set value, and is, for example, a one-digit 7-segment LED and is mounted on the substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 transits the control state to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting of the gaming machine 10 can be confirmed by turning on the power when the setting key switch 127 is on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off. .. For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting content on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 stored as the starting memory. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. No display mode. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display areas on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state that has become the identification information, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variablely displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach" <"normal reach" <"special 1 reach" <"special 2 reach" <"special 3 reach" <"premier reach". In addition, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state is generated is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit, as compared with the case where the reach state is not generated.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control the whole 10. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). Random pattern generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the reach and the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general figure variable display game And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (ms)) to the CPU 111A or an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have it.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (time saving operating state), the number of start memories, etc., and one of the variable pattern tables is selected from the plurality of variable pattern tables. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the gaming machine 10. Is driven to perform prize ball payout control. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the game machine 10, and controls for paying out the ball lending. ..

In the input section 120 of the game microcomputer 111, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 1 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the starting opening 2 switch 92a in the starting winning opening 92, a universal figure. It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38. The high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that receives a signal and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is provided. The detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 which detects the emission of the radio wave to the gaming machine 10 is also input to the proximity I/F 121. Further, the proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor and the proximity switch are illegally short-circuited, the sensor and the switch are removed from the connector, and the lead wire is cut. An abnormal state such as a floating state can be detected and an abnormality detection signal is output.

The winning hole switch 35a will be described. In FIG. 3, the winning hole switch 35a is shown as one block, but actually, a plurality (N) of winning hole switches 35a (three in the present embodiment). Are provided on the game board 30, and respective signals are input to the proximity I/F 121 through different signal lines. Further, in FIG. 3, the special winning opening switch 38a is shown as one block, but actually, a plurality (X pieces) of the special winning opening switch 38a (three in this embodiment) are provided on the game board 30. Has been. Then, the plurality of special winning opening switches 38a are respectively connected by different signal lines, or, for example, a wired OR (not shown) is provided on a relay board (not shown) existing between the switch and the game control device 100 (main board). It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR). The board radio wave sensor 62 and a magnetic sensor 61 described later may be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called a wired OR.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switches 36a and 37a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are the second input port 123. Is input to. Note that the signal output (output from the proximity I/F 121) of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a, which are the starting port switches of FIG. 1, is shown by one signal line in FIG. There are two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. 63 detection signal, the detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10, the detection signal of the set value change switch 126, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127, the RAM initial The detection signal of the digitizing switch 112 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the starting port 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. There is.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111 (to the effective level). It can be read by changing). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when detecting that a predetermined amount of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) There is provided a first input port 122 which takes in an original ball signal) and an out ball detection switch signal (a signal output when an out ball is detected) and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out sensor each time the out sensor (not shown) detects one out ball of the game machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in an exhaust flow path (not shown) between an outlet (not shown) for ejecting a game ball (out ball) from the gaming machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out ball detection switch signal is used to calculate the game performance (for example, base) per predetermined operation (for example, 60,000 out balls), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the state display device 135. The out-ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300. In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for a game effect, a determination of an operating state that is a trigger for switching to a customer waiting screen display, or the like. For example, the status display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the game performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

Further, the game machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration so that the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch is input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-shooting test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in the ports of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system. However, the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is one-way communication in which no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine plays a game. An error signal indicating that the control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus. It is like this.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, opening/closing data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening/closing the opening/closing member 38c of the special variation winning apparatus 38 (special winning opening), and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning apparatus 37. A first output port 134a for outputting the opening/closing data of the universal solenoid 37c for opening/closing and the display data of the status display device 135 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability set value display device 136. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 134c for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 134d for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 134e for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10. Can be supplied to an external device via a photo relay. Note that a part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, from the fifth output port 134e, a firing permission signal is also output to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 has a first driver (drive circuit) 138a which receives the opening/closing data signals of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the universal electric solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a to generate and output a solenoid drive signal. , A second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 134c, and a current of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 134d. An external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the third driver 138c, the fifth output port 134e, and the fourth output port 134d that output the ON/OFF drive signal of the lead-in digit line to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d for outputting and a fifth driver 138e for receiving and displaying a display data signal of the status display device 135 output from the first output port 134a to generate and outputting a drive signal for the status display device 135 are provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32 V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Further, the status display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the status display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) side instead of the main board. ..

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photo coupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 490. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit/receive data to/from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 are used. Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The production control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

In the main control microcomputer 311, a PROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that can be retained even when power is not supplied during a power failure An FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338, which is a time counting unit for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, time, etc.), are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command (production command) from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound and a decorative lamp. Lights up, drive control of motors and solenoids, management of effect time, and the like.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 is connected to an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. Has been done.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for the purpose are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 that includes an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and the glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive-control the production device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. Good.

Furthermore, in the production control device 300, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided in the glass frame 15, and the production accessory switch for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board production device 44 and the like. For the main control by detecting the on/off state of 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting a detection signal to the microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, it is supplied from the main control microcomputer 311 to the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal), and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control the lamps and motors. And reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. In addition, the circuit board configuring the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, the random number value for hit determination of the universal figure is extracted and the ROM 111B. The judgment value stored in the above is compared with the judgment value stored in to perform the processing for judging the hitting loss of the universal figure variation display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol symbol display unit 55 of the batch display device 50, a process of displaying a normal symbol variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of this normal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control executing means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal figure variation display game is out of sync, the normal figure symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting opening 1 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored. Based on this starting memory, a random number value for jackpot determination of the first special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hitting loss of the first special figure variation display game. Perform. In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 92a provided in the starting winning port 92, and based on this starting memory, the big hit determination disorder of the second special figure variation display game. A numerical value is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the processing of judging the hit or miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination result of the first special figure variable display game or the second special figure variable display game described above. To do. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, a process of displaying the special symbol variation display game that is stopped and displayed. Perform. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game region 32 to the start winning area (start winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, starting winning hole 92). It is a game control means.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating the special game state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A, for example, causes the special variation winning device 38 to use the special winning opening solenoid 38b. The opening/closing member 38c is opened to control the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. In this special game state, the CPU 111A determines whether a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are won in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round is to open the special winning opening until it is achieved, and the control (cycle game) is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of times. In addition, a small hit game state is generated when the result of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) or the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is a small hit. In the processing, the CPU 111A performs control such that the opening/closing member 38c of the special variation winning device 38 is opened by the special winning opening solenoid 38b to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening.

The opening/closing operation pattern (opening/closing operation mode) of the special winning opening performed in these small hitting game states is, for example, an operation of keeping the opening/closing member in the open state for 200 ms every four times at intervals of 1500 ms. In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes a special winning opening opening/closing control means that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the CPU 111A controls the special display 1 symbol display section 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 of the collective display device 50 to display the deviation result mode.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation game Both floating display games are in a high probability state.

Further, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a time saving state (specific game state, general figure high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

In the time saving state, the execution time of the figure variation display game (public figure variation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the figure illustration stop time for displaying the result of the figure variation display game is, for example, 600 ms. When the normal figure variation display game is a hit result and the normal variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (normal power open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec×1 time), 2nd hit stop symbol open time (normal power open time) and number of releases (1700 msec x 2 times), 3rd hit stop open time (normal charge open time) and number of releases (eg 1700 msec x) 3 times).

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power opening number, and the normal power opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the normal electric power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure changing display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, four times) to the second number of times of opening. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It can be a probability (a high probability state in the normal figure, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the short-time state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur. In addition, the time saving state can also be referred to as a general power support state (normal power support or power support).

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes 7-segment LED_d1, 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18. The collective display device 50 displays various states according to the lighting modes of the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18.

The collective display device 50 allocates various status display functions to the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display section 51, the special figure 1 hold display section 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display section 53. The special figure 2 design display section 54, the general figure design display section 55, the general figure reservation display section 56, the state display section 57, and the special figure 2 reservation display section 58 are provided. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game by lighting the four LEDs LED_d3 to LED_d6. The special figure 1 hold display section 52 displays the number of hold in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display section 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of the 8 LEDs of the 7-segment LED_d 1 (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d2. The universal symbol display section 55 displays the symbols in the universal symbol game by the lighting modes of the three LEDs LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The figure-holding display section 56 displays the number of pieces held in the figure-playing game according to the lighting state of two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The state display unit 57 displays the game state in the special figure game by the lighting mode of the three LEDs LED_d7, LED_d9, and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a game machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6 to 8 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the game control unit (CPU111A).

The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, first, the process of inhibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the value of the register or the like is saved at the start address of the area when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h, which is on the head side of the address range of the RAM 111C, is set.

Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and the process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the data held in the RAM area. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the third input port 124, and the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 can be performed by reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time. Can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Further, the detection signal of the setting value change switch 126 and the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 are input to the third input port 124, and the state of the third input port 124 is set before the start of the standby time. By reading, the operation of the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 can be detected reliably. That is, if the states of the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 are read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 are operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the set value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 from the time until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the setting change operation performed at the time of turning on the power or It is possible to prevent the situation where the setting confirmation operation is not accepted.

Next, after performing the process (step S7) of setting the power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) Perform. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S9).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the game machine 10 is waited to be cut off. .. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S11), and the timer value is "0". It is determined whether or not it is (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time ends, access permission of RWM (Read Write Memory) such as RAM111C or EEPROM that can be read and written is granted (step). S13), off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port that is installed in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the first embodiment) is set (step S15), It is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S16).

Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17) (step S17; Y), the checksum calculation processing (step S18) of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed.

In the checksum calculation process, the sum of the data of the game control work area and the data of the status display work area may be calculated as a checksum, or the data of the game control work area and the status display work may be calculated. The checksum may be calculated separately from the data of the area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the game control work area. The game control work area is a work area used for game control in the storage area in the RWM. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S18 and the checksum at the time of power-off match (step S19). If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the start of the RAM is cleared. The RAM clear start address 2 is set as the address (step S20). The RAM clear start address 2 is an address that excludes the probability setting value from the clear target.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting value is being changed from the state of the third input port 124 (step S21). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S50 (see FIG. 8), and if the probability setting value is not being changed (step S21; N), the process proceeds to step S22.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the main body frame (front frame) 12 is in the open state (step S22). When the body frame 12 is in the open state (step S22; Y), the process proceeds to step S23, and when the body frame 12 is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is ON (step S23). When the setting key switch 127 is ON (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S50, and when the setting key switch 127 is not ON (step S23; N), the process proceeds to step S24.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the set value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24). If the setting value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S56, and if the setting value change switch 126 is not in the ON state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S25.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step S25). If the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (step S25; Y), the process proceeds to step S59, and if the RAM initialization switch 112 is not ON (step S25; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7). , Perform processing when the power is restored normally.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N) or if the checksum is not normal (step S19; N), The process proceeds to S46 and the RAM clearing by setting change is guided.

Next, when the process proceeds to step S26, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S26), and the special figure status (the state indicated by the data set in the special figure status area described later) is displayed. ), it is determined whether or not the special figure game is in high probability (step S27). If the special figure game is in the high probability (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S28, and if the special figure game is not in the high probability (step S27; N), the process proceeds to step S30.

When the special figure game is in high probability, the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S28), and the on data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area (step S29).

Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31.
Here, the area to be initialized in step S26 is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In step S26, the busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is confirmed. It is set to an indeterminate state indicating that there is no. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a probability set value information command, a screen designation command, and the like. To send. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. The screen-designated commands are the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which are usually being processed (during fluctuation, during big hit (first special game state), during small hit (first). In the case of (2) a state that is neither of the special game states), it is a command that commands the display of the customer waiting demo screen, and in other cases, it is a command that commands the display of the recovery screen.

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a pattern that defines how to replace the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition). is there. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set.

After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, big hit symbol initial value random numbers, small numbers After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of the hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34).

Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (big hit symbol random number) that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the small hit stop of the special symbol It is the random number that becomes the initial value of the random number (small hitting symbol random number) that determines the symbol. In addition, the "winning initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (winning random number) that determines the hit of the universal figure fluctuation game, and the "winning symbol initial value random number" determines the winning symbol of the universal figure fluctuation game. It is the random number that becomes the initial value of the random number (winning pattern random number). The small-hit symbol random number does not exist in a model without a small-hit, and the random symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model.

Further, in the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment, since the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value of various initial value random numbers ( By setting the start value), the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. This initial value random number updating process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, “+1”. In this way, the randomness of random numbers can be improved by continuing to update the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are the programs. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as timer interrupt processing, which is a processing unit. In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. Each of the above random numbers may be updated by a counter method using “+1” or “−1”, or may be a random method update in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step S35 described above includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process also in the timer interrupt process. When such a method is adopted, both processes are performed. In order to prevent the initial value random number updating process from being executed, when the initial value random number updating process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. When the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process, This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area, access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), it waits for the power of the game machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

Next, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N) or when the checksum is not normal (step S19; N), A guide for clearing the RAM by changing the setting, which is performed after step S46, will be described.

When instructing the RAM clear by changing the setting, the RAM clear start address 1 is set as the start address when the RAM is cleared (step S46). The RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control area. The RAM clear top address 1 is an address that designates all the game control work areas and the game control stack area as clear targets.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the body frame (front frame) 12 is in the open state (step S47). If the body frame 12 is in the open state (step S47; Y), the process proceeds to step S48, and if the body frame 12 is not in the open state (step S47; N), the process proceeds to step S49.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is ON (step S48). When the setting key switch 127 is ON (step S48; Y), the process proceeds to step S50, and when the setting key switch 127 is not ON (step S48; N), the process proceeds to step S49.

In step S49, a command for setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) to guide the RAM clear by changing the setting via the effect control device 300. For example, the gaming machine 10 guides the RAM clear by changing the setting by the guidance display by the display device 41 and the guidance sound (including voice) output by the speakers 19a and 19b.

The gaming machine 10 is guided to clear the RAM by changing the setting, and then performs a process (step S45) of prohibiting access to the RAM without saving the check data in the power failure inspection area, and then the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Wait for it to be cut off. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the setting value from being initialized at a timing unintended by the administrator by urging the setting change prior to the initialization when the data is abnormal.

Next, when it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed (step S21; Y), or when the setting key switch 127 is determined to be in the ON state (step S23; Y, step S48; Y), the step The process relating to the change of the probability setting value performed in S50 and subsequent steps will be described.

In the processing related to changing the probability setting value, the data in the clear target area (game control work area) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, RAM 111C) is cleared to zero (step S50), and the initial setting is performed. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be converted (step S51). The initial value saved in step S51 includes information (for example, a timer value) for outputting a security signal after the setting value change is started. The security signal may be output only for a predetermined time, or may be output continuously while changing the set value.

Further, the probability setting value changing flag is set (step S52). The probability setting value changing flag indicates that the probability setting value is being changed in the set state, and the probability setting value is not being changed in the reset state.

Further, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S53), and the value of the probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the working probability setting value area (step S54). ).

Furthermore, by transmitting a command whose probability setting is being changed (for example, a (probability setting) changing command) to the effect control board (effect control device 300), the effect control device 300 is notified that the probability setting is being changed. Notify (step S55). When the process related to changing the probability setting value up to step S55 is executed, the process proceeds to step S31.

Next, a description will be given of the processing relating to the RAM initialization performed in and after step S56 when the setting value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24; Y). In the process related to the RAM initialization, the RAM clear start address 2 is set as the start address when the RAM is cleared (step S56). The RAM clear start address 2 is an address that excludes the probability set value area from being cleared.

Further, the data in the clear target area (game control work area) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, RAM 111C) is cleared to zero (step S57), and the RAM is initialized to the area to be initialized. The initial value at the time of conversion is saved (step S58).

Further, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S59), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S59, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, and a RAM initialization command (customer waiting demo screen). Is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a subordinate control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. Etc.), the main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control). The device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit has been operated. Based on the above, an initialization unit (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the waiting time.

It should be noted that the game control device 100 of the first embodiment divides initialization processing when data is abnormal (first initialization processing) and initialization processing at initialization operation (second initialization processing). Since it has a function to be executed separately (first initialization means, second initialization means), it is possible to realize optimal and wasteless initialization processing according to the situation.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM111C capable of storing data, the setting operation unit (set value change switch 126, setting key switch 127) that can be operated from the outside, the setting operation unit is operated. The setting change unit (game control device 100) that changes the set value stored in the RAM 111C based on the setting is enabled to change the setting, and the setting display unit (probability set value display device 136) is provided. This makes it possible to confirm the setting (setting value).

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs between the time when the interrupt is enabled and the time when the interrupt is disabled (steps S34 to S39) in the above-mentioned main process. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S61). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S62). In step S62, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S63) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S64) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 38b, universal solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device 200. Is also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the random number update process 1 (step S65) and the random number update process 2 (step S66) are performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process. .. Further, the random number updating process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of special figure 1 and special figure 2. The random number update process 1 or the random number update process 2 in addition to the random number update process 1 may stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update cycle.

After that, the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, the start port 2 switch 92a, the general-purpose gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are monitored to see if there is a normal signal input, or if there is an error. The winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S67) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened) is performed. Further, a start opening switch monitoring process (step S68) for monitoring the winning of the start opening 1 switches 36a, 37a and the starting opening 2 switch 92a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, if there is a winning of a game ball in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 forming the first starting winning opening, or the starting winning opening 92 forming the second starting winning opening, there are various random numbers. (Big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the game result pre-judgment is pre-judged before the special figure variation display game is started to pre-determine the game result based on the winning.

Next, in step S69, probability setting value changing processing relating to changing the probability setting value is performed. In step S70, the probability setting value changing flag is referenced to determine whether the probability setting value is being changed. If the probability setting value is being changed (step S70; Y), the process proceeds to step S75 to set the probability setting. If the value is not being changed (step S70; N), the process proceeds to step S71. In step S71, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in reference to the probability setting value confirmation mode flag, and if it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S71; Y), the process proceeds to step S75. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S71; N), the process proceeds to step S72. The probability setting value confirmation mode flag is a flag that is set or reset in the probability setting value confirmation processing described later.

Next, a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (step S72), a special figure 1 game process (step S73a) for performing a process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game, The special figure 2 game process (step S73b) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game and the general figure game process (step S74) for performing the general figure variable display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED (for example, an LED such as the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 of the collective display device 50) provided on the gaming machine 10 and displaying various kinds of information relating to the display of the special figure variation display game and the game is desired content. Segment LED edit processing for driving to display (step S75), magnet fraud monitoring processing for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (step S76), from the panel radio sensor 62 The board radio wave irregularity monitoring process (step S77) is performed to check the detection signal of No. to determine whether there is any abnormality. Then, an external information editing process (step S78) for setting signals to be output to various external devices and a status display editing output process (step S79) for status display are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S64) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the output processing of the first embodiment. In this output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the segment output port (third output port 134c) that outputs the segment data of the collective display device 50 (step S81). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port (first output port 134a) that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S82).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device 50 is updated by "+1" within the range of "0" to "3" (step S83), and the digit of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. The output data of the line is acquired (step S84). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the LEDs_d1 to LED_d18 of the batch display device 50, round display, special figure 1 hold display, special figure 1 symbol display, special figure 2 symbol display, normal symbol symbol display, normal figure hold display, and There is a status display (game status display such as a time saving state or a high probability state).

Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S85), and the combined data is output to the digit/external information output port (fourth output port 134d) for digit output and external information output (step S86). ). The external information combined in step S85 is “door/frame opening” and “security signal”.

Then, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S87), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port for segment output (third output port 134c) ( Step S88).

Subsequently, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S89). The external information synthesized here includes "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "design confirmation number signal", "starting port signal", and "main prize ball". "Signal" etc. Next, the combined data and the output data of the emission permission are combined (step S90), and the combined data is output to the external information/emission permission signal output port (fifth output port 134e) for external information output and emission permission signal output. (Step S91).

Next, the off output data of the probability set value display is set. That is, OFF data is output (reset) to the probability setting value display output port (second output port 134b) that outputs the probability setting value display data of the probability setting value display device 136 (step S92).

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S93). When the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S93; Y), the process proceeds to step S94, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (step S93; N), the process proceeds to step S95.

When the probability set value display permission flag is set, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is loaded from the set value display data area in the RWM (step S94).
In step S95, the probability set value display data is output to the probability set value display output port (second output port 134b).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S96). After that, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S97).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S98). Further, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shot test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S99). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test-shooting test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 ( Step S9a) is performed.

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S9b). The test signal output data loads probability setting value display data (for example, 7 segment data) corresponding to the probability setting value from the setting value display data area in the RWM, but the probability setting value can be confirmed. If it exists, it may be a probability setting value (for example, a numerical value of 1 to 6) or data in another format.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is ON (step S9c). When the setting key switch 127 is ON (step S9c; Y), the process proceeds to step S9d, and when the setting key switch 127 is not ON (step S9c; N), the process proceeds to step S9e.

If the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state, the test signal output data of the loaded probability setting value and the setting key switch ON information are combined (step S9d).
In step S9e, the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 6 on the relay board 70, and the output process is completed.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S67) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the winning opening switch/state monitoring process, first, the probability setting value changing flag is referenced to determine whether the probability setting value is being changed (step S101). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S101; Y), the process proceeds to step S109, and if the probability setting value is not being changed (step S101; N), the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is referred to, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress, and if the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S102; Y), the process proceeds to step S109. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S102; N), the process proceeds to step S103.

Next, the winning a prize monitoring table 1 (for example, the port number to which the detection signal from the count switch is input and the number corresponding to the winning a prize opening switch 38a (count switch) in the award winning opening (special variation winning device 38) Data in which the bit position in the signal port is stored) is prepared (step S103). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S104) is executed to monitor whether there is an injustice (incorrect prize) to win the prize hole even though the prize hole is not open and to detect a normal prize. ..

After that, a prize opening monitoring table of the prize opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in Poden is prepared (step S105), and the fraud & prize monitoring process for detecting whether there is an illegal prize and detecting a normal prize ( Step S106) is executed.

Next, the winning opening switch that does not require any fraudulent monitoring processing, that is, the winning opening switch that can always win (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) The table is prepared (step S107), and the winning number counter updating process (step S108) for updating the winning number is performed.

Next, the value of the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals for which the error state of the gaming machine 10 should be monitored is the target of this monitoring is “0”. To "3" (step S109). After that, depending on the value of the status scan counter, any of the switch error 1 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout error error. The game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the monitoring of errors based on the crab is prepared (step S110). Then, the gaming machine state check processing (step S111) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, in accordance with the value of the status scan counter, a gaming machine status monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting monitoring of an error based on any one of the glass frame opening, the main body frame opening, the frame radio wave irregularity and the touch switch. (Step S112). Then, the gaming machine state check process (step S113) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S114), and if the value of the state scan counter is not "0" (step S114; N), the winning opening switch/state monitor The process ends. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the game machine state in the game machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S114; Y), the gaming machine status is based on the switch abnormality 2 error that is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like according to the value of the status scan counter. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of (1) is prepared (step S115). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S116) for determining whether an error has occurred, a payout busy signal check process (step S117) are performed, and the winning a prize switch/state monitoring process is ended. It should be noted that the payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring has a 16 ms cycle.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, the details of the probability set value change process (step S69) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the probability set value changing process of the first embodiment.

First, the probability setting value changing flag is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (step S121). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S121; Y), the process proceeds to step S123. If the probability setting value is not being changed (step S121; N), the process proceeds to step S122, and the probability setting value confirmation process (step S122) is executed. After that, the probability setting value changing process ends. The details of the probability setting value confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the probability setting value is being changed, the probability setting value extinction timer is updated. Specifically, the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is referenced, and when the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is not "0", it is decremented by "1" to update the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer (step S123). ..

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is "0" (step S124), and when the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is "0" (step S124; Y), step S125. If the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is not “0” (step S124; N), the process proceeds to step S126.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value has been changed with reference to the probability setting value changed flag (step S126). If the probability setting value has been changed, the process proceeds to step S127, and if the probability setting value has not been changed. To step S133. The probability set value changed flag is a flag that is set when the probability set value is changed (probability set value fixing operation).

If the probability setting value has been changed (step S126; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127). If the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127; Y), the process related to the RAM initialization after changing the probability setting value is performed in step S128 and subsequent steps, and if the setting key switch 127 is not in the OFF state (step S127; N). ) Ends the probability setting value changing process.

Next, a description will be given of the processing related to the RAM initialization performed in and after step S128 when the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127; Y). In the process related to the RAM initialization, the RAM clear start address 3 is set as the start address when the RAM is cleared (step S128). The RAM clear start address 3 is an address that excludes the probability setting value area, the variation pattern random number area (random numbers updated in the random number update process 2), and the initial value random number area from being cleared. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can effectively use the random number stirring during the setting change. The RAM clear start address 3 may be an address that excludes the probability setting value area from the clear target and includes the variation pattern random number area and the initial value random number area into the clear target.

Next, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to zero (step S129), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S130). Note that the initial value saved in step S130 includes information (for example, a timer value) for outputting a security signal. The security signal may be output only for a predetermined time, or may be output continuously while changing the set value.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S131). In addition, by including information related to setting change (for example, probability setting value display data) in the RAM clear target, the probability setting value after the probability setting value is changed and the information related to the setting change before the probability setting value is changed. Prevents discrepancies.

Further, a command for ending the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S132), and the process proceeds to step S34 (see FIG. 7) of the main process. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S132, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, a probability setting change end command (customer waiting demo Along with displaying the screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. The probability setting change end command may also serve as a RAM clear notification in addition to the probability setting change end notification or in place of the probability setting change end notification. In addition, in step S132, a RAM initialization command may be transmitted in addition to the probability setting change ending command or in place of the probability setting change ending command.

If the probability setting value has not been changed (step S126; N), the processing from step S133 onward is performed. In step S133, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the setting value change switch 126 (step S133). If there is an input from the setting value change switch 126, the process proceeds to step S134, and if there is no input from the setting value change switch 126 (step S133; N), the process proceeds to step S137.

When there is an input from the setting value change switch 126 (step S133; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area (working probability setting value) is incremented by "1" to be in the range of "0" to "5". To cyclically update (step S134). The working probability setting value is set to six levels from “0” to “5”, but the working probability setting value is not limited to this, and may be three levels or ten levels as long as the value corresponds to the probability setting value. Further, the work probability setting value has a one-to-one correspondence with the probability setting value, but may have a one-to-many correspondence relationship with the probability setting value. For example, when the probability setting value has three levels from “0” to “2”, the work probability setting value has six levels from “0” to “5”, and the probability setting values “0”, “1”, “ The work probability setting values "0, 1", "2, 3", "4,5" may be associated with each "2".

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S135), and the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value turn-off timer area (step). S136). The probability setting value extinction timer area is an area for providing a blank display on the probability setting value display device 136. As a result, the probability set value display device 136 can perform a blank display each time there is a set value change operation (input from the set value change switch 126).

Next, in step S137, it is determined whether or not there is a confirming operation for changing the set value. For example, the confirmation operation of changing the set value may be a touch switch signal. The setting value change confirmation operation may use an input different from the touch switch signal, an input signal from a dedicated operation switch provided separately, or an input from two or more switches. A signal combination or the like may be used. If the setting value change confirmation operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S138, and if the setting value change confirmation operation is not performed (step S137; N), the probability setting value change process ends.

If there is a confirmation operation for changing the set value (step S137; Y), the value in the work probability set value area is loaded and saved in the probability set value area (step S138), and the probability set value corresponding to the probability set value is displayed. The data is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S139), and the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S140).

Further, a command for changing the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S141), and the probability set value changing process is ended. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S141, a command for changing the probability setting value (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and the probability setting value change is notified by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). In addition to the command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a probability set value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance number information and high probability number information may be transmitted.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability set value confirmation process (step S122) in the above-mentioned probability set value change process will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the probability set value confirmation process of the first embodiment.

In step S151, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in reference to the probability setting value confirmation mode flag, and if it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S151; Y), the process proceeds to step S159. If it is not in the probability setting value confirmation mode, the process proceeds to step S152.

If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S151; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S152), it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S153), and if it is not in the game, step Proceeding to S154, if the game is being played (step S153; Y), the probability setting value confirmation processing is ended. The term “during the game” refers to a game state in which the player is highly likely to be playing, and includes, for example, a special figure changing, a normal figure changing, a special figure hitting, a normal drawing hitting, and the like. In addition, “during game” may include a game state in which there are a special figure 1 reserved number and a special figure 2 reserved number.

If the game is not being played (step S153; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S154). If the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S155, and if the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S154; N), the probability setting value confirmation process ends.

When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S154; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set (step S155), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S156), and the security signal control timer is set. The initial value is saved in the area (step S157). By saving the initial value in the security signal control timer area, the security signal is output for the probability set value display time set as the initial value. The security signal is not limited to the probability setting value display time set as the initial value, and may be continuously output during the probability setting value confirmation mode.

Furthermore, the command of confirmation of the probability set value is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S158), and the probability set value confirmation processing is ended. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S158, a command for confirming the probability set value (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and the confirmation of the probability set value is notified by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). In addition to the command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a probability set value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance number information and high probability number information may be transmitted.

When the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S151; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S159). If the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S160, and if the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S159; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process ends.

If the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S159; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S160), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S161).

Further, a command for ending confirmation of the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S162), and the probability set value confirmation processing is ended. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S162, the probability setting value confirmation end command (the customer waiting demo screen is displayed and the probability setting value confirmation is notified by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). In addition to the above command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a probability set value information command, etc. may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance number information and high probability number information may be transmitted.

Next, the memory map of the RAM 111C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a memory map of the game control device of the first embodiment. The memory map 111M is a memory map of the RAM 111C. The RAM 111C sets a game control work area, a game control stack area, a status display work area, and a status display stack area in order from the beginning of the memory. Further, the RAM 111C clearly separates the game control stack area and the status display work area by setting an unused area of 16 bytes or more between the game control stack area and the status display work area. The RAM 111C sets an unused area after the stack area for status display, but may set the stack area for status display so as to include the end of the memory without providing the unused area. Further, the RAM 111C may set an unused area between the game control work area and the game control stack area, or between the status display work area and the status display stack area.

Since the probability setting value area is arranged at the top of the game control work area, the RAM clear start address 1 is targeted for clearing all of the game control work area (game control work area) and the game control stack area. To do. Further, the RAM clear top address 2 targets the game control work area and the game control stack area other than the probability setting value area for clearing. In addition, the RAM clear top address 3 clears the game control work area and the game control stack area excluding the probability setting value area, the variation pattern random number area, and the initial value random number area. Further, all of the RAM clear head address 1, the RAM clear head address 2, and the RAM clear head address 3 are set to clear the areas from the power failure inspection area 1 to the power failure inspection area 2 and the checksum area.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S72) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout command transmission process of the first embodiment. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the winning number counter area of the first embodiment.

First, an example of the number-of-wins counter area will be described. The number-of-wins counter area 1 includes, for example, three prize ball counters, ten prize ball counters, and fourteen prize ball counters, as shown in FIG. The prize number counter can store up to 65535 prizes. Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 16, the prize number counter area 2 is composed of a 3 prize ball counter, a 10 prize ball counter, and a 14 prize ball counter, and each prize number counter can store up to 255 prizes. It has become. In the check of the count numbers of these prize number counter areas, the addresses of the prize number counter areas are updated in step S202 and the like which will be described later, so that the above-mentioned counters are sequentially checked from the top (from the three prize ball counter).

Next, in FIG. 15, the left column is a process of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the right column is a process of transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described with reference to FIG. 16, the counters of the plurality of prize number counter areas 2 provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Among them, it is determined whether or not the counter to be checked has a count number other than "0" (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and the check of the count numbers of all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 is completed. Whether or not it is determined (step S203).

When it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the counter of the target winning number counter area 2 is subtracted (“-1” is updated) (step S204), and the winning number counter The number of payouts (for example, any of the above 3, 10, or 14) corresponding to the address of the area 2 is acquired (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). When it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209; Y), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. Yes (step S211).

In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process, which will be described later, a process of outputting the main prize ball signal is performed based on the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal updated in step S210. Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) for every 10 payout schedules, and 10 pieces are paid out from the payout board (payout control device 200). One pulse is output for each.

Next, in the determination of step S203, it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in the determination of step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0" or more (step S209; N). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated to "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the final step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. Therefore, the subtraction will not be performed.

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and when it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy) are "payout operation", "ball lending operation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio wave fraud". "Medium", "Abnormal payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor paid out balls)", "Insufficient payout error", "Overpayment error", "Prize to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the remaining number of acquired game balls) (when it is not 0) "and the like.

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 is counting (step S215), and the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 is determined. If there is no count (step S215; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether checking of all areas has been completed (step S217). If the check of all areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, when the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated to "-1" (step S218) to the address of the winning number counter area 1. The corresponding payout number command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), and in step S214, it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y). , When it is determined in step S217 that the check of all areas is completed (step S217; Y), or when the process of step S221 is completed, this payout command transmission process is terminated.

It should be noted that, as can be seen from the configuration in which the processing is terminated without executing step S215 and the subsequent steps depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214 described above, the payout command does not have to be transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed. I'm sending it. Further, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S68) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table of the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed to start the opening. It is determined whether or not there is a prize for 1 (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning in the starting opening 1 (step A103; Y), the game state is in a predetermined state that should be hit to the right (for example, normal electric power support state, big hit, etc.). It is determined whether or not there is (step A104).

When it is determined in step A104 that the state is not the right-handed predetermined state (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the state should be right-handed (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. To do. That is, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, except for the normal electric power support state, the starting opening 1 hardly wins unless left-handed, and the starting opening 1 wins in a predetermined state where right-handed operation is required. In this case, since it can be estimated that the player has left-handed the player even though the player is in a predetermined state of right-handing, a right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing right-handing is issued. It is configured to do.

Next, after preparing a table for setting the information on the hold by the starting port 1 (step A107), the special figure starting port 1 switch process (step A108) is performed.
Next, a winning monitor table for the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92) is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting opening 2. (Step A111).

When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the starting opening 2 (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning in the starting opening 2 (step A111; Y), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal power support state (time saving state) (step A112), when it is determined that it is not in the universal communication support state (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (step A113). Further, in step A113, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game is in the final variation of the normal electric support (step A114).

If it is determined in step A114 that the final change of the ordinary electric power support is not in progress (step A114; N), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A115), and effect command setting processing (step A116) is performed. In other words, if it is not in the normal electric power support state, during the big hit, or during the final electric power support change, the left electric power should be left hit, so the processing for transmitting the left hit instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 is performed.

Then, when it is determined in step A112 that it is in the universal power support state (step A112; Y), when it is determined in step A113 that it is a big hit (step A113; Y), in step A114 the final power support is final. If it is determined that the fluctuation is occurring (step A114; Y), and if the process of step A116 is completed, the process proceeds to step A117.

When the process proceeds to step A117, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 2 (step A117), the special figure starting port 2 switch process (step A118) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.

If it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning in the starting opening 2, for example, before executing step A112, it is illegal to play normal (normally the variable winning device 37 is in the closed state, but normally). A step is provided to determine whether there is a fraud in which the winning of the variable winning device 37 is detected. If it is determined that the fraudulent normal communication is occurring, the starting mouth switch monitoring process is terminated without executing step A112 and thereafter. With the configuration, the second start memory (start memory of Toku-zu 2) may not be generated any more if there is an illegality.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-mentioned start opening switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, the non-winning information of the starting opening to be monitored among the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37) and the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92) is set ( (Step A121), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step). A124).

When there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, when the random number is not extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, of the starting ports 1 and 2, the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is ended.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port 1 switch process (step A108) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a special figure start port 1 switch process according to the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 1 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored (starting prize of the special figure 1 to be monitored).
In the special figure starting port 1 switch processing, first, the starting port signal 1 output, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the starting port 1 switch 36a, 37a to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal 1 output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process passes through step A134 and proceeds to the process of step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal 1 output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the update target special figure 1 holding number (the start memory number of special figure 1) corresponding to the monitoring target start opening 1 switch 36a, 37a is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4). (Step A135). If the number of special figure 1 hold items to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port 1 switch process is terminated. When the number of reserved special figure 1 to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), the special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting variation information (for example, for prefetch variation pattern allocation) is set ( Step A136), the number of special figure 1 reservations to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A137).

Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is set as the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A142), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 are set. It saves in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A143), and performs special figure reservation information determination processing (step A144). After that, a decorative special figure 1 reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations to be monitored is prepared (step A145), effect command setting processing (step A146) is performed, and the special figure starting port 1 switch processing is ended. ..

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and the special figure variation display game. It serves as a starting prize storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of starting memories that are the execution right of. In addition, the starting winning prize storing means (RAM 111C) makes a first start of various random number values extracted based on winning of game balls into the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Remember as a memory.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port 2 switch process (step A118) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 2 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored (starting prize of the special figure 2 to be monitored).
In the special figure starting port 2 switch processing, first, the starting port signal 2 output number, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the starting port 2 switch 92a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded ( In step A151), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A152), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step A153). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the starting number signal 2 output number area of the RWM (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, when the output count overflows (step A153; Y), the process passes step A154 and shifts to the process of step A155. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal 2 output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of Toku-zu 2 reservations (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the starting port 2 switch 92a to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4) (step A155). When the number of reserved special figure 2 to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A155; N), the special figure starting port 2 switch process is ended. When the number of reserved special figure 2 to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A155; Y), the special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting the variation information (for example, for distribution of the prefetch variation pattern) is set ( In step A156), the number of reserved special figure 2 to be updated is updated by “+1” (step A157).

Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 2) corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 2 is calculated (step A158), and the jackpot random numbers prepared in step A125 are transferred to the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM. (Step A159). Next, the big hit symbol random number of special figure 2 is extracted, prepared (step A160), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A161).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of special figure 2 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A162), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3 are set. It saves in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A163), and performs special figure reservation information determination processing (step A164). After that, the decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number to be monitored is prepared (step A165), the effect command setting process (step A166) is performed, and the special figure start port 2 switch process is completed. ..

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning area of the starting winning opening 92, and becomes the right to execute the special figure variation display game. It constitutes a starting prize storing means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit. In addition, the starting winning prize storing means (RAM 111C) stores various random number values extracted based on winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 2 (starting winning opening 92) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination processing (step A144, step A164) in the special figure start port 1 switch process and the special figure start port 2 switch process will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of the first embodiment.

The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process in which the result-related information corresponding to the start memory is determined before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure pending information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (high probability medium) (step A172). If it is determined in step A172 that the probability is high (step A172; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A172 that the probability is not high (step A172; N), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (step A173). When it is determined in step A173 that the big hit is in progress (step A173; Y), the special figure suspension information determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A173 that the big hit is not in progress (step A173; N), the big hit determination process of determining whether or not it is a big hit depending on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value ( Perform step A174).

Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A175). When the determination result is a big hit (step A175; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (in other words, special drawing type; special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 type) Setting (step A176), the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A140 or A160 is acquired (step A177), the process proceeds to step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A175; N), a small hit determination process (step A179) for determining whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do it. After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A180). Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A180; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A183), the process proceeds to the process of step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set, and the small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162. Is set (step A182), the process proceeds to step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A184, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in any of step A177, step A182, or step A183 is prepared (step A184), and an effect command setting process (step A185) is performed. Next, a special figure information setting process (step A186) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step A187) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. Perform.

After that, the look-ahead variation pattern corresponding to the first-half variation number indicating the first-half variation pattern (variation pattern until the start of the reach action) and the second-half variation number indicating the second-half variation pattern (the variation pattern after the start of the reach action) in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. A command is prepared (step A188), effect command setting processing (step A189) is performed, and the special figure reservation information determination processing is ended.

The special figure information setting process in step A186 and the variation pattern setting process in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process (special figure 1 normal process or special figure 2 normal process described later). This is the same as the processing described above. That is, when the special figure reservation information determination process is executed in step A144, the special figure type is special figure 1, so the processes of steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 1 information setting process and the special figure 1 variation described later. This is the same as the pattern setting process, and when the special figure reservation information determination process is executed in step A164, the special figure type is special figure 2, so the processes of steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 2 information described later. This is the same as the setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the prefetch stop pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target, and the prefetch variation pattern command including the variation pattern information in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are It is prepared and transmitted to the performance control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 game process (step S73a) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 game process, the input of the special winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 1 (identification information that is variably displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game) is displayed. Set. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not it is during the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game) (step A1). .. When the big hit or the small hit of special figure 2 is not done (step A1; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit of special figure 2 is in progress (step A1; Y) and when the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is completed, the process proceeds to step A3. If the special processing 1 game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to in step S5 is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the game processing number of special figure 1 (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “0”, the change start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game Fig. 1 Performs special process 1 usual process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the changing process.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game process number is "1", the special display for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display 1 The changing process (step A9) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the type of big hit, and big hits for each big hit The special figure 1 displaying process (step A10) for setting the fanfare time in accordance with the winning opening opening pattern and the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game process number is "3", setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, update of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A11).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the jackpot round is the final round, or the special winning opening A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process and the like is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is set, etc. For example, the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) to set the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 big hit end processing, etc. Do it.

When the special figure 1 game process number is "6" in step A7, special figure 1 big hit end processing (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal processing.

At step A7, if the special figure 1 game process number is "7", set a predetermined special winning opening time and opening pattern when a small hit occurs, set a fanfare command, and process during a small hit. Small hitting fanfare middle processing (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game process number is "8", setting of information necessary for performing small hit medium movement transition process, command setting of small hit end screen, small hit remaining ball process, etc. The small hitting process (step A16) is performed.

When the special figure 1 game process number is "9" in step A7, a small hit remaining ball process (step A17) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end process.

When the special figure 1 game process number is "10" in step A7, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step A18) is performed to set information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal processing.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step A20) relating to the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is performed, and the special figure game processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes. Perform.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol), and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and special condition as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (step S73b) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 game process, the input of the special winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 2 (identification information that is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variable display game) is displayed. Set. In the special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is during the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 1 (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A31). .. When the big hit or the small hit of special figure 1 is not being done (step A31; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

Next, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit of special figure 1 is in progress (step A31; Y) and when the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is completed, the process proceeds to step A33. If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A33). The minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0". It is determined whether there is any (step A35). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by "-1" (step A36), and the special figure 2 in RWM is changed. The long variation timer value (for example, 60000 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, which is an area for storing the value of the game processing timer (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

On the other hand, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game process timer is "0" (step A35; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number The table is set in the register (step A38), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the table (step A39). Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the special figure 2 game processing number (step A47).

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game Figure 2 Special figure 2 usual processing (step A48) which sets the information and the like which is necessary in order to do processing during fluctuation is done.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special display for setting the stop display time of special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 2 display 2 Processing during fluctuation (step A49) is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the type of big hit, and big hit of each big hit The special figure 2 displaying process (step A50) for setting the fanfare time according to the winning opening pattern and setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is "3", setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A51).

In step A47, if the special figure game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the big hit round is the final round, or the special winning opening remains. A special winning opening opening process (step A52) is performed, which is a process of setting information necessary for performing the ball process.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is set, etc. For example, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening, and the setting for the necessary information for performing the special figure 2 big hit ending processing, etc. Do it.

If the special figure 2 game process number is "6" in step A47, the special figure 2 big hit ending process (step A54) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process.

When the special figure 2 game process number is "7" in step A47, the predetermined opening time/opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the small hit mid process are executed. Small hitting fanfare middle processing (step A55) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is "8", setting of information necessary for performing small hit medium movement transition process, command setting of small hit end screen, small hit remaining ball process, etc. The small hitting process (step A56) is performed.

When the special figure 2 game process number is "9" in step A47, the small hit remaining ball process (step A57) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process.

If the special figure 2 game process number is "10" in step A47, the special figure 2 small hit end process (step A58) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 (step A59), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step A60) relating to the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is performed, and the special figure game processing. To finish. On the other hand, in step A34, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A34; N), that is, if the time has not expired, or if the process of step A37 is completed, step A59 The processing shifts to the processing thereafter.

[Special processing 1 usual processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special process 1 normal process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start the fluctuation (that is, whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A251). In this determination, the gaming state is the period from the end of fluctuation (hits or small hits) of special figure 2 (start of processing during display of special figure 2) to the end of hit operation (big hit game state or small hit game state) In this state, that is, when Toku-zu 2 is hit, it is determined that Toku-zu 1 cannot start fluctuation, and when it is not within the period, it is judged that Toku-zu 1 can start fluctuation.

Then, when it is determined that the variation of FIG. 1 can be started (step A251; Y), whether or not the left-handing instruction has been informed (that is, the left-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and then the right-handing instruction is issued It is determined whether or not the notification command is not transmitted (step A252). In step A252, if the left-handing instruction notification flag is set, it is determined that the left-handing instruction notification has been performed, and if the left-handing instruction notification flag is not set, it is determined that the left-handing instruction notification is not performed. It may be configured.

When the left-handing instruction notification has not been made (step A252; N), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A253), effect command setting processing (step A254) is performed, and a left-handing instruction notification flag is set (step). A255).

When the left-handing instruction has been notified (step A252; Y) and when step A255 is completed, the process proceeds to step A256, and whether the special figure 1 hold number (first starting memory number) is "0". It is determined whether or not (step A256). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 1 is not "0" (step A256; N), the variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A257), and the production command The setting process (step A258) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) is performed, a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step A260), and an effect command setting process (step A261) is performed, and information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) is set (information addition) in the special drawing status area in the RWM (step A262), and the probability of the special figure changing display game is set. It is determined whether the state is in high probability (step A263).

In the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) and information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 changing display game is being executed) These are areas that are stored independently of each other, and the state indicated by the information set in this special figure status area is the special figure status. When step A262 is executed, the special figure status becomes one of "special figure 1 changing" and "special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing".

Further, in the special figure 1 variation start process (step A259), a process of saving "1" which is the process number related to the special figure 1 changing process in the special figure 1 game process number area (steps A318 and A319 described later), A process of saving the changing flag in the Toku-zu 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A322 described later), a process of setting the fluctuation time as the value of the Toku-zu 1 game processing timer (steps A307 and A497 described later), and the like are performed. ..

If it is not in the high probability (step A263; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264), and if it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264; N), The fluctuation check flag in FIG. 1 is set (step A265). The determination as to whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress is made by the high-probability final fluctuation flag described later. That is, if the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress.

Then, when step A265 is completed, when it is determined that the probability is high (step A263; Y), and when it is determined that the final fluctuation is high probability (step A264; Y), the special figure 1 Process during fluctuation The transition setting process (step A266) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 cannot be started (step A251; N) and if the special figure 1 hold number is "0" in step A256 (step A256; Y), the process number is used. "0" is set (step A267), the processing number, that is, "0" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area which is an area for storing the special figure 1 game processing number in the RWM (step A268). 1 Normally end the process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of step A251 is affirmative and the special figure 1 pending number is not “0”, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) and the like are executed. Even if the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 changing display game is being executed), the special figure 1 changing display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the first start memory is displayed as a variable display based on the second start memory. It is a control means that can be executed at the same time as the game.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (step A48) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 normal process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start changing (that is, whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game can start) (step A271). In this determination, the game state is the period from the end of fluctuation (hits or small hits) of special figure 1 (start of processing during display of special figure 1) to the end of hit operation (big hit game state or small hit game state) In this state, that is, when Toku-zu 1 is hit, it is determined that Toku-zu 2 cannot start fluctuation, and when it is not within the period, it is judged that Toku-zu 2 can start fluctuation.

When it is determined that the fluctuation of the special map 2 can be started (step A271; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figures 2 (the number of second starting memories) is "0" (step A272). .. When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step A272; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A273), and the production command The setting process (step A274) is performed, the special figure 2 variation start process (step A275) is performed, and information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) is set in the special figure status area of the RWM. (Addition of information) (step A276), and it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A277).

Here, the state indicated by the information set in the special figure status area (that is, the special figure status) is “special figure 2 is changing” and “special figure 1 is changing + special figure 2 is changing” when step A276 is executed. It becomes one of the states.

Further, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275), a process of saving the process number “1” related to the special figure 2 changing process in the special figure 2 game process number area (steps A348 and A349 described later), A process of saving the changing flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352 described later), a process of setting the fluctuation time as the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (steps A337 and A497 described later), and the like are performed. ..

Note that, for example, after step A275 is executed, a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared, then an effect command setting process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step A276 (that is, special figure 2). Also, in the usual processing, the decoration special figure hold number command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A277; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A278), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278; N), The fluctuation check flag in FIG. 2 is set (step A279).

When the step A279 is completed, when it is determined that the high probability is in progress (step A277; Y), and when it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A278; Y), (2) Process during transition processing transition setting process (step A280) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal process ends.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A272; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is "0" (step A281), and the special figure 1 hold number is If it is determined to be "0" (step A281; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (step A282). If the special figure 1 is not changing (step A282; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step A283), and if the customer waiting demo is not started (step A283; N). ) Sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and effect command setting processing (step A286) is performed. A prepared command (here, a customer waiting demo command) is transmitted to the production control device 300 when the production command setting process is performed.

Then, when step A286 is completed, when it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot start fluctuation (step A271; N), and when the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (step A281; N), the special figure 1 is special. When FIG. 1 is changing (step A282; Y) and when the customer waiting demo has been started (step A283; Y), "0" is set as the processing number (step A287), and the RWM The processing number, that is, "0" is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special drawing 2 game processing number (step A288), and the special drawing 2 normal processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of step A271 is affirmative and the special figure 2 hold number is not “0”, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) and the like are executed. Even if the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed), the special figure 2 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory and the variable display game based on the first start memory are displayed. It constitutes a control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A259) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 27 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). In the special figure 1 variation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is set (step A301), and the first special figure variation display game is executed. The big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not it is a big hit is subjected to big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A302) for setting deviation information and big hit information.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A303) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure 1 information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set by performing the special figure 1 information setting process (step A304). A setting information table is prepared (step A305). After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A306) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game By performing the process (step A307), it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A308).

If it is not in the high probability (step A308; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309). If it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309; N), It is determined whether or not FIG. 2 is changing (while the special figure 2 changing display game is being executed) (step A310). If the Toku-zu 2 is changing (step A310; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the Toku-zu 2 game processing timer is "0" (Step A311). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312). When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer in FIG. 2 is not, for example, “4” or more (step A312; N), the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is determined by the variation start information setting process of step A337, which will be described later, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is in a state of a sufficient time value within a 2-byte range (for example, 60000 msec). It is set to "0" (for example, see step A500 described later).

Further, the variation time of the special figure 2 (execution time of the special figure 2 variable display game) can be calculated from the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area). Specifically, in step A313, the long fluctuation timer value (for example, 60000 msec) saved in step A37 is multiplied by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer, and the result of the special figure 2 game process at that time is obtained. By adding the values in the timer area, the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 can be calculated.

Further, when the long variation timer value is, for example, 60000 msec (=60 seconds), the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more, which means that the remaining variation time of special figure 2 is 240 It is longer than the second (=4×60 seconds) and longer than the longest fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1, and in that case, it is not necessary to execute step A315 and step A316, which will be described later. A312 is provided. Therefore, the numerical value "4" in step A312 is a numerical value for pre-determining whether the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure 1 by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer. It's just one example.

Next, when step A313 is completed and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311; Y), the process moves to step A314 and the special figure 1 to be started is started. If the variation time of (for example, the variation time set in step A306) is the remaining variation time of Toku-zu 2 that is currently varying (the calculation result of Step A313, or the number of repetitions of the Toku-zu 2 game processing timer is zero). It is determined whether or not the time is shorter than the time period determined by the value of the special processing 2 game processing timer) (step A314).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A314; N), a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer is prepared (step A315). ), the effect command setting process (step A316) is performed.

Next, if there is a high probability (step A308; Y), if there is a high probability final fluctuation (step A309; Y), if the special figure 2 is not changing (step A310; N), the special figure 2 game For example, when the number of repetitions of the processing timer is “4” or more (step A312; Y), when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A314; Y), and step A316. When step S317 is completed, the process moves to step A317 (FIG. 27).

When the process proceeds to step A317, the high-probability variation number update process (step A317) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A318), and the special figure 1 game process number is an area for storing the special figure 1 game process number in the RWM. The processing number, that is, "1" is saved in the game processing number area (step A319), and the customer waiting demo flag area which is an area for setting the customer waiting demo flag in the RWM is cleared (step A320). After that, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the special symbol 1 during fluctuation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A321), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM ( Step A322), the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the flashing control timer (timer of the flashing cycle of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area of the RWM (step A323), and the special feature of RWM is saved. 1 initial value (for example, "0" corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during fluctuation in FIG. 1 (step A324), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is ended. In step A324, the reason why "0" is saved in the special symbol 1 changing symbol number area is to start the variable display of the special symbol 1 from the blank symbol.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A275) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation start process of the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). In the special figure 2 variation start process, first, a special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is set (step A331), and the second special figure variation display game is executed. For the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not it is a big hit, big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A332) for setting deviation information and big hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure 2 information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 Special figure 2 information setting process (step A334) for setting the special figure 2 variation pattern which is a table in which information for setting various information for setting various variation patterns of the second special figure variation display game is set. A setting information table is prepared (step A335). After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game. Processing (step A337) is performed, and it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A338).

If it is not in the high probability (step A338; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A339). If it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339; N), It is determined whether or not FIG. 1 is changing (the special display 1 changing display game is being executed) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is changing (step A340; Y), the remaining change time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). The remaining variation time of the special figure 1 can be calculated from the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area).

Next, when step A343 ends, the process moves to step A344, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 to be started from now (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A336) of the special figure 1 currently changing. It is determined whether it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (calculation result of step A343) (step A344).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (step A344; N), a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer is prepared (step A345). ), The effect command setting process (step A346) is performed.

Next, in the case of high probability (step A338; Y), in the case of high probability final fluctuation (step A339; Y), when the special figure 1 is not changing (step A340; N), When the variation time is shorter than the remaining variation time of Toku-zu 1 (step A344; Y) and when step A346 is completed, the process proceeds to step A347 (FIG. 29).

When the process proceeds to step A347, the high-probability fluctuation number update process (step A347) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A348), and the special figure 2 game process number is an area for storing the special figure 2 game process number in the RWM. The processing number, that is, "1" is saved in the game processing number area (step A349), and the customer waiting demo flag area which is an area for setting the customer waiting demo flag in the RWM is cleared (step A350). After that, the signal regarding the start of special figure 2 fluctuation (the special symbol 2 during fluctuation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM ( Step A352), save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blink control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54) in the special figure 2 blink control timer area of the RWM (step A353), and specify the special characteristic of the RWM. The initial value (for example, "0" corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area in FIG. 2 during fluctuation (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended. In step A354, the reason why "0" is saved in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area is to start the variable display of the special figure 2 from the blank symbol.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A307 and A337) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. 30 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the variation start information setting process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the variation start information setting process of the first embodiment.

In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the information in the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3 is cleared. That is, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A491), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A491; Y), the variation pattern random number 1 and the variation pattern random number of the special figure 1 are set. 2, and the information (for reserved sphere 1) in the random number storage area (for reserved sphere 1) of the variation pattern random number 3 is cleared (step A491a). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A491; N), the information of the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step A491). A491b).

Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is the target special figure game processing timer area (that is, the special figure 1 game processing timer area during the information setting of the special figure 1, During the information setting of the special figure 2, the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A497).

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A498), and if the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step A498; N), it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is started (step S498). A499), when the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is not started (step A499; N), the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the area for storing the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer in RWM) is set to " "0" is saved (step A500).

On the other hand, when the long fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (step A499; Y), "9" is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A501). Then, when the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A498; Y), when the processes of steps A500 and A501 are completed, the process proceeds to step A502.

Note that the number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer) is set to the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 in order to change the time that is not sufficient for the 2-byte special figure game processing timer. If, for example, 60000 ms is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step A497 as the addition result of step A496 and "9" is saved as the number of repetitions in step A501, the timer interrupt processing (step A33 described above) is performed. The value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is decremented, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special figure game processing timer is decremented by 1 in the above step A36, and further in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in the above step A37. 60000 ms is set. Therefore, in this case, as a result, the total variation time of Toku-zu 2 is 60000 ms×10, which is a variation time of 10 minutes in this embodiment. Actually, since it is a timer interrupt of 4 ms, it is possible to set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, the case where it can be represented by multiplication of 60 seconds has been described as an example.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A502, the data (MODE) of the variation command corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A502), and the data (ACTION) of the variation command corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A503). ), effect command setting processing is performed (step A504).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the effect command setting process, prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer unless the effect serial transmission buffer is full. As a result, an effect command including prepared command data is transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control apparatus 100. The same applies when the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Further, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte structure such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like the effect command, but it may be configured in a byte structure of more than that. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multi-byte configuration may be used.

Next, when step A504 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A505). If the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A505; Y), the number of special figure 1 reservations is held. Is updated by "-1" (step A506), the address of the random number storage area of Toku-zu 1 is set and the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507), and the information of the empty area after the shift is cleared. (Step A508), the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

On the other hand, when the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step A505; N), the number of reserved special figure 2 is updated by "-1" (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of special figure 2 is set. Then, the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507a), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the starting storage unit (RAM111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the above-described effect command setting processing, and the effect control device 300 receives the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game, The detailed effect contents in the decorative special figure variation display game are set according to the determined variation pattern, and the decorative special figure variation display game is executed. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about a pattern (which may be referred to as a variation pattern command or the like) can be given. For example, each effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of the present embodiment. ..

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, details of the high-probability fluctuation number update processing (steps A317 and A347) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the high-probability variation number update processing according to the first embodiment.

In the high probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is in high probability (step A551), and if it is not in special figure high probability (step A551; N), , Ends the high probability fluctuation count update process.

When one of the types of the special figure variation display games of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the big hit game state, the winning probability of the other variation display game is controlled to be a low probability, but one is small. In the case of a hit, the other may have a high probability.

If the probability is high (step A551; Y), the number of times of high probability variation that manages the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state is updated to "-1" (step A552), and the high probability variation is calculated. It is determined whether the number of times is "0" (step A553).

When the number of times of high probability variation is not “0” (step A553; N), the updating process of number of high probability variations is ended. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is "0" (step A553; Y), the signal regarding the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A555). The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal that turns off the big hit 2 signal.

Then, a signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving (high probability & no time saving or high probability & time saving) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A556). The signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are the signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. A signal to turn off the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included. Further, even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step A557), the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A559), and the symbol to start fluctuating (special The high probability final variation flag corresponding to FIG. 1 or special figure 2) is set (step A560), and the high probability variation number updating process is terminated.

The high-probability final variation flag includes information that can determine the type of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that is a high-probability final variation. In addition, since the internal probability becomes low at the start of fluctuations in high-probability final fluctuations, information that indicates that fluctuations started during high probability even during low probability is now It is a probability final fluctuation flag. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, in the high-probability final change, the probability state of the target special map (the setting state in the game control device 100) is returned to the low probability at the start of the change. Thereby, when the game ball wins the starting opening during the special figure fluctuation which is the final time in the high probability state, it is possible to prevent a problem that the hit determination for the starting winning is determined with high probability.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG. 33 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special drawing 1 changing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special drawing 1 changing process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol determination frequency is output is updated by "+1" (step A571), and a command (decorative special figure 1 including stop pattern information for special figure 1) from the decorative special figure 1 command area Command) is loaded and prepared (step A572), and effect command setting processing (step A573) is performed.

Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A574), effect command setting processing (step A575) is performed, and a high probability final variation flag is set according to the state of the high probability final variation flag. It is determined whether there is a change (step A576). And if it is not the high probability final variation (step A576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is changed to this special symbol 1 variable display game. Is set as the stop display time (step A577), and when it is a high probability final fluctuation (step A576; Y), the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation is set as the stop display time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game this time. After setting (step A578), the process proceeds to step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579, for example.

To give an example of the display time of the special figure 1, in the case of the first embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. In some cases, the display time is set to 2000 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 136 ms. The display time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set to 7,000 ms.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A579 (FIG. 34), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 1 variable display game is out based on the information determined and set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process. (Step A579), if it is out (Step A579; Y), the process proceeds to Step A594, and if it is not out (Step A579; N), the special figure 2 is currently changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed). It is determined whether there is any (step A580).

It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 2 is changing is determined based on any of the information of the special figure 2 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area, and the information of the special figure 2 variation control flag area. You can That is, the configuration may be such that it is determined that “1” is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, or that it is changing when “special figure 2 changing” is set in the special figure status area. The configuration may be used, the configuration may be determined to be changing if the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area, or the combination may be used to make the determination.

Then, when the special figure 2 is also changing (step A580; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being executed (step A581), and the special figure 2 display process is not being executed. In the case (step A581; N), the number of symbol confirmation output times is updated by "+1" (step A582).

Next, when step A582 is finished and when the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (step A581; Y), the display time of this special figure 1 (time set in step A577 etc.) is set. For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (step A583), and the display time of the special figure 2 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A584). By the processing of steps A583 and A584, when the special figure 2 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 2 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of Toku-zu 2 is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 2 command including stop pattern information for special figure 2) is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and prepared (step A585), and effect command setting processing (step A586) is performed. Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A587), effect command setting processing (step A588) is performed, and special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step A589).

According to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, when the special figure 1 variable display game of this time in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is a win (big hit or small hit), the special figure being changed at the same time The variable display of 2 will be forcibly ended.

Next, when step A589 is completed and when the special figure 2 is not changing (step A580; N), the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step A590). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game this time is a small hit (step A591).

Then, in the case of a big hit but not a small hit (step A591; N), in order to control the big hit game after the end of the change in the special figure 1, the information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (the special figure 1 round number) Load the special map 1 round number upper limit value information that determines the upper limit value, save it in the round number upper limit value information area (step A592), load the information from the special map 1 big winning opening information area, and open the big winning opening Save in the information area (step A593).

Next, if the special figure 1 variable display game this time is out (step A579; Y), if the special figure 1 variable display game this time is small hit (step A591; Y), step A593 is ended. In that case, the process proceeds to step A594. When the process moves to step A594, the information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A594), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 (step A595) is performed, and the processing during fluctuation of special figure 1 is terminated. In the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variation display game based on the first start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variation display game based on the second start memory that is being executed at the same time.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (step A49) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35 is a view (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the processing during fluctuation of special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 36 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special drawing 2 changing process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol determination number of times is output is updated by "+1" (step A601), and a command (decorative special figure 2 including information on a stop symbol for the special figure 2) from the decorative special figure 2 command area Command) is loaded and prepared (step A602), and effect command setting processing (step A603) is performed.

Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A604), effect command setting processing (step A605) is performed, and a high probability final variation flag is set according to the state of the high probability final variation flag. It is determined whether there is a change (step A606). If it is not a high-probability final change (step A606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is changed to this special symbol 2 variable display game. Is set as the stop display time (step A607), and when it is a high probability final fluctuation (step A606; Y), the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation is set as the stop display time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game this time. The setting is made (step A608), and the process proceeds to step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A607 and A608 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A609, for example.

To give an example of the display time of the special figure 2, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a falling symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. In some cases, 600 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is the small hit pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. The display time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set to 7,000 ms. In the case of the first embodiment, the same design time is set for the stop design pattern, the big hit design pattern, the big hit design pattern, and the small hit design pattern, but different display times may be set.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A609 (FIG. 36), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 2 variable display game is out based on the information determined and set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process. (Step A609), if it is out (Step A609; Y), the process proceeds to Step A624. If it is not out (Step A609; N), the Toku-zu 1 is currently changing (Toku-zu 2 variable display game is being executed). It is determined whether there is any (step A610).

It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 1 is changing is determined based on any of the information of the special figure 1 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area, and the information of the special figure 1 change control flag area. You can That is, the configuration may be such that it is determined that “1” is being saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, or that it is being changed if “special figure 1 is changing” is set in the special figure status area. The configuration may be used, the configuration may be determined to be changing if the changing flag is saved in the Toku-zu 1 change control flag area, or the combination may be used to make a determination.

If the special figure 1 is also changing (step A610; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (step A611), and the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed. In the case (step A611; N), the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by "+1" (step A612).

Next, when step A612 is completed and when the process during display of special figure 1 is being executed (step A611; Y), the display time of special figure 2 this time (time set in step A607 or the like) For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 1 (step A613), and the display time of the special figure 1 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A614). By the processing of steps A613 and A614, when the special figure 1 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 1 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of Toku-zu 1 is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 1 command including stop pattern information for special figure 1) is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and prepared (step A615), and effect command setting processing (step A616) is performed. Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A617), effect command setting processing (step A618) is performed, and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step A619) is performed.

According to the processing of steps A609 to A619 described above, when the special figure 2 variable display game of this time in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure being changed at the same time The variable display of 1 is forcibly ended.

Next, when step A619 is completed and when the special figure 1 is not changing (step A610; N), the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step A620). It is determined whether or not the special display 2 variable display game this time is a small hit (step A621).

And when it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A621; N), in order to control the big hit game after the end of the change in the special figure 2, the information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (special figure 2 round number) Special figure 2 Round number upper limit value information that determines the upper limit value) is loaded and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A622), information is loaded from the special figure 2 big winning opening information area, and big winning opening is opened. It is saved in the information area (step A623).

Next, when the special figure 2 variable display game of this time is off (step A609; Y), when the special figure 2 variable display game of this time is small hit (step A621; Y), step A623 is ended. In that case, the process proceeds to step A624. When the process moves to step A624, the information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A624), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 1 (step A625) is performed, and the special figure 2 changing process is ended. In the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variation display game based on the second starting memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variation display game based on the first starting memory that is being executed at the same time.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 1 (step A595) in the special figure 1 changing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 1, first, "2" which is the process number related to the special figure 1 displaying process is set as a process number (step A631), and the process is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A632).

Next, the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area ( (Step A634), and the process transition setting process 1 for displaying special figure 1 is ended.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step A625) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 1, first, "2" which is the process number related to the special figure 2 displaying process is set as a process number (step A641), and the process concerned is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A642).

Next, the signal relating to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). In addition, the signal related to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A644), special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step A619) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. In addition, this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 forcibly ends the special figure 1 variable display game that has been fluctuating at the same time when the special figure 2 variable display game that started the fluctuation is a hit. It is a process to make it. That is, it is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and the device is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 2, first, "2" which is the process number related to the special figure 1 displaying process is set as a process number (step A651), and the process is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A652).

Next, the signal relating to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area ( (Step A654), the disengaged stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (the area for storing the stop symbol pattern in RWM) (step A655). In addition, in the special symbol 1 variable display game being executed, this stop symbol pattern area is usually already a predetermined stop symbol pattern in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process (depending on the extracted random number, it is a hit symbol pattern. There is also a case), but here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the stop symbol pattern. Also in subsequent steps A656 to 661 of this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset for forced termination in the same way.

Next, the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (the area for storing the special figure 1 round upper limit value information in RWM) is cleared (step A656), and the special figure 1 special winning opening information area (special figure in RWM The area for storing the 1 big winning opening information) is cleared (step A657), and the deviation information is saved for the small hit flag 1 area (step A658). The shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 1, and the information indicating whether the special figure 1 variable display game is the small hit or not. This is an area of the RWM for storing each of the information, and the information is normally set in the big hit flag 1 setting process, and the information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step A660), the deviation stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A661), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2 is ended. ..

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step A589) in the special figure 1 changing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 of the first embodiment. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game that started the fluctuation is a hit, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 forcibly ends the special figure 2 variable display game that has been fluctuating at the same time. It is a process to make it. That is, it is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and the device is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2, first, the process number "2" relating to the special figure 2 displaying process is set as a process number (step A671), and the process is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A672).

Next, the signal relating to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). In addition, the signal related to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area ( (Step A674), the disengaged stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (the area for storing the stop symbol pattern in RWM) (step A675). In addition, in the special symbol 2 variable display game being executed, this stop symbol pattern area is usually already a predetermined stop symbol pattern in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process (depending on the extracted random number, the hit symbol pattern is a hit symbol pattern). There is also a case), but here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the stop symbol pattern. In subsequent steps A676 to 681 of this routine, similarly, even if there is data once set in the normal step, it is cleared or reset to be forcedly ended in the wrong step.

Next, the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (the area for storing the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information in RWM) is cleared (step A676), and the special figure 2 special winning opening information area (special figure in RWM The area for storing the two major winning opening information) is cleared (step A677), and the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A678). The deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 2, and the information on whether the special figure 2 variable display game is the small hit or not. This is an area of the RWM that stores each of these pieces of information. Normally, information is set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and that information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step A680), the deviation stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A681), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 2 is ended. ..

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process (step A10) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 41, 42, and 43. FIG. 41 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 42 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM is displayed. Clear (step A702).

Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A703), and the information in the big hit flag 1 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is judged whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is judged as a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 The signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A706), the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared (step A707), and the effect command setting process (step A708) is performed to determine the number of rounds. The upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit, the signal that turns on the condition device operating signal, the signal that turns on the accessory continuous operation device operating signal, and the signal that turns on the special symbol 1 per signal Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "4", other, for example, “8” or “2” may be present) is acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and effect command setting process (step A715) is performed. ..

Next, the special winning opening opening information and a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON for jackpots other than the 2R hit chance, ON for the 2R hit jackpot in the high probability, and OFF for 2R hit jackpot in the low probability. In addition, the big hit 3 signals are turned on for big hits other than the 2R hit probability, turned off for the 2R hit big hit in the high probability, and turned on for the 2R hit big hit in the low probability.

After that, a jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step A717) and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step A718).

The information of the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A720), the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A721), and the process proceeds to step A724.

When moving to step A724, 3 is set as the processing number (step A724), the processing number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step A725), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step). Perform A726) and end the processing during display of special figure 1.

On the other hand, in step A705, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727), and the small hit flag 1 is small. When it is determined to be a hit (step A727; Y), it is determined whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A728).

Then, in step A728, when it is determined that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A728; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A728; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting process (step A730) is performed. Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A731), and the right-handing instruction notification flag is cleared (step A731). A732). Note that step A732 assumes a mode in which the right-handing instruction notification is made in the high-probability state, and is configured to clear the right-handing instruction notification flag because the high-probability state has been determined to have been determined as a high-probability final change. It is illustrated. However, if the present embodiment is a mode in which the right-handing instruction is not issued in the high probability state, the configuration in which step A732 is deleted (or the left-handing instruction notification in the high-probability state and the left-handing instruction notification in step A732) There may be a mode in which the flag is cleared).

Next, when step A732 is completed and when the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A728; N), commands are loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A733), and effect command setting processing (step A733). A734). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A735), and the effect command setting process (step A736) Then, it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state to be left-handed (for example, a state that is not in the normal electric power support state, a big hit or a special mode) (step A737).

When it is determined in step A737 that the predetermined state for left-handed stroke is reached (step A737; Y), the signal related to the left-handed stroke instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the indicator LED for right hitting, the number for left hitting is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step A739), and the process proceeds to step A743.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A737; N), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A740). The signal relating to the right-handing instruction is, for example, a signal that turns on the firing position designation signal 1. Next, in order to light the right-handed display LED, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A743.

When the process proceeds to step A743, the information of the special winning opening fraudulent winning number region is cleared (step A743), the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning port fraud monitoring period flag region (step A744), and the process proceeds to step A747. ..

When the process moves to step A747, the process for setting the special figure 1 small hit fanfare processing is performed (step A747), and the processing for displaying the special figure 1 is completed. In addition, in the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, the processing of saving "7" as the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms in the special figure 1 game processing timer area) ) Is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A727 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A748).
Then, when it is determined in step A748 that the high-probability final variation is in progress (step A748; Y), the probability of a hit result in the general figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game is set to the normal probability state ( A probability information command related to information to be a low probability state is prepared (step A749), and effect command setting processing (step A750) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A751), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A752), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is hit (big hit or small hit) (step A753). Note that step A752 is only an example assuming a mode in which right-handed instruction notification is performed in a high probability state, as in step A732 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is not hit (step A753; N), a signal related to left-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area ( (Step A754), to turn off the indicator LED for right hitting, the number for left hitting is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step A755). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is in the middle of a hit (during a big hit or a small hit), the player hits right with the aim of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38). Therefore, if the special figure 2 is hitting (step A753; Y), steps A754 and A755 are passed and the process proceeds to step A756. Also, when step A755 is completed, the process proceeds to step A756.

When the process moves to step A756, the information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) in the special figure status area of the RWM is cleared (information subtraction) (step A756), and the special figure 1 game is executed. The process number related to the special process 1 special process, that is, "0" is saved in the process number area (step A757), and the process during the special process 1 display is terminated. In addition, when step A756 is executed, the special figure status is either a state in which only the special figure 2 is changing or a state in which neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process (step A50) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 44, 45, and 46. FIG. 44 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the processing during display of the special figure 2 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 45 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step A761), and the information of the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM is displayed. Clear (step A762).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A763), and the information in the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step A764). Then, it is judged whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A765), and if it is judged as a big hit (step A765; Y), the big hit of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 The signal regarding the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A766), the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared (step A767), and the effect command setting process (step A768) is performed to determine the number of rounds. The upper limit value table is set (step A769). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the accessory continuous operation device, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "4", other, for example, “8” or “2” may be present) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (step A770). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A771).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A772), and the effect command setting process (step A773) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A774), and effect command setting process (step A775) is performed. ..

Next, the special winning opening opening information and a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the probability state. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON for jackpots other than the 2R hit chance, ON for the 2R hit jackpot in the high probability, and OFF for 2R hit jackpot in the low probability. In addition, the big hit 3 signals are turned on for big hits other than the 2R hit probability, turned off for the 2R hit big hit in the high probability, and turned on for the 2R hit big hit in the low probability.

After that, a jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step A777), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area ( Step A778).

The information in the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A780), the fraud monitoring outside-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A781), and the process proceeds to step A784.

When the processing shifts to step A784, 3 is set as the processing number (step A784), the processing number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step A785), and the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing (step A786) is performed, and the processing during the display of special figure 2 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A765, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A765; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787), and the small hit flag 2 is small. If it is determined to be a hit (step A787; Y), it is determined whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A788).

If it is determined in step A788 that the high-probability final variation is in progress (step A788; Y), the probability of a hit result in the general figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game is set to the normal probability state ( A probability information command related to information to be a low probability state is prepared (step A789), and effect command setting processing (step A790) is performed. Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power recovery (step A791), and the right-handing instruction notification flag is cleared (step A791). A792). It is to be noted that step A792 assumes a mode in which the right-handing instruction notification is made in the high-probability state, and the right-handing instruction notification flag is cleared because the high-probability state is determined to be a high-probability final change and the high-probability state has ended. It is illustrated. However, when the present embodiment is a mode in which the right-handing instruction is not issued in the high-probability state, step A792 is deleted (or the left-handing instruction is issued in the high-probability state and the left-handing instruction is issued in step A792). There may be a mode in which the flag is cleared).

Next, when step A792 is completed and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A788; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A793), and the effect command setting process (step A793) is performed. A794) is performed. Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A795), and the effect command setting process (step A796) Then, it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state that should be left-handed (for example, the normal power support state, the big hit or the special mode) (step A797).

When it is determined in step A797 that the left-handed state is the predetermined state (step A797; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A798). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the left-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A803.

When the process proceeds to step A803, the information of the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A803), the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A804), and the processing proceeds to step A807. ..

When the process proceeds to step A807, the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare middle process transition setting process (step A807) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying process is ended. In addition, in the special figure 2 small hit small fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, the processing of saving "7" as the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area, the small hit fanfare time (eg 4 msec in the special figure 2 game processing timer area) ) Is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A787 that the small hit flag 2 is not the small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A808).
Then, when it is determined in step A808 that the high probability final variation is in progress (step A808; Y), the probability of a hit result in the general figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game is set to the normal probability state ( A probability information command related to information to be a low probability state is prepared (step A809), and effect command setting processing (step A810) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power recovery (step A811), and the right-handing instruction notification flag is cleared (step A811). A812), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step A813). It should be noted that step A812 is only an example assuming a mode in which a right-handed instruction notification is made in a high probability state, as in step A792 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (step A813; N), a signal related to left-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area ( (Step A814), in order to turn off the indicator LED for right hitting, the number for left hitting is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step A815). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the midst of a big hit, it is in a state in which a right-handed hit is aimed at the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) that is opened at that time. When Toku-zu 1 is in a big hit (step A813; Y), steps A814 and A815 are passed and the process moves to step A816. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 is not in the big hit (step A813; N) (including the case where the special figure 1 is in the small hit), the process proceeds to step A816 after executing steps A814 and A815. However, the processing content regarding such right-handed and left-handedness varies depending on the board configuration of the gaming machine and the game nature, and is merely an example. Also, here, when step A815 is completed, the process proceeds to step A816.

When the process moves to step A816, the information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 changing display game is being executed) in the special figure status area of the RWM is cleared (information subtraction) (step A816), and the special figure 2 game is executed. The process number related to the special figure 2 normal process, that is, "0" is saved in the process number area (step A817), and the special figure 2 displaying process is terminated. In addition, when step A816 is executed, the special figure status is in a state in which only the special figure 1 is changing or neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S78) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 48 is a diagram (No. 2) showing the flowchart of the external information editing process according to the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S72), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S67), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S76), and the board radio fraud monitoring process (step S77) are used as the monitoring results. On the basis of the above, processing for creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal, an amusement hall internal management device, or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error state and security state, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The on-data of the open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, when neither the glass frame opening error nor the main body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, if the security signal control timer that clocks a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", "-1" is updated. (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized in the above-described main process and the initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the security signal control timer until the security signal control timer times out. ON data of the security signal is output as external information.

Next, during magnet fraud (step C80; Y), board radio fraud (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud (step C82; Y), special winning opening fraud (step C83; Y). Or, when the special fluctuation 2 abnormal variation is occurring (step C84; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is output as a test signal. The data is saved in the data area (step C86). In addition, even in the case where the illegal call is occurring, similarly, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) The configuration may be adopted.

On the other hand, if there is no magnet fraud, board radio fraud, frame radio fraud, general electric power fraud, special winning opening fraud, or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation (steps C80 to C84; N), switch abnormality 1 or It is determined whether or not the switch abnormality of the switch abnormality 2 is occurring (step C87), and when none of the switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; N), the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is output as a test signal. The data is saved in the data area (step C88).

If any switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C86). Here, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation, switch abnormality, and the like are abnormalities monitored by the winning opening switch/state monitoring processing in the timer interrupt processing.

Next, after finishing step C86 or C88, in the external information editing process, the winning signal (starting port 1 signal) of the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36, which is the starting winning port of Toku-zu 1 and normal variation winning device 37). ) Is performed, and the winning opening signal (starting opening 2 signal) of the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92 which is the starting winning opening of Toku-zu 2) is edited. A signal editing process (step C90) is performed. Subsequently, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C91) for editing a main prize ball signal relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol decision number signal is output based on the symbol decision number output number (symbol decision number signal output number). The symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step C92) for editing is performed, and the external information editing process is ended.

[Main processing]
Next, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits interruption.

[Step D12] The control unit performs the initial setting of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit allows interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit permits the display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each game machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)). ) Saves the initial value when the power is turned on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. The hall / player setting mode process is a process for accepting operations such as setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes the random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process by using, for example, the land function. Since the land function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the land function. A counter that increments by "1" like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as the random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes the received command check process. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 on the drawing content on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that the preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of a V blank interrupt (also called V sync interrupt). It is the timing to arrive at the target interval. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of the present embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and V blank interrupts occur twice, frame switching is performed, and the cycle of frame switching timing is twice the cycle of V blank interrupts (for example, 1/60 seconds). (For example, 1/30 seconds≈33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, frame switching (image updating) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or less than 1/30 second. Frame switching may be performed in a cycle.

By the frame switching timing determination process, the subsequent processes (steps D26 to D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) are executed at the frame switching timing for each of the above processing cycles. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the contents of the effect is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process of controlling various LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch state flag, and effects according to the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure changes per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of lent balls)) This is a process for performing mode correction.

[Step D31] The control unit executes information disclosure processing. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing performance information related to game performance to a player.
After executing Step D31, the control unit returns to Step D18, and thereafter repeatedly executes the processing of Step D18 to Step D31. That is, steps D18 to D31 form a loop process (which may be referred to as a main loop process in some cases) that is repeatedly executed in the processing cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated.

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal, etc. to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the received command check processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The reception command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The reception command (effect command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the game control device (main board) 100 sends the effect command to the effect control device 300. Are transmitted in sequence. In the following, such data that constitutes a command will be referred to as command data or command data.

Further, the command reception process from the main board is performed by the "command reception interrupt process" (not shown). In other words, in the serial communication of this example, hardware (automatically, by the function of the CPU) automatically performs transmission/reception, and when reception of a command is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) occurs and informs the serial reception. Although it is only necessary to retrieve from the buffer, in the above "command reception interrupt processing", each time there is a command reception interrupt, a command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, the command data loaded is checked for any abnormalities, and then the command The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is incremented by "1" by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, the term “storing” simply means readable and storable in a predetermined storage area for use in the subsequent control process (same below). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is composed of, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be greater than or equal to the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time for one cycle of the above-mentioned processing cycle) is stored.

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the command reception number is not “0 (zero)”. If the command reception number is not “0”, the process proceeds to step D43, and the command reception number is “0”. If so, the received command check processing ends. In the present application, "loading" data in the control process as in step D41 means extracting data from the RAM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of this example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of command receptions, "A = B" immediately after the execution of step D41. Immediately after the execution of step D43, the normal movement is "A = AB = 0", but in the embodiment of this example, the effect control device 300 is a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without disabling interrupts, so there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to "A←0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is deviated, so that the subtraction process "AB" is performed in step D43. It's done. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A ← 0".

[Step D44] The control unit controls the content of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, which may be simply referred to as the command buffer hereinafter) (that is, the command data stored at the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO (first in, first out) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit may update the value of the command read index, which is the read pointer of the command buffer, by increasing it by "1" in the range of "0" to "31", for example. Do it. The range of "0" to "31" here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, "32").

[Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not copying of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copying is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (the first stored data among the unread data in the command area, that is, the data to be read next). To do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes the received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process for analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the command this time). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command analysis process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit separates and stores the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process in MODE and the lower byte in ACT. In the case of a variation-type command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half variation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the latter half variation pattern. It is a thing.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the MODE value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the MODE value is not in the normal range. It should be noted that the value of MODE may not be defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that it is not in the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the reception command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

Further, in step D53, it is determined whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective ACT value are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D53, the upper and lower limits are separated. It is checked whether the value of the ACT thus set is within the range, and if the value is within the range, it is determined to be within the normal range (at this point, the missing tooth check described later cannot be performed).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the value of the separated ACT is the correct combination with respect to the value of the separated MODE. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT values are the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT values are not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined using, for example, a match check table. The match check table is a table in which all valid ACT values (ACTION values) are registered in order from the top address, and is provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the ACT value is the correct combination is executed including the check for missing teeth whether or not the combination of ACT is normal for MODE. There are multiple valid ACTs for one MODE, but their values are not necessarily continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth). Is being compared and confirmed whether is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is confirmed by comparing each of the valid values one by one.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. ..

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Further, the variable command (sometimes referred to as a variable command or a variable pattern command) is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of this variable command can take is the variable command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. .. The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to a big hit medium production, and the range of data of this big hit system command is the big hit system command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol-based command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol-based command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol-based command range. .. Design-related commands (sometimes referred to as design commands or decorative special drawing commands) are commands for instructing information related to special design designs (for example, what to do with the special design stop design), and this design command The range of data that can be taken is the symbol-based command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes the single-shot system command process (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the single-shot system command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot system command range. .. Note that, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / illegal commands, model specification commands, and the like. The range that the data of this single shot command can take is the single shot command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether the MODE data is within the prefetch symbol system command range. The control unit executes look-ahead symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range (step D64), and steps when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead symbol command range. Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the read-ahead variable command range. The control unit executes the read-ahead variable system command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the read-ahead variable system command range (step D66), and is received when the MODE data is not within the read-ahead variable system command range. The command analysis processing ends.

The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are commands for the look-ahead effect. Further, when the processing of any of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 ends, the received command analysis processing ends.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning memory (holding of the starting winning memory, or simply holding) in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed. In order to notify the player in advance whether or not the game will be a big hit (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) when it is executed after that, the start winning memory is held and displayed in an unusual manner. Etc. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variation system command, and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the hold of the starting winning a prize memory which is the object of pre-reading production, the game when starting winning a prize It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

Next, an information disclosure function that enables the user to perceive the setting information without excessively impairing gambling will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 67. First, the outline of the information disclosure function will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of an outline of the information disclosure function of the first embodiment.

The game control device 100 includes a set value change switch (set value change SW) 126, and can change the set value of the game performance. The setting value is from "0" to "5", and the hit probability of the special figure game can be changed in six levels. In addition, the game control device 100 includes a probability set value display device 136, and the set value set by using the set value change switch 126 can be confirmed by the numerical display of “0” to “5”.

The game control device 100 is provided with the set value change switch 126 and the probability set value display device 136 on the game control board, and the game control device 100 is provided on the back surface side of the front frame 12 of the game machine 10, so that the game is in progress. There is virtually no opportunity to be observed by any player. Further, the game control device 100 transmits various commands to the effect control device 300, but does not transmit the various commands to the effect control device 300 by including the information regarding the set value in the various commands. As a result, the gaming machine 10 eliminates the opportunity to confirm the set value by a device other than the game control device 100, and prevents leakage of the set value.

The production control device 300 does not receive a command including information about the set value from the game control device 100, but receives various commands associated with the progress of the game according to the set value. The effect control device 300 stores the game history in the FeRAM 323 based on the received various commands. Since the FeRAM 323 is a non-volatile storage unit, it is possible to accumulate a game history for a predetermined period without losing it even if the power is turned off. The performance control device 300 calculates the game performance from the accumulated game history.

The effect control device 300 includes a push button 25. The push button 25 is an operation unit that can accept an operation input, and includes the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. Here, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of the detection signal of the touch sensor and the detection signal of the push button SW. For example, the state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. The state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation on the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b. Hereinafter, the option setting unit 25 is referred to as a push button or PB (Push Button). The effect control device 300 can allow the player to select the display content of the performance information related to the game performance of the game machine 10 or select the notification opportunity of the performance information by the operation input by the push button 25.

The performance control device 300 can display the calculated performance information on the display device 41 with default display content or selected display content. In addition, the production control device 300 can display the calculated performance information on the display device 41 at the default notification opportunity or the selected notification opportunity. The display device 41 is one form of the notification means, and the effect control device 300 includes other effect means (for example, the speakers 19a and 19b, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, the board effect device 44, and the like). A sub display device, an LED, etc.) can be used as the notification means.

Thereby, the performance control device 300 can disclose the performance information as the actual value according to the operation of the gaming machine 10, and as a result, the setting information can be perceived. Moreover, since the effect control device 300 does not directly disclose the information regarding the set value to the player, the gambling property is not excessively agitated. Further, since the effect control device 300 does not receive the information regarding the set value from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 does not leak the set value to the outside. In this way, the gaming machine 10 enables the player to perceive the setting information without excessively impairing gambling.

Next, the information disclosure process executed by the performance control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the information disclosure process of the first embodiment. The information disclosure process is a process in which the effect control device 300 discloses the game performance according to the set value without acquiring the information regarding the set value from the game control device 100. The information disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The information disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D31 (see FIG. 49) of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit executes a setting process. The setting process is a process of accepting an operation of a player (which may be a manager or the like) and setting the disclosure content. The setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

[Step D72] The control unit executes a collection process. The collection process is a process for collecting the game history. The collection process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.
[Step D73] The control unit executes the aggregation process. The aggregation process is a process of calculating (aggregating) game performance from the collected game history. The totaling process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60.

[Step D74] The control unit executes an output information editing process. The output information editing process is a process of editing the output mode of the calculated game performance. The output information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D75] The control unit executes in-game disclosure processing. The in-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance during the game (special figure game) in the edited output mode. The in-game disclosure process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D76] The control unit executes the non-game disclosure process, and ends the information disclosure process after the non-game disclosure process. The non-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance in the edited output mode except during the game (special game). The non-game disclosure process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

Next, the setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the setting process of the first embodiment. The setting process is a process of accepting a player operation and setting the disclosure content. The setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D71 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D81] The control unit determines whether or not it is the setting reception timing. The setting reception timing is a timing that is set in advance as a timing at which the setting operation can be received, and for example, the customer waiting state is set as a timing that does not affect the progress of the game. The control unit proceeds to step D82 when it is the setting reception timing, and ends the setting process when it is not the setting reception timing.

[Step D82] The control unit causes the display device 41 to display the setting screen. As a result, the game machine 10 can guide the player to the setting operation according to the displayed contents.
[Step D83] The control unit sets the aggregation period according to the setting operation. The aggregation period is a period to be aggregated in the period in which the history is collected (history collection period). The control unit sets the aggregation period by making it possible to select whether the entire history collection period is the aggregation period or a part of the history collection period is the aggregation period. In addition, when a part of the history collection period is set as the aggregation period, the control unit can set either the start and end, or the start and end, and the size of the period. As a result, the control unit can set the period desired by the player as the aggregation period.

[Step D84] The control unit sets the output information according to the setting operation. The output information is performance information to be output from the calculated performance information. The control unit sets output information by making it possible to select whether to output all the calculated performance information or a part of the calculated performance information. Thereby, the control unit can output the performance information desired by the player.

[Step D85] The control unit sets the filter according to the setting operation. The filter filters the calculated performance information according to the gaming state. The control unit sets a filter by making it possible to select whether to output all of the gaming states for the calculated performance information or to output a specific gaming state for the calculated performance information. Thereby, the control unit can output the performance information in the game state desired by the player.

[Step D86] The control unit requests the player to confirm the setting contents, and when the player confirms the setting contents, proceeds to Step D87, and sets when the player does not confirm the setting contents (for example, cancels). The process ends.

[Step D87] The control unit updates the setting with the content received by the setting operation, and ends the setting process. Note that the control unit may set a valid period (for example, 3 hours) in the updated setting content and may restore the default setting after the valid period elapses. In addition, the control unit may set a default setting restoration condition (for example, transition to a customer waiting state) in the updated setting content and restore the default setting after the condition is satisfied.

Next, the display screen of the display device 41 during the setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the setting screen of the first embodiment.
The display screen 350 shown in FIG. 55 (1) is a display screen displayed in step D82. The display screen 350 includes the title of the setting screen and the guidance of the setting operation in the display contents. For example, the display screen 350 displays “setting guessing assist” as the title of the setting screen and operation guidance using the push button 25 as guidance for setting operation.

The display screen 351 shown in FIG. 55(2) is the display screen displayed in step D83. The display screen 351 is a display screen in which the aggregation period is being set, and the display content includes the title and the options in which the aggregation period is being set. For example, the display screen 351 displays "Aggregation period setting" as the title during the aggregation period setting, and "1. All period", "2. Variable period event", "3. Variable period" as options during the aggregation period setting. "Timer" and "4. Variable period user setting" are displayed. In addition, the display screen 351 displays the option being selected among the options for which the aggregation period is being set so as to be distinguishable from other options. For example, the display screen 351 indicates that the option “4. variable period user setting” is underlined and is being selected.

Note that the option “1. All period” is an option for totaling all periods of the accumulated history information. The option “2. Fluctuating period event” is an option in which a predetermined event trigger of the accumulated history information is set to the start and end, or the start or end. The option “3. Fluctuating period timer” is an option in which a predetermined timer trigger of the accumulated history information is set as the start and end, or the start or end. The option “4. Fluctuating period user setting” is an option in which the user sets one of the start and end of the accumulated history information or one of the start and end (the other is default).

A display screen 352 shown in FIG. 55(3) is a display screen when "4. Variable period user setting" is selected as an option during setting of the aggregation period. The display screen 352 is a display screen during option setting in the option “4. Fluctuating period user setting”, and includes the title and option setting content during option setting in the option “4. Fluctuating period user setting”. For example, the display screen 352 displays “Variable period user setting” as the title during option setting, and the totaling range selected from the history information accumulated as option setting contents (from “from here” indicated by hatching in the figure). Display the "up to here" range.

The display screen 353 shown in FIG. 55(4) is the display screen displayed in step D84. The display screen 353 is a display screen in which the output information is being set, and the display content includes the title and the options in which the output information is being set. For example, the display screen 353 displays "output information setting" as a title during output information setting, and displays "1. hit probability" and "2. corresponding setting value" as options during output information setting. In addition, the display screen 353 displays the option being selected among the options in the setting of output information so as to be distinguishable from other options. For example, the display screen 353 is underlined to indicate that the option “1. hit probability” is under selection. The selection during the output information setting may be to select the options exclusively, or to allow two or more options to be selected at the same time.

The option “1. hit probability” is an option that uses the hit probability in the special figure game (combination probability of the special figure game 1 and the special figure game 2, or each probability) as output information. The option “2. Corresponding setting value” is an option in which the setting value (estimated value) corresponding to the hit probability is used as output information.

The display screen 354 shown in FIG. 55(5) is the display screen displayed in step D85. The display screen 354 is a display screen during filter setting, and the display content includes the title and the option under filter setting. For example, the display screen 354 displays "filter setting" as a title during filter setting, and "1. all modes", "2. mode A", "3. mode B", "4" as options during filter setting. “Mode C”, “5. Low probability”, “6. High probability”, “7. Electric support”, and “8. Non-electric support” are displayed. In addition, the display screen 354 displays the option that is being selected among the options for which the filter is being set so as to be distinguishable from other options. For example, the display screen 354 underlines the option “6. High probability” to indicate that it is being selected.

Note that the option “1. All modes” is an option in which all output modes (or probability states) in the special drawing game are targets of output information. The options “2. Mode A”, “3. Mode B”, and “4. Mode C” are options in which the corresponding production mode of the production modes in the special figure game is the target of the output information. The option “5. Low probability” is an option for which the output information is a low probability state among the probability states of the special figure game. The option “6. High probability” is an option in which the high probability state of the probability states of the special figure game is the target of the output information. The option “7. Densapo” is an option for which the output information is the state (densapo) of the special electric game support state of normal electric power support. The option “8. Non-electric support” is an option for which output information is targeted for a state in which there is no general support (non-electric support) among the general support states of the special figure game.

The display screen 355 shown in FIG. 55(6) is the display screen displayed in step D86. The display screen 355 is a display screen for confirming the setting contents, and the display contents include a title for confirming the setting contents and options for confirming the setting contents. For example, the display screen 355 displays "Confirmation of setting contents" as the title during confirmation of the setting contents, and "OK" and "Cancel" as options during confirmation of the setting contents.

As a result, the game machine 10 can disclose the information desired by the player.
Next, the collection process will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the collection process of the first embodiment. The collection process is a process for collecting the game history. The collection process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The collection process is a process executed by the control unit in step D72 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D91] The control unit determines whether or not there is a game history reset instruction. The game history reset instruction is preferably input by an administrator, and is, for example, an operation input of the RAM initialization switch 112 of the game control device 100. The control unit proceeds to step D92 when there is a game history reset instruction, and proceeds to step D95 when there is no game history reset instruction.

[Step D92] The control unit clears the game history storage area (game history storage area). For example, the control unit clears the game history stored in FeRAM 323 to zero.
[Step D93] The control unit generates dummy data of the game history. The dummy data is data that prevents the game performance that largely deviates from the design value when the game history is small, and is generated based on, for example, the average game performance of all the set values. The dummy data may be prepared in advance.

[Step D94] The control unit stores the generated dummy data in the game history storage area.
[Step D95] The control unit determines whether or not a command (target command) including information for which the game history is to be collected has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D96 when the target command is received, and ends the collection process when the target command is not received.

[Step D96] The control unit acquires event information when the target command is received.
[Step D97] The control unit acquires the game state when the target command is received. The game state to be acquired is a game state used for filtering the target of output information, and includes, for example, a type of production mode, a probability state of a special figure game, a general electric support state of a special figure game, and the like.

[Step D98] The control unit associates the information to be collected in the game history with the game state when the target command is received, and stores the information as a game history in the game history storage area. The game history storage area is, for example, a ring buffer, and the latest game history can be stored for a predetermined period by overwriting old data with new data. This allows the gaming machine 10 to store the game history for a predetermined period including the dummy data. Further, the game machine 10 can accumulate the game history corresponding to the actual operation by replacing the dummy data with the game history.

Next, the game history stored in the game history storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the collected data of the first embodiment.
The control unit stores the game history as one event for each symbol change of the special figure game and one hit of the special figure game detected from the target command. The control unit assigns an event ID (ID) to each event and records the event type (type) and the event occurrence time (time). Further, the control unit records the probability state (probability change) of the special figure game in which the event occurs, the normal electric power support state (electric support) of the special figure game, and the type of the production mode (production mode) for each event.

For example, the game history of the ID "xxx111" is the type "fluctuation (symbol variation)" and the time "txxx111", and the gaming state at the time of the event occurrence is probability variation "high (high probability)" and electric support "present (general. Power support state)” and the production mode “A”. In addition, the game history of the ID “xxx211” is the type “fluctuation” and the time “txxx211”, and the gaming state at the time of event occurrence is probability variation “low (low probability)”, electric support “present”, and effect mode “A”. Is shown. In addition, the game history of the ID “xxx311” is the type “fluctuation” and the time “txxx311”, and the gaming state at the time of the event occurrence is probability variation “low”, electric support “none (non-normal power support state)”, staging Indicates that the mode is "B". Further, the game history of the ID "xxx701" is of type "hit (big hit)" and time "txxx701", and the game state at the time of event occurrence is probability variation "-(undefined)", electric support "-", and effect. Indicates that the mode is "-". Even if the game state at the time of event occurrence is undefined for the event of type "hit", the control unit triggers the occurrence of hit by referring to the game state at the time of event occurrence of the immediately preceding type "fluctuation". It is possible to specify the game state of the variable display.

Next, the totaling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the totaling process of the first embodiment. The totaling process is a process of calculating game performance from the collected game history. The totaling process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The tallying process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D101] The control unit determines whether it is the aggregation timing. The control unit sets the totaling timing when the production control device 300 has a sufficient processing resource. For example, the control unit sets a state in which the game is not in progress (waiting state for customers, etc.) or a symbol stop time after a change in the game during the game as the totaling timing. The control unit proceeds to step D102 when it is the aggregation timing, and ends the aggregation processing when it is not the aggregation timing.

[Step D102] The control unit acquires the aggregation period according to the setting.
[Step D103] The control unit aggregates the game history within the aggregation period among the game histories stored in the game history storage area for each game state.

[Step D104] The control unit stores the aggregation result (aggregation data) in the output information storage area (FeRAM323) and ends the aggregation process.
Next, the aggregated data stored in the output information storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of aggregated data of the first embodiment. The user-set period aggregation data shown in FIG. 59 is aggregation data that aggregates the game history within the user-set aggregation period among the game history stored in the game history storage area.

The user setting period total data includes the hit probability and the corresponding setting value for each game state. The game states that are individually aggregated in the user-set period aggregation data are "low probability medium,-(regardless of the general electric power support status)," low probability medium, with electric support "," low probability medium, without electric support ", There are "high probability medium,-", "high probability medium, with electric support", and "high probability medium, without electric support". In addition, the effect modes that are individually totaled in the user-set period total data include “all modes”, “mode A”, “mode B”, and “mode C”. For example, in the gaming state "low probability medium,-", the winning probability "1/210" and the corresponding set value "3" are used as the aggregation result. The corresponding set value is an estimated value of the set value, and a set value having a game performance (hit probability) close to the hit probability “1/210” is selected and used as the total result.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform totaling according to the gaming state. Further, the game machine 10 can perform a sufficiently reliable total depending on the game state even when the number of data is not sufficient by performing the total according to the game state. For example, in the gaming machine 10, even if the number of hit data is not sufficiently obtained during the low probability, the number of hit data may be sufficiently obtained during the high probability. Further, since the gaming machine 10 performs the totalization for each of a plurality of game states or a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to provide the totalization result that the player believes regardless of the authenticity of the totalization result. For example, the gaming machine 10 can give a high degree of satisfaction to a player who believes that the effect mode “mode A” is a total result that correctly reflects the gaming machine performance. It should be noted that such a mistake of the player is corrected in the process of converging to the true value as the data is accumulated, and the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with the convergence process to the true value as a new interest.

Note that the user-set period total data has been described, but the same may be applied to the total data of the other total period. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may aggregate the aggregated data of one aggregated period in parallel with the aggregated data of the other aggregated period, or one aggregate to save processing resources. It is also possible not to aggregate the aggregated data of other aggregated periods when aggregated the aggregated data of the periods.

It should be noted that a too irrelevant totaling result will confuse the player, so the gaming machine 10 can set the minimum amount of information regarding the totaling data. Next, securing of the minimum amount of information of aggregated data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of securing the minimum amount of information in the aggregated data of the first embodiment.

FIG. 60A shows the aggregated data that secures the minimum amount of information when the current day history information is used as the aggregated data. Since the history information on the day exceeds the minimum amount of information, all of it is used as aggregated data. The minimum information amount is a preset threshold value.

Next, FIG. 60(2) shows aggregated data in which the minimum amount of information is not secured when the current day history information is aggregated data. Since the current day history information does not exceed the minimum amount of information, the shortage is supplemented with dummy data. The amount of dummy data to be replenished can be reduced by increasing the current day history information.

As another example, FIG. 60(3) shows aggregated data in which the minimum amount of information is not secured when the current day history information is aggregated data. Since the current day history information does not exceed the minimum amount of information, the shortage is supplemented with the previous day history information. The amount of the previous day history information to be replenished can be reduced by increasing the current day history information.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure the minimum amount of information regarding the aggregated data, and can suppress the risk of presenting a misplaced aggregated result to the player.
Next, the output information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the output information editing process according to the first embodiment. The output information editing process is a process for editing the output mode of the calculated game performance. The output information editing process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The output information editing process is a process executed by the control unit in step D74 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D111] The control unit acquires the aggregation result of the aggregation process.
[Step D112] The control unit acquires the setting contents set in the setting process.
[Step D113] The control unit determines the output content (output mode) from the aggregated results according to the set content.

[Step D114] The control unit determines the output timing of the output content according to the set content or the game state, and ends the output information editing process. For example, the control unit determines at what timing the output content is output, depending on whether the game is being played, if the game is being played, it is changing, or if the game is hit. More specifically, the control unit can quickly determine the output timing when the game is not in progress. Also, the control unit can determine the output timing when the preset output condition is satisfied while the game is being played. The output condition set in advance takes into consideration the matching with the game effect and the influence on the game progress. For example, the control unit may generate an effect that can be replaced with the output content (for example, character dialogue effect) during the variable display, or an effect (for example, cut-in effect) that can be overlapped with the output content. Can be determined as the output timing. In addition, the control unit uses the output timing of an effect that can be replaced with the output content (for example, an interval effect) or an effect that can be overlapped with the output content (for example, an ending effect) when the hit is in progress. I can decide.

Next, the in-game disclosure process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the in-game disclosure processing of the first embodiment. The in-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance during the game (special figure game) in the edited output mode. The in-game disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The in-game disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D75 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D121] The control unit determines whether or not it is the information disclosure available timing based on the output timing determined in step D114 of the output information editing process. The control unit proceeds to step D122 when it is the information disclosure available timing, and ends the in-game disclosure processing when it is not the information disclosure available timing.

[Step D122] The control unit determines whether or not the information disclosure lottery has been won. When the lottery for information disclosure is won, the control unit proceeds to step D123 and thereafter to perform information disclosure. On the other hand, the control unit ends the in-game disclosure process without performing information disclosure when the information disclosure lottery is not won.

As described above, the control unit does not necessarily disclose information even at the timing at which information can be disclosed, and discloses information only when a lottery is won. Note that the control unit suppresses frequent information disclosure during the game by performing information disclosure with a lottery probability of “less than 1” at the disclosure possible timing during the game (for example, during reach production in the variable display game). In addition, the control unit responds to the disclosure request of the player by performing information disclosure with a lottery probability of "1" at the disclosure possible timing during the non-game (for example, waiting for customers).

[Step D123] The control unit acquires the output content determined in step D113 of the output information editing process.
[Step D124] The control unit selects an effect pattern according to the output content. For example, the control unit selects one or more selectable effect patterns (for example, cut-in, character dialogue, etc.) prepared in advance.

[Step D125] The control unit sets the selected effect pattern so that it can be output by the notification means, and ends the in-game disclosure process.
Next, the information disclosure effect of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the information disclosure screen of the first embodiment. FIG. 64 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the information disclosure screen of the first embodiment.

The display screen 500 shown in FIG. 63 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol is stopped, and the symbol is stopped and displayed before the start of the fluctuation in the variation display game. The display screen 500 displays a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, a hold display 505, and a hold digestion display 506.

The large symbol group 501 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 501 is displayed in a large size by setting the variable display area in the substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 501 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

On the display screen 500, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", the middle symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the right symbol is "7". It shows that it is stopped at. That is, on the display screen 500, the large symbol group 501 indicates that the special symbol variable display game is in a stopped state (the symbol is stopped).

The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notification of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 502 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect of the large symbol group 501. The small symbol group 502 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. On the display screen 500, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol that constitute the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 501 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 502, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode thereof can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 502 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 501, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, position fixing).

The special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is “4”. The special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays the number of pending storage of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 2 holding number display 504 indicates that the number of holding memories of the special figure 2 game is “0”. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 505 corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special figure 1 pending number display 503 and the number of pending storages displayed by the special figure 2 pending number display 504.

For example, as shown in the display screen 500, when the special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays “4” and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays “0”, the hold display 505 displays four hold storage displays. Indicates that the number of reserved memories is "4".

The hold display 505 can clearly indicate the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game by the display mode (the hold storage display displayed on the hold display 505), and can also notify the expected degree of the game result for each hold storage.

Depending on the display mode, the hold exhaustion display 506 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state, and can also notify the degree of expectation for the game result. On the display screen 500, the pending consumption display 506 is blank (blank) to indicate that the special figure variation display game is stopped. After that, the gaming machine 10 starts variable display.

The display screen 510 shown in FIG. 63(2) is the display screen after the variable display is started. The display screen 510 is a screen after the display screen 500 and shows a screen which is being variably displayed (three symbols are being changed). On the display screen 510, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 501 are changing, which indicates that the special symbol variable display game is being variably displayed. Further, on the display screen 510, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, which indicates that the special symbol variable display game is being variably displayed.

On the display screen 510, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the special figure 1 game hold storage number is “3”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 shows the special figure 2 game hold storage number. “0” is displayed, and the hold display 505 indicates that the number of held memories of the special figure variation display game is “3”. Further, on the display screen 510, the pending consumption display 506 displays a pending storage display during the digestion, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the variation display.

The display screen 511 shown in FIG. 63(3) is a display screen when the reach effect is generated after the start of the variable display. The display screen 511 is a screen after the display screen 510, and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols display “3”. The gaming machine 10 can disclose the information calculated from the game history by the occurrence of a predetermined effect during the reach change.

The display screen 512 shown in FIG. 63(4) is a display screen of the cut-in effect during the reach effect. The display screen 512 is a screen after the display screen 511, and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols display “3”. The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation in the cut-in display 513 (cut-in production) for the variation display during the reach production. The cut-in display 513 produces a predetermined degree of expectation by the character 514 such as a rocket and the background. Further, the cut-in display 513 displays the disclosure information 515. For example, the disclosure information 515 includes “1/200” as the winning probability in the gaming state and the total period set by the player. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform information disclosure in cooperation with the game effect during the game.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 includes the disclosure information 515 in the display content in the cut-in effect during the reach effect, but the display contents are not limited to this, and other variable displays such as character effect, development effect, temporary stop, re-changing, etc. It may be in the middle or the symbol is stopped.

A display screen 516 shown in FIG. 64(1) is a display screen of the interval effect being hit. The display screen 516 includes a hit type display 517, a game guide 518, a round display 519, and disclosure information 520 in the display content. The hit type display 517 indicates a hit name (for example, “X bonus”) on the effect. The game guide 518 guides the player that the batting direction is the right side game area. The round display 519 displays a symbol (for example, a star display) corresponding to the round and indicates the current round number and the final round number. The disclosure information 520 includes “1/210” as the winning probability in the gaming state, the aggregation period set by the player. As a result, the game machine 10 can disclose information in cooperation with the winning game production.

Although the game machine 10 includes the disclosure information 520 in the display content in the hitting interval effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be during fanfare, during a round, during ending, or the like.

A display screen 521 shown in FIG. 64(2) is a display screen during normal power support (power support). The display screen 521 includes a game state display 522, a game guide 518, and disclosure information 523 in the display content. The game state display 522 shows a game state name (for example, "electric support"). The game state display 522 may display a game effect name (for example, "mode A"). The disclosure information 523 displays a character in association with the disclosure information, such as “1/21” as the winning probability in the gaming state for the total period set by the player. For example, a character such as a tiger suggests a setting (eg, setting "2") that corresponds to a hit probability of "1/21".

The gaming machine 10 may perform information disclosure limited to the gaming state in addition to the player's setting or instead of the player's setting. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the display screen 521 may display, as the disclosure information 523, the hit probability during the universal power support (electric power support). Similarly, the gaming machine 10 causes the display screen 521 to display hit probability in the high probability (including the latent probability variation), high probability (excluding the latent probability variation), and other gaming states as the disclosure information 523. May be.

Further, on the display screen 521, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is “0”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 shows the special figure 2 game hold storage. Indicates that the number is "4". Note that, on the display screen 521, the visibility of the disclosure information 523 is prioritized, and the hold display 505 and the hold exhaustion display 506 are hidden but may be displayed.

A display screen 524 shown in FIG. 64(3) is a display screen (another example) during normal power support (power support). The display screen 524 includes a game state display 522, a game guide 518, and disclosure information 525 in the display content. The game state display 522 shows a game state name (for example, "electric support"). The disclosure information 525 displays a character in relation to the disclosure information, such as “1/18” as the winning probability in the gaming state for the total period set by the player. For example, a character such as a boy suggests a setting (for example, setting "4") corresponding to the hit probability "1/18".

A display screen 526 shown in FIG. 64(4) is a display screen waiting for customers. The display screen 526 includes disclosure information 527 and operation guidance 528 in the display content. The disclosure information 527 displays “mode A” as a game effect name (may be a game state name) set by the player, displays a hit probability “1/170” in the game effect “mode A”, and a hit probability “ The setting "5") is displayed as the setting corresponding to 1/170". The operation guide 528 displays a push button 25 corresponding to the operation unit and the operation guide. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 may be able to update the total period, total contents, and display contents of the information disclosure waiting for the customer at any time according to the received operation.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform the suggestion of setting the winning probability in addition to the character, or by displaying the background instead of the character. Next, the suggestion for setting the hit probability by the background display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion aspect of the first embodiment.

Background display during information disclosure has a plurality of types of display modes according to suggested setting values. The estimated set value "0" displays the background in a white (illustrated in plain light color) display mode. The estimated setting value “1” displays the background in a blue (hatched hatching) display mode. The estimated set value “2” displays the background in a green (shown by cross hatching) display mode. The estimated set value “3” displays the background in a red (solid dark color) display mode. The estimated setting value “4” displays the background in a petal pattern display mode. The estimated setting value “5” displays the background in a rainbow display mode.

Accordingly, the control unit can suggest the estimated set value with the background color of the predetermined effect display. For example, the control unit can suggest the estimated set value “3” by setting the background display of the cut-in effect during the reach effect to a solid dark color on the display screen 512 shown in FIG. 63(4). The control unit may suggest the estimated set value not only in the background color of the effect display but also in other display locations. Further, the control unit may suggest the estimated set value not only by the color and the pattern but also by other display modes.

Next, the non-game disclosure process will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the non-game disclosure process of the first embodiment. The non-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance in the edited output mode except during the game (special game). The non-game disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The non-game disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D76 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D131] The control unit determines whether or not there is a disclosure request operation during a non-game. For example, the control unit determines that a predetermined operation input from the push button 25 waiting for a customer is a disclosure request operation during a non-game. The control unit proceeds to step D132 when there is a disclosure request operation during a non-game, and ends the non-game disclosure processing when there is no disclosure request operation during a non-game.

[Step D132] The control unit accepts a disclosure content selection operation such as an aggregation period, a game state, and a display content.
[Step D133] The control unit discloses information on the aggregated data in the aggregation period and the gaming state selected by the player. For example, the control unit discloses information by the display device 41.

[Step D134] The control unit determines whether to end the information disclosure. The control unit determines that a predetermined operation input from the push button 25 waiting for a customer is an information disclosure end operation. Further, the control unit determines that the game start is an information disclosure end operation. When the information disclosure has not ended, the control unit proceeds to step D132 and continues the information disclosure. On the other hand, the control unit ends the non-game disclosure process when ending the information disclosure.

As a result, the game machine 10 can disclose desired aggregated data to the player even during non-game.
Next, the in-game disclosure process of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the in-game disclosure process of the modified example of the first embodiment. The game machine 10 of the modified example discloses information at the time of an effect (for example, a push button effect) accompanied by reception of a player operation during the game. The in-game disclosure process of the modified example is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The in-game disclosure process of the modified example is a process executed by the control unit in step D75 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D141] The control unit determines whether or not the player operation is received during the reception time of the effect accompanied by the reception of the player operation. The control unit proceeds to step D142 when the player operation is not accepted, and proceeds to step D143 when the player operation is accepted.

[Step D142] When there is no reception of the player operation, the control unit selects a game production pattern (non-reception effect pattern) when the player operation is not received. The control unit sets the selected non-reception effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. In this way, the gaming machine 10 does not give the player an opportunity to disclose information when the player's operation is not accepted. As a result, the game machine 10 can encourage the player to participate in the game.

[Step D143] When the player operation is accepted, the control unit performs a lottery as to whether or not to disclose information. The control unit proceeds to step D144 if the lottery for information disclosure is unsuccessful, and proceeds to step D145 if wins the lottery for information disclosure.

[Step D144] When the lottery for disclosing information is unsuccessful, the control unit selects a game effect pattern (reception effect pattern) which is a game effect pattern when the player operation is accepted and which does not involve information disclosure. To do. The control unit sets the selected reception effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. As described above, the gaming machine 10 prepares a case where the player is not given an opportunity to disclose information even when the player operation is accepted. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the value of the benefit of information disclosure and encourage the player to participate in the game.

[Step D145] When the lottery for disclosing information is won, the control unit acquires the output content determined in step D113 of the output information editing process.
[Step D146] The control unit selects an effect pattern (a game effect pattern accompanied by information disclosure (disclosure effect pattern)) that is a game effect pattern when a player operation is received and is in accordance with the output content. The control unit sets the selected disclosure effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. In this way, the game machine 10 gives the player an opportunity to disclose information while producing rarity even when the player operation is accepted. As a result, the game machine 10 can increase the value as a privilege for information disclosure and encourage the player to participate in the game.

The game performance of the game machine 10 may change by changing the setting. Further, since the game machine 10 involves power-on to change the setting, it is desirable to collect data in history information units in a range that does not cross power-on if a sufficient amount of data can be secured. In addition, the gaming machine 10 compares history information before and after power-on to estimate presence/absence of setting change, and powers on if history information across power-on is estimated not to be changed. You may make it consider it as the history information of the range which does not straddle.

Although the gaming machine 10 can notify the winning probability and the estimated set value, other performance information may be notified. For example, the gaming machine 10 may notify the probability variation inrush rate, the electric support rush rate, the probability variation or the number of consecutive hits during the electric support, the number of winning prize balls, the base, or the like.

The settings in the game machine 10 may be set as follows to prevent fraud.
(1) The game control device 100 executes a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 when the settings are changed. As a result, the game machine 10 prevents the game control from being performed over different set values.

(2) The game control device 100 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 at the time of changing the setting and confirming the setting. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can notify an externally connected device (for example, an information disclosure device such as a hall computer or a call lamp) that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed. The externally connected device that has input the security signal can notify by means of notification means (a lamp, a sound (including voice), etc.) that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed. The game control device 100 may output a common security signal for setting change and setting confirmation, or may output a security signal capable of distinguishing setting change and setting confirmation.

(3) The game control device 100 is housed in the board box and attached to the back side of the front frame 12. The game control device 100 is protected by a sealed board box, except that required operation parts (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), various connectors, etc. are exposed to the outside. As a result, the main medium (game microcomputer 111 or the like) that triggers a change in settings or a shift in setting confirmation is protected by the sealed board box. Further, in the game control device 100, the setting key switch 127 is faced to the outside, and the required operation units (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) other than the setting key switch 127 are sealed by a board box. It may be something to protect.

(4) The game control device 100 does not have a setting key by requiring the operation of the setting key switch 127 to access the main medium (game microcomputer 111 or the like) that triggers the transition of setting change or setting confirmation. Eliminate access to third-party primary media. The game control device 100 may be configured to enable access to a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) by operating the setting key switch 127. For example, the game control device 100 may have a configuration (for example, opening and closing an operation window) that allows the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 to be physically operated by operating the setting key switch 127. The operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 may be activated electrically or logically by operating the key switch 127, or a combination thereof may be employed.

(5) The game control device 100 is a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), required information display unit (state display device 135, probability setting value display device 136). Is controlled by the game microcomputer 111. The game control device 100 may be provided with an error release switch used for error release and a game start switch for giving a game start opportunity. The error release switch and the game start switch are also controlled by the game microcomputer 111. You can

(6) The game control device 100 determines four power-on states from the combination of the input states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the game control device 100 is in a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is set when the setting value can be confirmed. Is forcibly initialized to a RAM clear (RWM clear) state, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, a power failure recovery (power recovery) state in which the power is turned on is set.

(7) In the setting change state, the gaming machine 10 can change the setting in the following steps. When the power supply is off, the setting key switch 127 is off, and the setting key is inserted (step 1). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to switch the setting key switch 127 to the ON state (step 2). When the power is turned on (power switch is turned on) while the RAM initialization switch 112 is being pressed (ON), the setting is changed (step 3). In the setting change state, the setting value is changed each time the setting value change switch 126 is pressed (step 4). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) and the setting key switch 127 is switched to the OFF state to confirm the setting value, and the setting change state is finished (step 5).

At this time, a notification means (for example, display by the display device 41, sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, light emission by the frame decoration device 18 or the panel decoration device 46) notifies the setting change in steps 3 and 4, and At 5 the RAM clear is notified. The external information output means (for example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs the security signal in steps 3 and 4, and stops the output of the security signal in step 5. The game control device 100 executes RAM clear in step 3 prior to the RAM clear notification in step 5. That is, the game control device 100 prioritizes the setting change notification over the RAM clear notification, thereby promptly issuing the setting value change notification and improving the effect as a fraud prevention measure. The probability set value display device 136 is turned off in steps 1 and 2, the set value is displayed in steps 3 and 4, and is turned off in step 5. Further, the state display device 135 turns off the light in steps 1 to 4, and displays the base value in step 5. The gaming machine 10 may be provided with the state display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136 integrally, and for example, the state display device 135 may double as the probability set value display device 136. In that case, the state display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 and 2, the set value is displayed in steps 3 and 4, and the base value is displayed in step 5. The game state of the game control device 100 is before the game starts in steps 3 and 4, starts in step 5, and is in the game thereafter.

(8) The gaming machine 10 can perform setting confirmation in the following steps in the setting confirmation state. When the power supply is off, the setting key switch 127 is off, and the setting key is inserted (step 1). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to switch the setting key switch 127 to the ON state (step 2). When the power is turned on (power switch is turned on) without pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (OFF), the setting confirmation state is set (step 3). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to switch the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state to end the setting confirmation state (step 4).

At this time, the setting confirmation is notified in step 3 by the notifying means (for example, the display by the display device 41, the sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46). The external information output means (for example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs the security signal in step 3 and stops the output of the security signal in step 4. The probability set value display device 136 is turned off in steps 1 and 2, the set value is displayed in step 3, and turned off in step 4. The state display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 3 and displays the base value in step 4. The gaming machine 10 may be provided with the state display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136 integrally, and for example, the state display device 135 may double as the probability set value display device 136. In that case, the state display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 and 2, the set value is displayed in step 3, and the base value is displayed in step 4. The game state of the game control device 100 is before the start of the game in step 3, is started in the step 4, and is in the game thereafter.

The gaming machine 10 can change the setting and confirm the setting only before starting the game when the power is turned on. As a result, the gaming machine 10 eliminates setting changes and setting confirmations during the game and facilitates operation guarantee during the game.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 has a main control device (game control device 100) that controls a game by making settings related to the game selectable from a plurality of types, and a slave control that performs effect control based on a command from the main control device. A device (effect control device 300) is provided. The slave control device includes a control unit (CPU311) that generates a game history based on a command, calculates a game performance in a predetermined game state from the game history, and notifies the game performance at a predetermined notification trigger.

(2) The control unit of (1) generates a game history based on a command accompanying the progress of the game according to the set value.
(3) The control unit of (1) accepts the operation of the player (or the administrator, etc.) and sets the notification content (disclosure content).

(4) The control unit of (1) notifies (discloses) the game performance during the game (special figure game).
(5) The control unit of (1) notifies (discloses) the game performance except during the game (special figure game) (for example, waiting for a customer).

(6) The control unit of (1) makes it possible to set a period (aggregation period) to be aggregated among the periods for collecting history (history collection period).
(7) The control unit of (1) sets the minimum amount of information for the aggregated data, and fills the shortage of the minimum amount of information with dummy data.

(8) The control unit of (1) sets the minimum amount of information about the aggregated data, and determines the shortfall of the minimum amount of information by using past history information (for example, previous day history information, or similar aggregated data even before the previous day). (Historical information etc.)

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. Conventionally, one control program has been shared for the same processing, such as using the same table data even if different input parameters (commands) are used for the effect control process in the effect control device 300. However, when it is desired to modify only the processing of some input parameters (commands) in the development process, the development burden tends to increase. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment prepares each control program when the input parameters (commands) are different even in the same processing such as using the same table data. As a result, when the gaming machine 10 wants to modify only the processing of some input parameters (commands) in the development process, it is sufficient to modify the modification range only for the processing of the input parameters, and the program development burden can be reduced.

First, a typical variable display sequence of the special figure game (special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display sequence of the second embodiment.

In the illustrated variable display sequence, the time T00 from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the fluctuation stop timing t3 is the fluctuation display time (including the temporary stop time, excluding the symbol stop time). In this fluctuation display sequence, the time T01 from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the timing t1 is the first half fluctuation, the time T02 is the second half fluctuation from the timing t1 to the timing t2, and the time T03 from the timing t2 to the fluctuation stop timing t3 is a temporary stop. To do.

Production control device 300 receives a variation start command from game control device 100 to start symbol variation (variation start), and receives a stop command to stop symbol variation (variation stop). The fluctuation start command may be one command or a command set including two or more commands (for example, a stop symbol command, a fluctuation pattern command, a hold command, etc.).

The effect control device 300 receives the variation start command and determines the effect control content for each of the first half variation, the second half variation, and the temporary stop. The latter half fluctuation may include temporary stop. Therefore, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation by one effect control program, and determines the effect control content of the latter half variation by another effect control program. Further, the variable display sequence can include one or more sub effects as a sub sequence in the basic sequence when the first half variation, the second half variation, and the temporary stop are the basic sequences.

For example, the effect control device 300 can selectively include the sub effect of the time T04 and the sub effect of the time T05 in the first half change from the change start timing t0 to the timing t1.

The effect control device 300 determines (lottery) all the effect control contents by the start of the first half variation, and performs the effect control during the change according to the determined effect control content. The contents of the effect control may be determined (lottery) at any time according to the progress of the control.

Next, the effect distribution for each effect control program that determines the effect control content in the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect control unit of the variable display according to the second embodiment.

The table in FIG. 69(1) shows a combination of the first-half variation and the second-half variation in units of effect control program. First-half variation "Shortening loss", "Normal loss", "Step-up loss", and "Pseudo continuous loss" have no pairing second-half variation. That is, the first-half variation “shortening loss”, “normal loss”, “step-up loss”, and “pseudo continuous loss” pass the second-half variation and are temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, the first-half fluctuations “normal reach”, “step-up reach”, and “pseudo continuous reach” are paired with the second-half fluctuations “step-up distribution”. The latter half fluctuation “step-up distribution” has two or more distribution patterns, although details are omitted.

Production control device 300, in the first half variation "shortening loss", "normal loss", "normal reach", "step-up loss", "step-up reach", "pseudo continuous loss", and "pseudo continuous reach" respectively. Prepare a corresponding production control program. Moreover, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program corresponding to each distribution pattern of the latter half variation “step-up distribution”.

The table in FIG. 69(2) shows a list of sub effects. The sub effects include "PB (push button) notice" and "PB background change". Production control device 300 prepares a production control program corresponding to each sub production.

It should be noted that the effect control program may be one in which one effect control program is provided corresponding to one input parameter (command), or one effect control program corresponding to two or more input parameters (commands). A program may be provided. Further, the effect control program is not limited to an independent program as long as the control unit is independent, and may be a subroutine or the like in one program.

Next, the effect control program and the reference table group in the first half variation will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program of a production control unit and a reference table group in the first half variation of the second embodiment.

The production control device 300 executes the first-half variation program (production control program) "program MP1" while referring to the reference table group (table set) "table set MA", so that the production control content of the first-half variation "shortening loss". To decide.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first-half variation “normal loss” by executing the first-half variation program “program MP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”.

Moreover, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first-half variation “normal reach” by executing the first-half variation program “program MP3” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first-half variation “step-up loss” by executing the first-half variation program “program MP4” while referring to the reference table group “table set MC”.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first-half variation “step-up reach” by executing the first-half variation program “program MP5” while referring to the reference table group “table set MC”.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first-half variation "pseudo continuous loss" by executing the first-half variation program "program MP6" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD".

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first-half variation "pseudo continuous reach" by executing the first-half variation program "program MP7" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD".

In this way, the performance control device 300 prepares a performance control program for each first half variation. In addition, production control device 300 prepares a table set for each first half variation. The table set may be prepared for each effect control program (for example, table set "table set MA"), or shared by two or more effect control programs (for example, table set " Table set MB").

Next, the effect control program and the reference table group in the sub effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program of a production control unit and a reference table group in the sub production of the second embodiment.

The effect control device 300 executes the sub-effect program (effect control program) "program SP1" while referring to the reference table group (table set) "table set SA" to control the effect of the sub-effect "PB notice". To determine.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the sub effect "PB background change" by executing the sub effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB".

In this way, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program for each sub effect. The effect control device 300 also prepares a table set for each sub effect. The table set may be prepared for each effect control program (for example, the table set “table set SA”), or may be shared by two or more effect control programs.

In addition, although the combination of the control program of the effect control unit and the reference table group has been described for the first half variation and the sub-effect, the same applies to the second half variation. In the following, the first half variation and the sub-effect will be described, and the same description of the second half variation will be omitted.

Next, the effect control program executed in the first half variation effect control content determination process and the table set referred to will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program and a reference table group in the first half variation execution control of the second embodiment.

When the production control device 300 receives the variation start command regarding the normal loss, by executing the first half variation program “program MP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”, from the variation start timing t0 to the timing t1. The content of the production control for the first half variation "normal loss" is determined.

Further, when the production control device 300 receives the variation start command regarding the normal reach, by executing the first half variation program “program MP3” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”, the timing from the variation start timing t0. The effect control content of the first-half variation "normal reach" up to t1 is determined.

The first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” are prepared separately, but the reference table groups to be referred to are the same (reference table group “table set MB”) and the control contents are the same. is there.

Further, the first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” are capable of executing the sub-effects “PB notice” and “PB background change” during the first-half variation, respectively. For example, the effect control device 300 determines whether to execute the sub effect "PB notice" while the first-half variation program "program MP2" or "program MP3" is being executed. The production control device 300 executes the sub production program "program SP1" while referring to the reference table group "table set SA" when executing the sub production "PB notice", thereby performing the sub production "at time T04." The effect control content of "PB notice" is determined. Further, the effect control device 300 determines whether to execute the sub effect “PB background change” while the first-half variation program “program MP2” or “program MP3” is being executed. The production control device 300 executes the sub production program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB" when executing the sub production "PB background change", so that the sub production of the time T04. The effect control content of "PB notice" is determined.

Next, the table set “table set MB” that the production control device 300 refers to while the first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” are being executed will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first-half variation of the second embodiment.

The table set "table set MB" includes a table "table MB1", a table "table MB2", a table "table MB3", a table "table MB4", and a table "table MB5".

Each table is a data table and includes an effect pattern that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and a selection probability (lottery probability) thereof. For example, the table “table MB1” includes effect patterns “pattern 11”, “pattern 12”, “pattern 13”, and “pattern 14”. The table "table MB2" includes effect patterns "pattern 21" and "pattern 22". The table "table MB3" includes effect patterns "pattern 31" and "pattern 32". The table "table MB4" includes effect patterns "pattern 41" and "pattern 42". The table "table MB5" includes effect patterns "pattern 51" and "pattern 52". The effect patterns included in each table may be only one or may be two or more.

The solid lines connecting the tables in the figure show the control sequences of the first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”. For example, the first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” have a control sequence that first refers to the table “table MB1” and selects an effect pattern defined by the table “table MB1”. The first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” refer to the table “table MB2” when the production pattern “pattern 11” is selected in the table “table MB1”, and the production pattern defined by the table “table MB2” Has a control sequence for selecting. Further, in the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the effect pattern “pattern 12” is selected in the table “table MB1”, the table “table MB3” is referred to and the table “table MB3” defines. It has a control sequence for selecting an effect pattern. Also, in the first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the effect pattern “pattern 13” or “pattern 14” is selected in the table “table MB1”, the effect control content of the sub effect “PB notice” is set. It has a control sequence for executing the sub effect program "program SP1" to be determined (execution of the sub sequence).

Then, in the first-half fluctuation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the effect pattern “pattern 21” is selected in the table “table MB2”, the first-half fluctuation ends and the second-half fluctuation “second half A” is connected to the control sequence. Have. Further, in the first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the effect pattern “pattern 22” is selected in the table “table MB2”, the table “table MB4” is referred to and the table “table MB4” defines. It has a control sequence for selecting an effect pattern.

Then, in the first-half fluctuation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the effect pattern “pattern 31” is selected in the table “table MB3”, the first-half fluctuation is ended and the second-half fluctuation “second half A” is connected to the control sequence. Have. Further, in the first-half fluctuation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the effect pattern “pattern 32” is selected in the table “table MB3”, the control sequence in which the first-half fluctuation is ended and the latter-half fluctuation “second half B” is connected Have.

Then, in the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the effect pattern “pattern 41” or “pattern 42” is selected in the table “table MB4”, the first half variation is ended and the second half variation “second half A”. ”To the control sequence.

Then, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" refer to the table "table MB5" after executing the sub-effect program "program SP1", and select an effect pattern defined by the table "table MB5". Has a sequence.

Then, in the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the effect pattern “pattern 51” is selected in the table “table MB5”, the sub effect program that determines the effect control content of the sub effect “PB background change” It has a control sequence for executing the "program SP2" (execution of subsequence). Further, in the first-half fluctuation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the effect pattern “pattern 52” is selected in the table “table MB5”, the first-half fluctuation ends and the second-half fluctuation “second-half C” is connected to the control sequence. Have.

Then, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" have a control sequence for ending the first half variation and connecting to the second half variation "second half C" after executing the sub-effect program "program SP2".

In this way, the effect control device 300 can determine the effect content of the first half variation.
Next, the production control device 300 refers to the table set "table set SA" during execution of the sub production program "program SP1" and the table set "table set SB" referred to during execution of the sub production program "program SP2". And will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the sub-effect of the second embodiment.

FIG. 74(1) shows the table set "table set SA" that the production control device 300 refers to while the sub production program "program SP1" is being executed. The table set “table set SA” includes the table “table SA1”. The table "table SA1" includes effect patterns "pattern 61", "pattern 62", "pattern 63", and "pattern 64".

The solid line connecting the tables in the figure indicates the control sequence of the sub-effect program "program SP1". For example, the sub effect program “program SP1” has a control sequence for referring to the table “table SA1” and selecting an effect pattern defined by the table “table SA1”.

The sub effect program "program SP1" is called from any of the effect patterns "pattern 61", "pattern 62", "pattern 63", and "pattern 64" in the table "table SA1" ( It has a control sequence for returning to the program of the execution source) (for example, the first half variation program “program MP2”).

The effect pattern “Pattern 61” (shown by cross hatching) is a specific effect that requires attention to the consistency of the effect, and is, for example, a winning effect. The winning effect can be selected only by the variable display that derives the hit, and may not be selected by the variable display that does not derive the hit.

Since the sub-effect program "program SP1" and the table set "table set SA" (table "table SA1") include such a specific effect as a control target, the first-half variation program "program" is used as a control point requiring attention to consistency. It is separated from "MP2" and "program MP3". That is, since the effect control device 300 has separated the control part requiring attention from the first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” and the table set “table set MB”, the first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”. The consistency as a whole is secured while ensuring the degree of freedom for changing the table set “table set MB”.

FIG. 74(2) shows the table set "table set SB" that the production control device 300 refers to while the sub production program "program SP2" is being executed. The table set “table set SB” includes tables “table SB1” and “table SB2”. The table "table SB1" includes effect patterns "pattern 71" and "pattern 72". The table "table SB2" includes effect patterns "pattern 81" and "pattern 82".

The solid lines connecting the tables in the figure show the control sequence of the sub effect program “program SP2”. For example, the sub-effect program "program SP2" has a control sequence that first refers to the table "table SB1" and selects the effect pattern defined by the table "table SB1".

Then, when the production pattern "pattern 71" is selected in the table "table SB1", the sub production program "program SP2" refers to the table "table SB2" and selects the production pattern defined by the table "table SB2". It has a control sequence. Further, when the effect pattern "pattern 72" is selected in the table "table SB1", the sub effect program "program SP2" returns to the calling source (execution source) program (for example, the first half variable program "program MP2"). It has a control sequence.

The sub effect program "program SP2" is a program of a calling source (execution source) (for example, regardless of which of the effect patterns "pattern 81" and "pattern 82" is selected in the table "table SB2"). It has a control sequence for returning to the first-half variation program "program MP2").

The effect patterns “pattern 71” and “pattern 81” (shown by cross hatching) are specific effects requiring attention to the consistency of the effect, and are, for example, winning effects. The winning effect can be selected only by the variable display that derives the hit, and may not be selected by the variable display that does not derive the hit.

The sub-effect program “program SP2” and the table set “table set SB” (tables “table SB1” and “table SB2”) include such specific effects as control targets, and are therefore control points requiring consistency. It is separated from the first half variable programs "Program MP2" and "Program MP3". That is, since the effect control device 300 has separated the control part requiring attention from the first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” and the table set “table set MB”, the first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”. The consistency as a whole is secured while ensuring the degree of freedom for changing the table set “table set MB”.

Next, the table data will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of table data of the second embodiment.
FIG. 75(1) shows the table data of the table "table MB1". The table "table MB1" includes an effect pattern that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and a selection probability (lottery probability) thereof. For example, the table “table MB1” includes effect patterns “pattern 11”, “pattern 12”, “pattern 13”, and “pattern 14” as selectable effect patterns. In the table “table MB1”, when the command A is used as an input parameter, that is, when the variation start command is the command A, the selection probability of the effect pattern “pattern 11” is “A11%” and the effect pattern “pattern 12”. Indicates that the selection probability of "A12%", the selection probability of the effect pattern "Pattern 13" is "A13%", and the selection probability of the effect pattern "Pattern 14" is "A14%". At this time, the sum of the selection probabilities of all the effect patterns is "100%". The same applies when command B or command D is an input parameter.

The table "table MB1" indicates that none of the effect patterns "pattern 11", "pattern 12", "pattern 13", and "pattern 14" are selected when the command C is used as an input parameter. In other words, the table “table MB1” indicates that the command C is not an input parameter.

FIG. 75(2) shows the table data of the table “table SB1”. The table “table SB1” includes effect patterns that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and the selection probability (lottery probability) thereof. For example, the table "table SB1" includes effect patterns "pattern 71" and "pattern 72" as selectable effect patterns. In the table "table SB1", when the command A is used as an input parameter, that is, when the variation start command is the command A, the selection probability of the effect pattern "pattern 71" is "A71%" and the effect pattern "pattern 72". Indicates that the selection probability of is “A72%”. At this time, the sum total of the selection probabilities of all the effect patterns is “100%”. The same applies when command B or command D is an input parameter.

The table “table SB1” indicates that when the command C is used as an input parameter, neither the effect pattern “pattern 71” nor the “pattern 72” is selected. In other words, the table “table SB1” indicates that the command C is not an input parameter.

In addition, the table "table SB1" has the pattern "pattern 71" as the specific effect. The table “table SB1” includes the pattern “pattern 71”. Therefore, in the table "table SB1", the range requiring attention to the consistency of the effect can be closed to the range of the table "table SB1" even if the pattern "pattern 71" is changed.

Although the tables “table MB1” and “table SB1” have been described as representatives, the same applies to other tables.
Next, the first half effect distribution processing will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the first half effect distribution processing of the second embodiment. The first half effect distribution process is a process of distributing the first half variable program to be executed for each input parameter (command). The first half effect distribution process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The first half effect distribution process is a process executed by the control unit in step D56 of the received command analysis process.

[Step D151] The control unit acquires a command (variation start command) as an input parameter.
[Step D152] The control unit branches to the step corresponding to the acquired command (first half effect distribution).

[Step D153] If the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first-half variation "shortening loss", the control unit executes the shorting loss process. The shortened loss process is a process of executing the first-half variation program “program MP1” while referring to the reference table group “table set MA”. The control unit terminates the first-half effect distribution process after executing the shortened loss process.

[Step D154] If the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first-half variation "normal loss", the control unit executes the normal loss process. The normal losing process is a process of executing the first-half variation program “program MP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the normal losing process.

[Step D155] When the obtained command is a command corresponding to the first-half variation "normal reach", the control unit executes the normal reach process. The normal reach process is a process of executing the first-half variation program “program MP3” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”. The control unit ends the first-half effect distribution process after executing the normal reach process.

[Step D156] The control unit executes the step-up loss process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "step-up loss". The step-up losing process is a process of executing the first-half variation program “program MP4” while referring to the reference table group “table set MC”. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the step-up loss process.

[Step D157] The control unit executes the step-up reach processing when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first-half variation “step-up reach”. The step-up reach process is a process of executing the first-half variation program “program MP5” while referring to the reference table group “table set MC”. After executing the step-up reach process, the control unit ends the first-half effect distribution process.

[Step D158] If the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first-half variation "pseudo continuous loss", the control unit executes the pseudo continuous loss process. The pseudo continuous losing process is a process of executing the first-half variation program “program MP6” while referring to the reference table group “table set MD”. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the pseudo continuous loss process.

[Step D159] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half variation "pseudo-reach", the control unit executes the pseudo-reach process. The pseudo continuous reach process is a process of executing the first-half variation program “program MP7” while referring to the reference table group “table set MD”. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after the pseudo continuous reach process is executed.

Next, as a representative of the shortening loss process, the normal loss process, the normal reach process, the step-up loss process, the step-up reach process, the pseudo continuous loss process, and the pseudo continuous reach process, the normal loss process will be described with reference to FIG. 77. explain. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal losing process of the second embodiment.

The normal losing process is a process of executing the first-half variation program “program MP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”. The normal losing process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The normal losing process is a process executed by the control unit in step D154 of the first half effect distribution process.

[Step D161] The control unit acquires a table set (reference table group “table set MB”).
[Step D162] The control unit sets the first sequence.

[Step D163] The control section selects a table corresponding to the set sequence.
[Step D164] The control unit selects and sets an effect pattern by lottery with reference to the selected table.

[Step D165] The control unit determines whether or not the current sequence is the end sequence. If the current sequence is not the end sequence, the control unit proceeds to step D166, and if it is the end sequence, the normal losing process is ended.

[Step D166] The control unit updates the sequence.
[Step D167] The control unit proceeds to step D163 when the updated sequence specifies the next table selection, and proceeds to step D168 when the updated sequence specifies execution of the sub effect.

[Step D168] The control unit distributes the sub effects according to the updated sequence. The control unit proceeds to step D169 when the sub effect according to the updated sequence is the PB notice, and proceeds to step D170 when the sub effect is the PB background change.

[Step D169] The control unit executes the PB advance notice process. The PB advance notice process is a process of executing the sub effect program "program SP1" while referring to the reference table group "table set SA". After executing the PB advance notice process, the control unit proceeds to step D165.

[Step D170] The control unit executes the PB background change process. The PB background change process is a process of executing the sub-effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB". After executing the PB background change process, the control unit proceeds to step D165.

Next, as a representative of the PB advance notice process and the PB background change process, the PB background change process will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the PB background change process of the second embodiment.

The PB background change process is a process of executing the sub-effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB". The PB background change process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The PB background change process is a process executed by the control unit during execution of the effect control program (for example, step D170 of the normal losing process).

[Step D171] The control unit acquires a table set (reference table group “table set SA”).
[Step D172] The control unit sets the first sequence.

[Step D173] The control unit selects a table corresponding to the set sequence.
[Step D174] The control unit selects and sets an effect pattern by lottery with reference to the selected table.

[Step D175] The control unit determines whether or not the current sequence is the end sequence. If the current sequence is not the end sequence, the control unit proceeds to step D176, and if it is the end sequence, ends the PB background change process.

[Step D176] The control unit updates the sequence and proceeds to step D173.
The game machine 10 reduces the development burden of the program of the effect control device 300 by such an effect control program.

For example, the first-half fluctuation “normal loss” and the first-half fluctuation “normal reach” are realized by the process of executing the first-half fluctuation program “program MP2” while performing the same effect control, but the first-half fluctuation is realized. The “normal reach” is realized by the process of executing the first-half variation program “program MP3”. That is, the first-half variation “normal loss” and the first-half variation “normal reach” realize the same effect control by different programs.

Here, a case where the effect control content of the first-half variation “normal reach” is changed in the development process will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. 79 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first-half variation which is modified in the development process of the second embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first-half variation that has been modified in the development process of the second embodiment.

In the first half change "normal reach" in the development process, the reference table group is replaced with the reference table group "table set MBa". As a result, the first half fluctuation that refers to the reference table group "table set MB" is only the first half fluctuation "normal loss".

Further, in the development process, in the first half variation "normal reach", the change from the first half variation program "program MP3" to the first half variation program "program MP3a" does not have any influence on the first half variation "normal loss".

In the reference table group “table set MBa”, the table “table MB4” is replaced with the table “table MB9”. Further, the first-half variation program “program MP3a” has three positions before and after the table “table MB9” and one position apart from the table “table MB9” (after the table “table MB3”), for a total of four positions. The branch is replaced with.

The change of the control content of the first-half fluctuation "normal reach" in the development process is as follows when the program is shared by the first-half fluctuation "normal loss" and the first-half fluctuation "normal reach". It will extend. However, since the gaming machine 10 does not share the program with the first-half fluctuation “normal loss” and the first-half fluctuation “normal reach”, it is possible to separate the influence range of the change in the control content.

Although the gaming machine 10 changes both the first-half variation program and the reference table group, it may change either one.
Further, the first half variation "normal reach" includes PB notice processing and PB background change processing in its control range, but the processing contents of PB notice processing and PB background change processing are entrusted to each sub-directing program. Independent of the first half fluctuation program. Therefore, the PB advance notice process and the PB background change process are not affected by the change in the first-half variation program and its reference table group.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a main control device (game control device 100) that performs game control, and a slave control device (effect control device 300) that performs effect control based on commands from the main control device. The slave control device includes a storage unit that stores table data that defines distribution of effects, and table data (reference table group “table” based on a first command (e.g., variation start command corresponding to normal loss)) of the commands. Set MB”, reference table group “table set SA”, reference table group “table set SB”) of the first program (for example, the first half variation program “program MP2” of the first half variation “normal loss”) A second control different from the first program in which the first control (normal loss process) controlled by execution and the table data based on the second command (for example, the fluctuation start command corresponding to the normal reach) of the commands are different from the first program And a control unit (CPU 311) capable of executing second control (normal reach processing) that is controlled by executing a program (for example, the first-half fluctuation program “program MP3” of the first-half fluctuation “normal reach”).
(2) The table data of (1) includes a first table data (reference table group "table set MB") that does not include a specific effect, and a second table data (reference table group "table set SA") that includes a specific effect. Including the reference table group “table set SB”), the control unit executes the first control of distributing the effect from the first table data based on the first command by executing the first program, and of the second program. By executing, the second control for distributing the effect from the first table data is executed based on the second command, and the third program different from the first program and the second program (for example, the sub-effect program of the sub-variation "PB notice"). By executing the "program SP1"), the third control (PB notice processing) for distributing the effect from the second table data is executed based on the first command or the second command.

[Third Embodiment]
First, the configuration of the game board of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 is a front view (No. 1) showing an example of the game board of the game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a front view (No. 2) showing an example of the game board of the game machine of the third embodiment.

The game board 700 in FIG. 81 shows a state in which the movable accessory is stored, and the game board 700 in FIG. 82 shows a state in which the stored movable accessory is visibly displayed.
As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the game board 700 is provided with a center case 40 substantially in the center. Inside the center case 40, there are a display device 41, a second display device 701, lighting units 702a to 702c, a logo display unit 703, a first board effect device 704, and a second board effect device 705L, 705R. , The third board effect device 706 and the fourth board effect device 707 are provided.

The second display device 701 informs information related to the game (for example, the effect of the game) by display. In the game board 700, the second display device 701 has a hexagonal shape, a display portion for displaying predetermined information such as characters is formed in the central portion, and a frame portion is formed so as to surround the display portion. .. The frame portion is configured to be able to be illuminated with a plurality of illumination colors (for example, configured with LEDs).

The lighting units 702a to 702c notify information about the game (progress of the game, etc.) depending on the lighting state. In the game board 700, the lighting unit 702a displays "1", the lighting unit 702b displays "2", and the lighting unit 702c displays "3". The game machine 10 notifies that the progress is the first stage by, for example, setting the lighting unit 702a in the lighting state and the lighting unit 702b and the lighting unit 702c in the extinguishing state, and lights the lighting unit 702a and the lighting unit 702b. By setting the lighting unit 702c to the off state, it is notified that the progress status is the second stage, and by setting the lighting units 702a to 702c to the lighting state, the progress status is the third stage (for example, the production is started). It is just before the event).

The lighting units 702a to 702c may be, for example, movable (for example, rotatable and swingable). In this case, the gaming machine 10 can more easily understand that the lighting state (lighting/lighting-out) has changed by moving the lighting units 702a to 702c when switching from lighting-out to lighting.

The logo display unit 703 is composed of a plurality of characters (a plurality of constituent units) that display the product name (product name, brand, etc.) of the gaming machine 10. Each component of the logo display unit 703 is configured to be capable of lighting in a plurality of lighting colors (for example, is configured by an LED), and the logo display unit 703 displays information related to the game (progress status of the game, etc.) depending on the lighting state. Inform.

In the game board 700, the logo display portion 703 is composed of seven constituent portions (characters) of “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, and “G”, and a lighting color for each constituent portion. Is configured to be controllable.

For example, in the logo display unit 703, all the constituent units are turned off at the start of the performance, the number of the constituent units that are in the lighted state is increased each time the performance progresses, and all the constituent units are turned on in accordance with the production end timing. By doing so, the progress status of the game (the progress status of the effect) is notified. In the logo display unit 703, all the constituent units are turned off at the start of the performance, the number of the lighting units is increased as the production progresses, and all the constituent units are turned on only in the case of a big hit. The game progress status (production performance status) may be notified.

The first board effect device 704 produces a game by operating. In the game board 700, the first board effect device 704 has a gourd-like shape. The first board effect device 704 is provided on the left side of the display device 41, has its upper portion tilted toward the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 81, and is operable up to a position where the upper portion overlaps with the front surface side of the display device 41. Has become.

The second board production devices 705L and 705R produce a game by operating. In the game board 700, the second board effect device 705L is arranged (for example, stored so as not to be visually recognized) at a position which does not overlap with the display device 41 on the upper left side of the display device 41 during normal operation (when not operating), In operation, as shown in FIG. 82, it appears so that it appears at the upper left of the display device 41, and the front side of the display device 41 extends from the upper left of the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41. Further, the second board effect device 705R is arranged (for example, stored so as not to be visually recognized) at a position which does not overlap with the display device 41 on the upper right side of the display device 41 in normal times (when not operating), and when operating, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the display device 41 is operable at the upper right of the display device 41 and extends from the upper right of the display device 41 to the front side of the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41.

The third board production device 706 produces the game by operating. In the game board 700, the third board effect device 706 is arranged (stored) on the back side of the second display device 701 in normal times (non-operation), and in operation, as shown in FIG. It is exposed to the top, and the front side of the display device 41 can be operated from above the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41.

In the game board 700, the second board effect devices 705L and 705R and the third board effect device 706 are connected to each other in the state of being operated in the central portion, and the three board effect devices are integrally formed to form a predetermined shape. It is configured to be possible.

The fourth board production device 707 produces a game by operating. The fourth board effect device 707 is the shape of a character related to the effect of the game machine 10. In the game board 700, the fourth board effect device 707 is arranged (for example, stored so as not to be visible) at a position which does not overlap with the display device 41 on the lower left side of the display device 41 in the normal time (when not operating), In operation, as shown in FIG. 82, it appears on the front side of the lower portion of the display device 41, and the front side of the lower portion of the display device 41 can be moved left and right. The fourth board effect device 707 may be capable of operating the weapon held by the character, and in addition to the operation in the left-right direction, the operation in the vertical direction and the operation of tilting the character are possible. You may.

The above is an example of the game board 700 of the game machine 10 in the third embodiment. Next, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of the display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment.

The display screen 708 includes two sets of decorative symbols (a large symbol group 709 and a small symbol group 710), a special figure 1 reserved number display 711, a special figure 2 reserved number display 712, a reserved display 713, and a reserved consumption display 714. The display contents include a hold digestion pedestal display 715 and a notice display 716.

The two sets of decorative designs include a large design group 709 as a first decorative design and a small design group 710 as a second decorative design. The large symbol group 709 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 709 is displayed large in the approximate center of the display device 41. The large symbol group 709 includes the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R. The left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

Generally, the large symbol group 709 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 709 forms a reach mode with the left symbol 709L and the right symbol 709R, and can wait until the middle symbol 709C is stopped to form a hit mode.

The small symbol group 710 takes charge of notification of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the easiness of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 710 is displayed small in the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without hindering the display effect by the large symbol group 709. The small symbol group 710 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 710 of the display screen 708 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

The special figure 1 hold number display 711 displays the hold storage number (starting storage number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 712 displays the number of pending storage of the special figure 2 game. Depending on the display mode, the hold display 713 can clearly indicate the number of held storages of the special figure variation display game, and can notify the reliability (expectation) of the game result for each held storage. The reserved memory indicates the right to execute the special figure variation display game. For example, the hold display 713 changes the display mode (character) of the hold storage display (hold storage display displaying the hold storage) corresponding to each hold storage (for example, from a general-purpose character to a dedicated character when reliability is high). The degree of reliability with respect to the game result is notified. Note that the hold display 713 is changed to the display mode of the hold storage display, and the game mode is changed according to the operation mode (for example, the character is normally in the walking mode and the character is in the running mode when the reliability is high). The reliability of the result may be reported.

Depending on the display mode, the hold decommissioning display 714 can show the variation state of the special figure variation display game and can inform the reliability of the game result. In FIG. 83, the pending consumption display 714 indicates that the special figure variation display game is in the process of symbol variation. For example, the hold exhaustion display 714 changes the display mode (character) of the hold storage display corresponding to the hold storage (for example, changes from a general-purpose character to a dedicated character when the reliability is high) to obtain confidence in the game result. Inform the degree. In addition, instead of changing the display mode of the hold storage display, the hold exhaustion display 714 is changed according to an operation mode (for example, the character is normally in a walking mode, and when the reliability is high, the character is in a running mode). The reliability of the game result may be reported.

The pending digest base display 715 clearly indicates the position where the pending digest display 714 is displayed. The pending digestion pedestal display 715 includes a character display and a pedestal display. The character display displays a character that is a motif of the effect produced by the gaming machine 10. In FIG. 83, the character display displays a character such as a tiger. The pedestal display displays a scaffold on which the pending storage display (character) corresponding to the pending storage during digestion and the character displayed by the character display are located.

The advance notice display 716 gives advance notice of an effect (a privilege to be provided) that is performed in the pending storage during standby or the pending storage during digestion. The notice display 716 displays a treasure box and a gourd, and when the pending storage that is on standby or the pending storage that is being consumed is exhausted, an effect corresponding to the item (symbol) to be displayed (a treasure box-like mode in FIG. 83). The effect corresponding to the item and the effect corresponding to the item in the form of a gourd) are performed. The notice display 716 is hidden when no items are stocked.

The item displayed on the advance notice display 716 is added by opening the package at the start of digestion of the reserved memory displayed in the mode with the luggage (the reserved memory display in the mode of the character with the luggage). The luggage appears at a predetermined timing. It should be noted that the luggage may appear at the timing (when the display starts) at which the hold storage display is displayed on the hold display 713, or may appear at some midpoint.

Next, the relationship between the items appearing from the luggage and the effect (privilege to be given) to be performed will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the items appearing from the package and the contents thereof according to the third embodiment.

Items that appear from the package are patterns P1 to P5. The item of the pattern P1 is an item (symbol) having a pattern like a skull. The item of the pattern P1 clearly indicates that it is a gasse (the effect of opening the baggage fails (inclination effect)). When the item of the pattern P1 appears from the luggage, the item is not stocked (added) in the notice display 716.

The item of pattern P2 is an item having a heart-like form. The item of the pattern P2 clearly indicates that the effect PT acquisition effect for acquiring the effect PT (point) is performed in either the pending storage during digestion or the pending storage during standby. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the effect execution right can be acquired by accumulating the effect PT up to a predetermined value. When the item of the pattern P2 appears from the luggage, the notice-shaped display 716 stores the item in the form of a heart.

The item of the pattern P3 is an item in the form of a gourd. The item of the pattern P3 clearly indicates that the effect PT acquisition effect is performed in either the pending storage during digestion or the pending storage during standby. When the item of the pattern P3 appears from the luggage, the notice display 716 stocks the item in the form of a gourd.

The item of the pattern P4 is an item in the form of showing a push button (PB) (item in the form of a push button). For the item of the pattern P4, a pseudo continuous effect using a push button (with operation of the push button) in either the pending storage during digestion or the pending storage during standby (re-variation after temporary stop in one variation display game) It will be clearly shown that the production is performed as if the variation display game were being performed multiple times). When the item of the pattern P4 appears from the luggage, the notice display 716 is stocked with the item in the form of the push button. Note that the pseudo continuous effect using the push button executed based on the item indicating the push button may be a special effect different from the effect using the push button performed independently of the item.

The item of the pattern P5 is an item in the form of a treasure box. The item of the pattern P5 clearly indicates that the opening effect of the treasure box (the effect that the item appears from the opening of the treasure box) is performed in either the pending storage during digestion or the pending storage during standby. When the item of the pattern P5 appears from the luggage, the notice display 716 stores the item in the form of a treasure box.

Next, the items appearing from the treasure chest will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the items appearing from the treasure box and their contents in the third embodiment.
Items appearing from the treasure chest in the opening effect of the treasure chest are patterns P10 to P14. The item of pattern P10 is an item having a skull-like shape. It is clearly shown that the item of pattern P10 is a ghost (it does not develop from the treasure chest opening effect). If an item with pattern P10 appears from the treasure chest while the hold memory is being digested (during the special figure variation display game), the effect related to the appearing item will not be performed after the opening effect of the treasure box is completed. ..

The item of pattern P11 is an item having a heart-like form. The item of the pattern P11 clearly indicates that the item develops into a production PT acquisition production. When the item of the pattern P11 appears from the treasure box while the reserved memory is being consumed (during the special map change display game is being executed), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the effect PT acquisition effect is generated in the special figure change display game. Is performed.

The item of the pattern P12 is an item in the form of a gourd. The item of the pattern P12 clearly indicates that it will be developed into an effect PT acquisition effect. When the item of the pattern P12 appears from the treasure box while the reserved memory is being consumed (during the special map change display game is being executed), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the effect PT acquisition effect is produced in the special figure change display game. Is performed.

The item of the pattern P13 is an item in the form of displaying the continuation character. It is clearly shown that the item of the pattern P13 develops into a pseudo-continuous production. When the item of the pattern P13 appears from the treasure box while the reserved memory is being consumed (during the special figure variation display game is running), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the pseudo continuous production is performed in the special figure variation display game. It is carried out.

The item of the pattern P14 is an item in the form of displaying the characters of intense heat. The item of the pattern P14 clearly indicates that the reliability is high (for example, 60%). When the item of the pattern P14 appears from the treasure box while the reserved memory is being consumed (during the special figure variation display game is running), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the reliability in the special figure variation display game is high. Directing is done.

Next, an example of the effect of the variable display game executed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. FIG. 86 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of the display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a diagram (No. 4) showing an example of the display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment.

The display screen 717 shown in FIG. 86 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol variation is stopped (the variation display game is stopped), and shows a state in which there are no items stocked in the notice display 716.
On the display screen 717, the notice display 716 is hidden because there are no items in stock on the notice display 716. Further, on the display screen 717, since the symbol fluctuation is stopped, the hold storage display is not displayed on the hold digestion display 714. Further, in the display screen 717, the hold storage display with the luggage is located at the first position (head) in the hold display 713, and the item appears from the luggage when the next hold storage starts to be consumed. It is clearly stated.

A display screen 718 shown in FIG. 86(2) is a display screen after the display screen 717, and shows a state in which consumption of the reserved memory displayed with the luggage is started (state in which the pattern variation is started). Show. On the display screen 718, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are fluctuating at high speed. On the display screen 718, each hold storage display is slid one from the state on the display screen 717, and the hold storage display with the luggage that was positioned first in the hold display 713 is positioned on the hold exhaustion display 714, It is shown that the special figure variation display game corresponding to the pending storage displayed in a mode with the luggage is started.

A display screen 719 shown in FIG. 86(3) is a display screen after the display screen 718, and shows a state in which the unsealing effect of opening the parcel is being executed. The display screen 719 is a state in which the item of the pattern P4 (push button mode) appears from the baggage on the hold storage display displayed on the hold exhaustion display 714. It is clarified that the pseudo continuous production using push buttons is performed in any of the special figure variable display games. Further, on the display screen 719, a message "Thank you for the tribute!" is displayed from the character configuring the holding digestion pedestal display 715 to clearly indicate that the item is an advantageous item for the player.

The display screen 720 shown in FIG. 87(1) is a display screen after the display screen 719, and is a state in which items that have appeared from the luggage are newly stocked in the advance notice display 716. On the display screen 720, the notice display 716 is in the display state because the item to be stocked has appeared, and the notice display 716 in the display state displays the item in the form of the push button that appears from the luggage. Then, on the display screen 720, with the appearance of the item from the parcel, the mode of the pending storage display for displaying the pending storage during digestion is changed from the mode with the package to the mode without the package. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing the push button in the state where the notice display 716 is present (the input is not accepted).

A display screen 721 shown in FIG. 87(2) is a display screen after the display screen 720, and is independent of the pseudo continuous production using the push button announced in advance in the notice display 716 in the special figure variation display game (independent). The following shows a state in which an effect using a push button is performed.

The display screen 721 includes the effect display 722 in the display content. The effect display 722 displays an effect executed in the special figure variation display game. On the display screen 721, the effect display 722 is an image showing a state where the push button is pressed (an image urging the push button operation), a message “Press!” (a message urging the push button operation), and the rest. A timer showing time is displayed to clearly show that the effect using the push button (effect of pressing the push button) is being executed in the special figure variable display game. On the display screen 721, the stock state (stocked items) of the notice display 716 has not changed from the stock state (stocked items) of the notice display 716 on the display screen 720. As a result, the display screen 721 indicates that the effect display 722 is not the effect that is being notified by the notification display 716, that is, the effect using the push button that is being executed is irrelevant to the item of the push button stocked in the notification display 716. Is shown.

Then, in the gaming machine 10, while the display screen 721 is being displayed (when an effect using the push button is executed in the effect display 722 while the push button item is being displayed in the notice display 716), the player presses the push button (operation). ), only the operation (input by pressing) on the effect display 722 is valid (the effect using the push button displayed by the effect display 722 is prioritized). That is, the gaming machine 10 invalidates an input made by pressing an item in the form of a push button stocked in the notice display 716.

As described above, since the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing in the state displayed in the notice display 716, it does not cause a mixture of operations. There is no need to set restrictions such as prohibiting the implementation of effects using push buttons that are performed independently. That is, the gaming machine 10 can secure the degree of freedom of production (prevent reduction of the degree of freedom) even during the advance notice and can improve the interest.

In this case, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the item of the push button mode displayed on the advance notice display 716 (for example, gray scale) to clearly indicate that the input by pressing is invalid. Good.

A display screen 723 shown in FIG. 87(3) is a display screen after the display screen 721, and shows a state in which the special figure variation display game ends and the symbol variation stops.
On the display screen 723, the effect that the item stocked in the notice display 716 is not foretold in the special figure variation display game being executed on the display screen 721 is not performed (the stocked item is not consumed). Since the variable display game has ended, the stock state of the notice display 716 is the same as the stock state of the display screen 721.

A display screen 724 shown in FIG. 88(1) is a display screen after the display screen 723, and shows a state in which consumption of new pending storage is started (a state in which fluctuation starts). On the display screen 724, each hold memory display slides by one from the state on the display screen 723, and the hold memory display located at the first position of the hold display 713 on the display screen 723 is located on the hold digestion display 714 and is held. A special figure variation display game corresponding to the memory display has been started.

A display screen 725 shown in FIG. 88(2) is a display screen after the display screen 724, and a state in which an effect corresponding to the item (push button mode item) stocked in the advance notice display 716 has been started. Indicates.

On the display screen 725, the item in the form of the push button that has been stocked in the advance notice display 716 is moving while expanding from the advance notice display 716 toward the center of the screen. As a result, the display screen 725 clearly shows that the effect to be started is the effect (pseudo continuous effect using the push button) that the item in the push button mode has announced.

A display screen 726 shown in FIG. 88(3) is a display screen after the display screen 725, and is in a state where an effect corresponding to the item (push button mode item) stocked in the advance notice display 716 is being executed. Indicates.

On the display screen 726, as an effect display 722, an image showing how the push button is pressed, a message "Press!", and a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and the effect of using the push button in the special figure variation display game is displayed. It clearly indicates that (effect of pressing the push button) is being executed. On the display screen 726, the item that has been stocked in the preview display 716 executes the production that has been announced (consumes the item that has been stocked), and the item that has been stocked in the preview display 716 has disappeared The display 716 is in a non-display state.

Next, in the pseudo continuous production using the push button executed based on the item of the push button stocked in the notice display 716, when the push button is pressed and when the push button is not pressed. An example of the effect contents performed in FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the effect contents performed when the push button is pressed and when the push button is not pressed in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button in the third embodiment.

For example, as shown in FIG. 89(a), the gaming machine 10 does not perform the normal push-up operation when the push-button is not pressed in the pseudo-play production using the push button (when the push-button is not pressed). (Normal pseudo-link) is executed, and when an input is made by pressing the push button in the effect using the push button, a pseudo-link (dedicated pseudo-link) prepared exclusively for the pseudo-link effect using the push button is executed. That is, the gaming machine 10 uses the push button to select the type of the pseudo continuous in the pseudo continuous production using the push button.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 89( b ), the gaming machine 10 changes at high speed (display screen) when the push button is not pressed for input in the pseudo continuous effect using the push button (when the push button is not pressed). (Variation indicated by 720) is continued, and when the input is made by pressing the push button in the effect using the push button, the pseudo link is executed. That is, the gaming machine 10 uses the push button to select whether to execute the pseudo continuous effect in the pseudo continuous effect using the push button.

Next, the setting process of the baggage to appear in the hold storage display will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the luggage setting process in the third embodiment.
The baggage setting process is a process performed when a new hold storage is generated by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300, that is, when a winning command indicating that the hold memory is newly generated is received. The baggage setting process is, for example, a process executed by the control unit in step D23 of the main process.

[Step D300] The control unit causes an effect to be given as an advance notice to be executed in the pending storage newly generated based on the winning command (an effect to be informed as an advance notice in the special figure variation display game). Or not. The control unit proceeds to step D301 when it is determined that the effect targeted for advance notice is executed, and proceeds to step D307 when it is determined that the effect targeted for advance notice is not executed.

[Step D301] The control unit determines whether or not there is a pending storage that is displayed with the luggage in the pending storage. The control unit proceeds to step D302 if it is determined that there is a reserved memory displayed in the form of carrying the luggage, and proceeds to step D304 if it is determined that there is no pending storage displayed in the form of the character carrying the luggage. Proceed to.

[Step D302] The control unit determines whether or not the contents of the hold storage baggage displayed in the mode of holding the baggage can be replaced. For example, the control unit determines that replacement is possible when the pattern P1 is set as the contents of the luggage, and determines that replacement is not possible when the contents other than the pattern P1 are set as the contents. It should be noted that a priority is set for each pattern, the priority of the pattern before replacement and the priority of the pattern after replacement are compared, and it is determined that replacement is possible when the priority of the pattern after replacement is high. May be.

The control unit proceeds to step D303 when determining that the contents of the luggage can be replaced, and proceeds to step D304 when determining that the contents of the luggage cannot be replaced.
[Step D303] The control unit replaces the contents of the baggage with the pattern of the item corresponding to the effect to be the target of the advance notice executed by the newly generated hold memory.

[Step D304] The control unit sets the luggage as the display mode of the pending storage display corresponding to any of the pending storage (newly generated pending storage or waiting pending storage) (sets the luggage as the display mode of the pending storage display). Set the character you have).

[Step D305] The control unit sets, as the contents of the luggage set in step D304, the pattern of the item corresponding to the presentation subject to the notice executed by the newly generated pending storage.

[Step D306] The control unit determines whether the parcel has been set as the display mode of the pending storage display corresponding to the newly generated pending storage. When the control unit determines that the package has not been set as the display mode of the hold storage display corresponding to the newly generated hold memory, the control unit proceeds to step D307 and displays the hold memory display corresponding to the newly generated hold memory. If it is determined that the baggage has already been set as an aspect, the baggage setting process is terminated.

[Step D307] The control unit determines whether or not it is the generation timing of the baggage containing the skull. For example, the control unit determines that it is the generation timing of the baggage containing the skull when a random number is generated and the random number indicates a predetermined value.

The control unit proceeds to step D308 when determining that it is the generation timing of the baggage containing the skull, and ends the package setting process when determining that it is not the generation timing of the baggage containing the skull.

[Step D308] The control unit sets the luggage as the display mode of the pending storage display corresponding to the newly generated pending storage (sets the character with the luggage as the display mode of the pending storage display).

[Step D309] The control unit sets the pattern P1 or the pattern P5 (a treasure box containing a skull) as the contents of the package set in Step D304, and ends the package setting process.

The above is the third embodiment. In this way, the game machine 10 predicts the progress of the effect by notifying in advance that the effect using the push button on the advance notice display 716 will be performed by either the hold memory during digestion or the hold memory during standby. It is possible to maintain and improve expectations.

In the gaming machine 10, the pending storage for causing the item to appear and the pending storage for executing the effect foretold by the item are different from each other as the pending memory so that the player cannot grasp the timing at which the effect foretold by the item occurs. According to this, the gaming machine 10 gives an expectation that the effect foretold by the item may occur even when the reserved memory is consumed before the reserved memory for which the predicted effect is performed. You can That is, the gaming machine 10 can maintain/improve the sense of expectation even for effects that are not the subject of the advance notice.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the oversight (forgetting operation) of the effect by notifying the start of the effect or the like using the push button by the notice display 716 in advance, and thus the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the game machine 10 has been described as not accepting the input by pressing the push button item in the notice display 716, but the present invention is not limited to this. The gaming machine 10 may invalidate the input by pressing while performing the effect using the push button that is performed independently of the pseudo continuous effect using the push button, and when the input by pressing is performed at other timings. As the reservation input, the input may be accepted before the start of the pseudo-relational production. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the effect from being overlooked by forgetting to press it.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 92. FIG. 91 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the first modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 92 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the first modification of the third embodiment.

A display screen 727 shown in FIG. 91(1) is a display screen during symbol fluctuation (during variable display game execution). On the display screen 727, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are fluctuating at high speed.

A display screen 728 shown in FIG. 91(2) is a display screen after the display screen 727 and shows a state immediately before the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 728, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R are changing at high speed, and the left symbol 709L is changing at low speed. That is, the display screen 728 clearly shows that the left symbol 709L is about to be temporarily stopped.

A display screen 729 shown in FIG. 91(3) is a display screen after the display screen 728 and shows a state in which the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 729, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at "5" and the symbol is swinging.

The display screen 730 shown in FIG. 92 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 729, and shows a state in which the effect is generated on the left symbol 709L.
On the display screen 730, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. Further, on the display screen 730, an image of the push button and an effect indicating the occurrence of the effect are displayed as the effect display 722 on the portion superimposed on the number (identifier) of the temporarily stopped left symbol 709L.

The display screen 731 shown in FIG. 92 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 730, and shows a state in which an effect using the push button is started.
On the display screen 731, as the effect display 722, an image showing how the push button is pressed, a message "press !!", and a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and the effect using the push button in the special figure variation display game is displayed. It is clearly stated that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed.

The above is the effect performed in the first modification of the third embodiment. Generally, when a symbol is temporarily stopped in a variable display game, the player is in the field of view of the temporarily stopped drawing (visible). Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers forming the temporarily stopped symbol immediately after the temporary stop, and uses the push button after notifying that the effect using the push button will be performed. By starting the effect, it is possible to more surely let the player recognize that the effect using the push button is started. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from overlooking the effect of using the push button and improve the interest.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
In the first modification of the third embodiment, the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the number of the symbol temporarily stopped after the temporary stop (changed to the symbol displaying the push button), and the effect of using the push button is performed. It started. In the second modification of the third embodiment, the changing symbol is replaced with a symbol that displays a push button (for example, a symbol that is arranged so that the push button is superimposed on the front side of the number), and the symbol that displays the push button is replaced. After the temporary stop, the production using the push button is started.

Here, an effect performed in the second modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the second modification of the third embodiment.

A display screen 732 shown in FIG. 93(1) is a display screen after the display screen 728 and shows a state immediately before the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 732, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R are changing at high speed, and the left symbol 709L is changing at low speed. Further, on the display screen 732, the left symbol 709L displaying the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers forming the symbol (the left symbol 709L in which the number is replaced with the symbol displaying the push button) is temporarily stopped (low speed). Fluctuates). That is, the display screen 732 clearly indicates that the left symbol 709L is about to be temporarily stopped while displaying the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbol.

The display screen 733 shown in FIG. 93 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 732, and shows a state in which the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 733, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L temporarily stops and swings while displaying the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbol.

The display screen 734 shown in FIG. 93 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 733, and shows a state in which the effect using the push button is started.
On the display screen 734, as the effect display 722, an image showing a state where the push button is pressed, a message “press!”, and a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and the effect of using the push button in the special figure variation display game is displayed. It clearly indicates that (effect of pressing the push button) is being executed.

The above is the effect performed in the second modification of the third embodiment. Generally, in a variable display game, a player puts in view (visually sees) a drawing that is temporarily stopped. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers forming the symbols to be temporarily stopped (immediately before the temporary stop (low-speed fluctuation state), and displays the push button on the front side of the numbers forming the symbols. The player is more surely aware that the effect using the push button will start by starting the effect using the push button after notifying that the effect using the push button will be performed while temporarily stopping the display of the image. Can be made. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from overlooking the effect of using the push button and improve the interest.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the third modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect in the third modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 95 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of the display screen displayed by the display device according to the modified example 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the third modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 97 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the third modification of the third embodiment.

First, the flow of the effect will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. The timing chart shown in FIG. 94 is an example of the pseudo continuous effect executed by the gaming machine 10, and shows the flow of the effect when the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times.

As shown in FIG. 94, the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth variation display game using the music A as BGM (Back Ground Music) at timing t10. Then, when the Nth variation display game is started, the gaming machine 10 executes the variation display effect (first pseudo-repeating). An example of a display screen during the variable display effect (first pseudo continuous) will be described with reference to the display screen 735 of FIG. 95(1) and the display screen 736 of FIG. 95(2).

A display screen 735 shown in FIG. 95(1) is a display screen during the variable display effect (first pseudo-run). On the display screen 735, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are fluctuating at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 735.

A display screen 736 shown in FIG. 95(2) is a display screen after the display screen 735, and is a display screen during the variable display effect (first pseudo-run). On the display screen 736, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped with the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is about to be temporarily stopped with the symbol "7" (it is changing at a low speed), and the middle symbol 709C is changing at a high speed. doing. That is, the display screen 736 is about to derive the reach state. Then, the game machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 736, and operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R to arouse the expectation of reach generation and improve the interest. I'm trying.

The gaming machine 10 starts an effect (pseudo continuous continuation effect) that informs the player whether or not to continue the pseudo continuous when the two-symbol temporary stop state is set in the variable display effect (the pseudo continuous first time) at the timing t11. .. At this time, the gaming machine 10 lowers the volume while playing the song A to mute (silence) and plays SE (Sound Effect) used for the pseudo continuous effect.

In the pseudo-ream continuation effect, the game machine 10 notifies the player that the pseudo-ream will be continued when the pseudo-ream is continued, and shifts to a state in which the three symbols fluctuate at high speed (variable display state). .. On the other hand, when the pseudo-relation is not continued, the gaming machine 10 informs that the pseudo-relation is not continued and shifts to a result derivation display or the like for deriving the result of the variable display game.

A screen display example during the temporary stop of two symbols (pseudo continuous effect) will be described with reference to the display screen 737 of FIG. 95(3).
The display screen 737 shown in FIG. 95 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 736, and shows a display screen during the temporary stop of two symbols (pseudo continuous effect). On the display screen 737, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol "6", and the middle symbol 709C is fluctuating at high speed. Then, the game machine 10 puts the BGM in a mute state and plays SE instead of the BGM in accordance with the pseudo-continuous continuous effect being executed on the display screen 737, so that the effect can be grasped and a sense of expectation. And are trying to improve the interest.

The gaming machine 10 executes the variable display effect (second time) when it is notified that the pseudo-relation is continued at the timing t12. The gaming machine 10 stops the reproduction of the SE and starts (returns to) the volume of the muted music A (BGM) at a predetermined volume. An example of a display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-run) will be described using the display screen 738 of FIG. 96(1), the display screen 739 of FIG. 96(2), and the display screen 740 of FIG. 96(3).

A display screen 738 shown in FIG. 96(1) is a display screen after the display screen 737, and is a display screen in the variable display effect (second pseudo-run). On the display screen 738, as the effect display 722, a character like a tiger and a message "The game is about to begin!" are displayed, and the effect of the special figure change display game is continued (re-change starts). It is clearly stated. In addition, the gaming machine 10 operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 738 to change the effect, thereby enhancing the interest. Then, the gaming machine 10 stops the SE being reproduced on the display screen 737 and plays the BGM in the mute state at a predetermined volume.

A display screen 739 shown in FIG. 96(2) is a display screen after the display screen 738, and is a display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-run). On the display screen 739, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are fluctuating at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 739.

A display screen 740 shown in FIG. 96(3) is a display screen after the display screen 739, and is a display screen in the variable display effect (second pseudo-run). On the display screen 740, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is about to be temporarily stopped at the symbol "7" (low speed fluctuation), and the middle symbol 709C fluctuates at high speed. doing. That is, the display screen 740 is trying to derive the reach state. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 740, and operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R to inspire the expectation of the reach occurrence and improve the interest. I am trying.

The game machine 10 starts the pseudo-continuous continuous effect when the two symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream) at the timing t13. At this time, the gaming machine 10 lowers the volume while playing the music A (BGM) to mute (silence), and plays SE used for the pseudo-continuous continuation effect. A screen display example during the temporary stop of two symbols (pseudo continuous effect) will be described with reference to the display screen 741 of FIG. 97(1).

The display screen 741 shown in FIG. 97 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 740, and shows a display screen during the temporary stop of two symbols (pseudo continuous effect).
On the display screen 741, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped with the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped with the symbol "6", and the middle symbol 709C is fluctuating at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 puts the BGM in the mute state in accordance with the pseudo-continuous continuation effect being executed on the display screen 741 and plays SE instead of the BGM, thereby making it possible to grasp that the effect is occurring, and expectation. Is given to improve the interest.

The gaming machine 10 executes the variable display effect (third time) when it is notified at timing t14 that the pseudo-relation will be continued. The gaming machine 10 stops the reproduction of the SE, and starts playing (turning back) the volume of the muted music A (BGM) at a predetermined volume. An example of a display screen during the variable display effect (third pseudo run) will be described with reference to the display screen 742 of FIG. 97(2) and the display screen 743 of FIG. 97(3).

A display screen 742 shown in FIG. 97(2) is a display screen after the display screen 741 and is a display screen during the variable display effect (the third pseudo run). On the display screen 742, as the effect display 722, a character like a tiger and a message “I'll decide next!” are displayed, and the effect of the special figure variation display game continues (re-variation starts). Is clearly stated. In addition, the gaming machine 10 operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 742 to change the effect, thereby improving the interest. Then, the gaming machine 10 stops the SE that is being reproduced on the display screen 741 and plays the BGM in the mute state at a predetermined volume.

A display screen 743 shown in FIG. 97(3) is a display screen after the display screen 742, and is a display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-run). On the display screen 743, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are fluctuating at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 743.

The gaming machine 10 executes the variable display effect (third time) until timing t15, derives the result of the variable display game (result derivation display), and after displaying the result for a predetermined time, the Nth special figure variable display game is executed. finish.

The above is the flow of the effect in the modified example 3 of the third embodiment. As described above, in the gaming machine 10, when SE and BGM are not mixed when SE is reproduced, the BGM is not in the stopped state but in the mute state. As a result, when the gaming machine 10 raises the volume of the BGM after finishing the reproduction of the SE, the BGM can be heard from the reproduction position after the reproduction time of the SE has elapsed. In this way, by allowing the BGM to be heard from the playback position where it is desired to elapse the playback time of the SE, the gaming machine 10 prevents the BGM from being heard in a choppy manner, suppresses a sense of discomfort felt by the player, and improves interest. it can.

[Modification 4 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modified example 4 of the third embodiment will be described. First, the decorative design used in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B as the decorative symbol used for each symbol of the large symbol group 709. The decorative pattern A is a decorative pattern that is mainly used, and the decorative pattern B is a decorative pattern that is used as a subordinate (a decorative pattern that is used only in a specific case). More specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the decorative symbol B is used only when the jackpot is derived in the special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) generated by winning the special figure 2 starting opening. It is a design that can be.

The decorative symbol A includes symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750. The symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes.

The design 744 is a design for displaying the number "1" composed of a numerical element (identifier) having the distinctiveness as a design by the number "1". The symbol 745 is a symbol that displays the number "2" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "2". The design 746 is a design for displaying the number "3" composed of number elements having the distinctiveness as a design by the number "3". The symbol 747 is a symbol that displays the number "4" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "4". The design 748 is a design for displaying the number "5" composed of number elements having the distinctiveness as a design by the number "5". The design 749 is a design for displaying the number "6" composed of number elements having the distinctiveness as a design by the number "6". The design 750 is a design for displaying the number "7" composed of number elements having the distinctiveness as a design by the number "7".

The decorative pattern B is a pattern having the same discriminating power as the numerical elements in the decorative pattern A. For example, the numerical element in the decorative pattern A has a character element (value conversion identifier) indicating that it has a higher value than the decorative pattern A. It is the added shape (it is the shape in which the character element is added to the design 750). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot derived from the decorative design B (design 751) is relatively higher than the jackpot derived from the decorative design A (design 750).

The decorative pattern B includes a pattern 751. The symbol 751 is a numerical element (identifier) having a distinctiveness as a symbol by the numeral "7" and a character element indicating that it is more valuable than the symbol 750 consisting only of the numeral element of the numeral "7" by the character "pole". It is a pattern composed of and.

Next, the game state in which the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B are used will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing symbols used in a game state in Modification 4 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 99, the gaming machine 10 has different symbols used in the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game generated by the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening. ing.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used during the change and temporary stop of the special figure 1 variable display game are configured by the decorative symbols A. That is, the gaming machine 10 changes in high speed by sequentially displaying the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the special figure 1 variable display game. Then, any one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 is temporarily stopped on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and the temporarily stopped state is displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used while the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped are made up of decorative symbols A. That is, the gaming machine 10 stops any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the special figure 1 variable display game, and the derivation result Is displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbol used during the change and temporary stop of the special figure 2 variable display game is configured by the decorative symbol A. That is, the gaming machine 10 in the special figure 2 variable display game displays high speed fluctuations by displaying the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in order on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. Then, any one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 is temporarily stopped on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and the temporarily stopped state is displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used while the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped are composed of decorative symbols A and B. That is, the gaming machine 10 stops any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, 751 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the special figure 2 variable display game, Display the derivation result.

More specifically, the gaming machine 10, when deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game, the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. , 749, 750 are displayed in order to perform high-speed fluctuation, and any one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 is temporarily stopped on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. After that, the symbol 751 is stopped on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, in other cases (when the big hit consisting of the symbol 751 is not derived), the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. High-speed fluctuation is caused by displaying in order, and the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C temporarily stop any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, and then the left symbol. 709L, the right symbol 709R, the middle symbol 709C is stopped any one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, and the derivation result is displayed.

In the following, in the gaming machine 10, in the special figure 2 variable display game, a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 is derived instead of the big hit consisting of the symbol 750. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the big hit consisting of the symbol 750 does not occur in the special figure 2 variable display game.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A (a symbol without a character element) during the fluctuation and the stop, and the special figure 2 variable display game uses the symbol 751 to derive a big hit. By using the pattern B (the pattern with the character elements attached), it is possible to easily understand that the jackpot made up of the symbols 751 is a special jackpot (a jackpot of high value), improve the understanding of the game, and improve the interest. You can

Further, in the game machine 10, since the decorative symbol A used during the fluctuation and the stop is also used in the special figure 2 variable display game, the video and the like used during the fluctuation and the stop are displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game. It can be shared with the video, etc. in the above, and it is possible to suppress the increase in capacity and the time and effort required to prepare the video.

Next, a case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game and a case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a comparison between a case where “777” is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game and a case where “777” is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment. ..

First, the case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game will be described. The gaming machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 when the collective display device derives "●●●○●○○●" in the special figure 1 variable display game. When the jackpot consisting of the symbols 750 is derived, the gaming machine 10 gives "4R" as a privilege to the player. The game machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C from the symbol 750. To derive the jackpot.

Next, a case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. The gaming machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 when the collective display device derives "●●●○●○○●" in the special figure 2 variable display game. When the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbols 751, it gives the player "16R" as a privilege (a value higher than that of the jackpot of "777" consisting of the symbols 750). The gaming machine 10 temporarily suspends the symbol 750 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then the symbol 750 is temporarily stopped in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. By replacing the jackpot, a jackpot consisting of the symbols 751 is derived.

In this way, in the game machine 10, when different values (rounds) are given by the symbols displaying the same identifier, the symbols of the same embodiment are used in the temporary stop mode (result derivation process), and only when the result is derived. By using symbols of different modes (symbols 750, symbols 751) that display the same identifier, it is possible to easily grasp that the value of the jackpot consisting of each symbol is different, the degree of understanding of the game is improved, and the interest is improved. it can.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the value of the big hit consisting of the symbol whose number is "7" is changed according to the type of the variable display game being executed (special figure 1 variable display game or special figure 2 variable display game). Therefore, in the collective display device, the jackpot lighting pattern ("●●●○●○○●"), which is a pattern in which different numbers are given as "7", can be shared.

Next, a flow of effects in the case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the modified example 4 of the third embodiment.

The display screen 752 shown in FIG. 101(1) is a display screen when the symbol fluctuation is stopped (the variable display game is stopped), and shows the state before the special figure 1 variable display game is started. On the display screen 752, the left symbol 709L is stopped at "7", the middle symbol 709C is stopped at "3", and the right symbol 709R is stopped at "7". On the display screen 752, the special figure 1 hold number display 711 indicates “3”, the special figure 2 hold number display 712 indicates “0”, and there is only the hold storage that triggers the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. , It is clarified that the special figure 1 variable display game will be played when the next reserved memory is consumed.

The display screen 753 shown in FIG. 101 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 752, and shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
On the display screen 753, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 753, the special figure 1 hold number display 711 displaying "3" on the display screen 752 displays "2", and the variable display game being executed is the special figure 1 variable display game. It is shown that.

The display screen 754 shown in FIG. 101 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 753, and shows a state in which the three symbols are temporarily stopped in the special figure 1 variable display game.
On the display screen 754, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), the middle symbol 709C is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and the jackpot is derived. It shows the situation just before the operation.

The display screen 755 shown in FIG. 101 (4) is a display screen after the display screen 754, and shows a state in which the three symbols are stopped in the special figure 1 variable display game.
On the display screen 755, the left symbol 709L is stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), the middle symbol 709C is stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and the right symbol 709R is stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and is composed of the symbol 750. The jackpot has been derived.

Next, a flow of effects in the case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the display screen displayed by the display device according to the modified example 4 of the third embodiment.

The display screen 756 shown in FIG. 102(1) is a display screen when the symbol fluctuation is stopped (the variable display game is stopped), and shows the state before the special figure 2 variable display game is started. On the display screen 756, the left symbol 709L is "7", the middle symbol 709C is "3", and the right symbol 709R is "7". On the display screen 756, the special figure 1 hold number display 711 shows “0”, the special figure 2 hold number display 712 shows “3”, and only the hold storage that triggers the start of the special figure 2 variable display game exists. , It is clarified that the special figure 2 variable display game will be played when the next reserved memory is consumed.

The display screen 757 shown in FIG. 102 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 756, and shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is started.
On the display screen 757, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 757, the special figure 2 hold number display 712 that displayed "3" on the display screen 756 displays "2", and the variable display game being executed is the special figure 2 variable display game. It is shown that.

The display screen 758 shown in FIG. 102 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 757, and shows a state in which the three symbols are temporarily stopped in the special figure 2 variable display game.
On the display screen 758, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), the middle symbol 709C is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and the jackpot is derived. It shows the situation just before the operation. Further, the game machine 10 operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R while displaying the display screen 758 to change the effect, thereby arousing the expectation that further changes will occur and improving the interest. There is.

The display screen 759 shown in FIG. 102 (4) is a display screen after the display screen 758, and shows a state in which the three symbols are stopped in the special figure 2 variable display game.
On the display screen 759, the left symbol 709L is replaced from the symbol 750 to the symbol 751, the middle symbol 709C is replaced from the symbol 750 to the symbol 751, and the right symbol 709R is replaced from the symbol 750 to the symbol 751. , A jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 has been derived.

The above is the fourth modification of the third embodiment. The decorative pattern B is a pattern used only when deriving a big hit in the special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) generated by winning the special figure 2 starting opening. Absent. For example, the gaming machine 10 may use the decorative design B (design 751) instead of the decorative design A (design 750) even at the time of stop when the special figure 2 variable display game derives the deviation.

In the gaming machine 10, it has been described that the big hit consisting of the symbol 750 does not occur in the special figure 2 variable display game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 can be configured such that, in the special figure 2 variable display game, in addition to the big hit consisting of the symbol 751, a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 can also be derived.

[Modification 5 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modified example 5 of the third embodiment will be described. In the modified example 4 of the third embodiment, it is possible to generate a jackpot with a low value consisting of the symbol 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game, and it is possible to generate a high value jackpot with a symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game. The embodiment has been described. In the fifth modification of the third embodiment, a jackpot consisting of a low-value symbol 750 and a jackpot consisting of a high-value symbol 751 can be generated in each of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Will be described.

First, the symbols used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a symbol used in the gaming state in the modified example 5 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 103, the gaming machine 10 uses the same symbols in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
In the game machine 10, the symbols used during the variable and temporary stop of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are composed of decorative symbols A. That is, in the gaming machine 10, in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 are sequentially ordered in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. High-speed fluctuation is caused by displaying on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C to temporarily stop any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, and display the temporary stop state. ..

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used while the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are stopped are composed of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B. That is, the gaming machine 10 stops any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, 751 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the special figure 2 variable display game, Display the derivation result.

More specifically, in the gaming machine 10, when deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 751, the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 are sequentially arranged on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. Performs high-speed fluctuation by displaying, and after temporarily stopping any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, the left symbol 709L, right The symbol 751 is stopped in the symbol 709R and the middle symbol 709C.
On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, in other cases (when the big hit consisting of the symbol 751 is not derived), the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. High-speed fluctuation is caused by displaying in order, and the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C temporarily stop any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, and then the left symbol. 709L, the right symbol 709R, the middle symbol 709C is stopped any one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, and the derivation result is displayed.

Next, a case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 and a case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a comparison of two big hits in the modified example 5 of the third embodiment.

First, a big hit consisting of symbols 750 derived in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. When the jackpot consisting of the symbols 750 is derived, the gaming machine 10 gives "4R" as a privilege to the player. The game machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C from the symbol 750. To derive the jackpot.

Next, the big hit consisting of the symbols 751 derived in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. When the big hit consisting of the symbol 751 is derived, the gaming machine 10 gives "16R" as a privilege to the player. The gaming machine 10 temporarily suspends the symbol 750 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then the symbol 750 is temporarily stopped in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. By replacing the jackpot, a jackpot consisting of the symbols 751 is derived.

The above is the fifth modification of the third embodiment. In this way, the gaming machine 10 has a value from the state in which the symbol 750 is temporarily stopped in each of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (when the confirmation of the big hit of “777” is suggested). By making it possible to generate a jackpot made up of a low symbol 750 and a jackpot made up of a high-value symbol 751, it is possible to increase variations of the jackpot while suppressing an increase in image capacity and the like. Further, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the effect until the final stage of the effect (even after the temporary stop).

Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol B (the symbol with the character element) only when stopping when deriving the jackpot, so that the jackpot made up of the symbols 751 is a special jackpot (high-value jackpot). Can be easily grasped, the level of understanding of the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification 6 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modification 6 of the third embodiment will be described. In the modified examples 4 and 5 of the third embodiment, an embodiment in which a decorative pattern composed of only numerical elements is used at the time of fluctuation and temporary stop has been described. In the modified example 6 of the third embodiment, a case will be described in which a design including numerical elements and character elements is used. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a transition of the symbol mode of the decorative symbol in the variable display game of the modified example 6 of the third embodiment. In this section, a symbol displaying "7" will be used as a representative.

As shown in FIG. 105, the gaming machine 10 uses the character design 760 (decorative design C) as the left design 709L, the middle design 709C, and the right design 709R when the design is stopped (before the fluctuation starts). The decorative pattern C includes a character element having a distinctiveness as a design by a character (for example, a character such as a tiger in the case of displaying the number "7") and a numerical element having a distinctiveness as a design by a number. It is a pattern configured to include.

When the gaming machine 10 starts changing the symbols, the symbols used as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are changed from the character symbol 760 (decorative symbol C) to the character symbol 761 (decorative symbol D). The decorative pattern D has a base (fan) having a distinctiveness as a design by a pattern (for example, a pattern of a character such as a tiger in the case of displaying the number "7") and a distinctiveness as a pattern by a number. It is a design including a number element.

Then, the gaming machine 10 displays the temporary stop state using the character symbol 761 (decorative symbol D) as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R, and is then derived in the result derivation display (halt state). Depending on the result, the design used as the left design 709L, the middle design 709C, and the right design 709R is changed from the decorative design D to the decorative design C, the decorative design A, or the decorative design B.

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 changes the design from the decorative design D to the decorative design C as the left design 709L, the middle design 709C, and the right design 709R when deriving the outfall, and deriving the big hit (for example, 4R). Left design 709L, middle design 709C, right design 709R as a design to change the design from decorative design D to decorative design A, when deriving a high value jackpot (for example, 16R) left design 709L, middle design 709C, right design As 709R, the design is changed from the decorative design D to the decorative design B.

According to this, since the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B only when stopping when deriving the big hit, the derivation result can be grasped by the symbol aspect of the stopped symbol, and the understanding degree to the game can be improved. It can be raised and the interest can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 starts from a state in which the character design 761 (decorative design D) is temporarily stopped in the big hit mode (when confirmation of the big hit is suggested), and from the big hit consisting of the low value design 750 and the high value design 751. By making it possible to generate a big hit, it is possible to increase variations of the big hit while suppressing an increase in image capacity and the like. Further, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the effect until the final stage of the effect (even after the temporary stop).

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the first to sixth modifications) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41), operation means (push button 25), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The operating means can accept a predetermined operation. The control means reserves the first operation effect (the effect display 722 of the display screen 726) that accompanies the operation of the operation means, and the second operation effect (display) during the reservation effect (display of the item of the pattern P4 on the notice display 716). When the effect display 722) on the screen 721 is enabled and the operation of the operation means is received while the reserved effect and the second operation effect are being executed, the second operation effect is prioritized among the first operation effect and the second operation effect. And execute.

(2) When the control means of (1) accepts the operation of the operation means at the timing during the reserved effect and the second operation effect is not being executed, the accepted operation is the operation after the start of the first operation effect. Reservation is accepted as a reservation operation.

(3) The control means of (1) changes the mode of the reservation effect during execution of the reservation effect and the second operation effect.
(4) The display unit of (1) displays a hold storage indicating the execution right of the game, and the control unit stores the hold storage when there is a game in which the first operation effect of the reservation is performed. The fact that the first operation effect is to be performed in one of the games is displayed on the display means by the reserved effect (display screen 719).

(5) The control means of (4) performs the reservation effect by using the hold memory for executing the game before the hold memory for executing the game in which the first operation effect is performed.
(6) The control means of (5) changes the display mode of the reserved memory in which the game is executed first in the reserved effect (display screen 719), so that the first operation effect is achieved in any game in the reserved memory. Display what is to be done on the display means.

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41), operation means (push button 25), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The operation means can accept a predetermined operation. When the control means variably displays the identification information (left symbol 709L, middle symbol 709C, right symbol 709R) in the game and variably displays the identification information and then causes the display means to display an operation effect accompanied by an operation by the operation means. After displaying a display mode showing the operation means at a position corresponding to the identification information, control is performed to start the operation effect.

(8) The game machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The control means sets the volume of the BGM to a mute state while outputting the sound effect and outputs the sound volume of the BGM after outputting the sound effect when performing the effect of outputting the sound effect in the game when the BGM is played in the game. Controls to return from the mute state.

(9) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The control means variably displays the first identification information (decorative symbol A) corresponding to the first value (4R big hit) in the process of deriving the result of the game (when changing/temporarily stopping), and when deriving the result of the game ( At the time of stop, a conversion identifier (character element) for converting the first value into a second value (16R jackpot) larger than the first value is added to the first identification information (decorative pattern A), and second The display for displaying the second identification information (decorative pattern B) corresponding to the value of is stopped and displayed.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. 106 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of the display screen according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the display screen according to the fourth embodiment. Here, the display screen is a screen composed of one or a plurality of images displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and in principle, a different code is given to each different display content.

The display screen 800 shown in FIG. 106(1), like the display screen 500 shown in FIG. 63(1) described above, is a display screen in which symbols are stopped, and the symbols are stopped and displayed before the start of variation in the variable display game. .. The display screen 800 has, as display elements, a large symbol group 801, a small symbol group 802, a special figure 1 hold number display 803, a special figure 2 hold number display 804, a hold display 805, and a hold digest display 806. indicate. Details of each of these display elements are the same as those of the display screen 500 shown in FIG. After the display of the display screen 800 is performed, the gaming machine 10 starts the next variable display.

The display screen 810 shown in FIG. 106(2) is the display screen after the variable display is started. The display screen 810 is a screen after the display screen 800 (a screen to be displayed later in time), and shows a screen that is being variably displayed (three symbols are being changed). Details of this display screen 810 are the same as those of display screen 510 shown in FIG.

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106(3) is a display screen when the reach effect is generated after the start of the variable display, similarly to the display screen 511 shown in FIG. 63(3). The display screen 811 is a screen after the display screen 810, and shows a screen in which the reach is changing, in which the left and right symbols display "3". On the display screen 811, unlike the above-described display screen 511, due to the occurrence of the new start prize of the special figure 1 during variable display, the special figure 1 holding number display 803 shows that the number of holding memories of the special figure 1 game is “4”. , And the hold display 805 indicates that the number of held storages is “4”.

Further, during the change from the display screen 810 to the display screen 811, for example, the above-mentioned overflow switch signal is output, and accordingly, on the display screen 811, an error notification image prompting the player or the like to remove the ball from the lower plate 23. 807 is displayed. In addition, when an error including a glass frame opening or the like (including an abnormality detected by the above-described sensor or switch or a fraud) occurs, the game control device 100 is provided at various places in the program of the game control device 100 described above. By the effect command setting process, the error information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a command (specifically, as an error/illegal command of a one-shot system command) like other information and commands. Then, the effect control device 300 receives and analyzes the command from the game control device 100 in the above-described steps D22, 23, 27 and the like, and operates according to the command (in the case of an error relationship, a corresponding error display is performed). And error notification including output of error notification sound). Note that there may be an error in which the effect control device 300 independently determines the occurrence of an error and issues an error notification. The error notification image 807 is also displayed as one of the error notifications realized by the effect control device 300 in this manner.

The error notification image 807 is, for example, an image including the characters “please pull out the ball”, and for example, a position where the display position partially overlaps the large symbol group 801, has priority over other images such as the large symbol group 801. Are displayed (with a high display priority). That is, the error notification image 807 is displayed, for example, in front of the large symbol group 801 so as to partially hide the large symbol group 801, and on this display screen 811, the entire error notification image 807 is viewed by an observer (player, The clerk of the amusement store) is visible.

Note that concealment is to cover up, but it is not limited to a mode in which the image on the back side (an image having a relatively low display priority) is completely invisible, and a mode in which the image on the back side is difficult to see. May be included. For example, the error notification image 807 may be displayed semitransparently, and the image on the back side where the display position overlaps the error notification image 807 (in this case, a part of the large symbol group 801) may be transparently visible. Further, the error notification image 807 may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap with other images such as the large symbol group 801, and in this case, the front-rear relationship (relationship of display priority) with other images that do not overlap is naturally limited. Not done. In any case, the error notification image 807 is basically displayed so that the visibility of the entire image is secured, except when a specific effect described below is performed.

Further, as the error notification for displaying the error notification image, the case of the lower plate overflow has been described as an example, but other various errors (including abnormal and illegal) are also similarly displayed. For example, in the state where a left-handed hit is required to hit the game ball to the left side of the game area, and the opposite right-handed condition (a kind of abnormality) is detected, to prompt the player to left-handed The display of the notification image to be performed is also included.

The display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106(4) is a display screen of the cut-in effect during the reach effect. The display screen 812 is a screen after the display screen 811, and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols display “3”. The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation in the cut-in display 813 (cut-in production) for the variation display during the reach production. On this display screen 812, the large symbol group 801 is displayed relatively small at the position of the upper left corner so that the large symbol group 801 does not overlap with the cut-in display 813 as much as possible.

The cut-in display 813 of this specific example is an image group including a character 814 like a rocket, a character 815 (a character like a tiger) riding a rocket, and a background, and produces a predetermined degree of expectation. The effect of displaying the cut-in display 813 is an effect of a strong notice (notice of relatively high expectation of being a big hit) prior to an error display (at least an error display notifying a weak error of low importance) ( It is an example of a specific effect). In the case of this cut-in display 813, a large rocket-like character 814 appears in a dark background image displayed so as to cover a wide area of the screen (display area of the display device 41). By displaying the character 815 (a character like a tiger) on the rocket, it is suggested to the player that the expectation of a big hit is particularly high. In this case, even if the character 814 such as a large rocket appears, the expectation is high, and if the character 815 (character like a tiger) is on the rocket, the expectation may be further increased. Good.

In the present embodiment, with respect to the image displayed in the above-described strong notice effect (specific effect), the image is displayed with priority (at least the display priority is higher than the error display (the error display for notifying a weak error of low importance)). Display (high). That is, the cut-in display 813 (including the character 814, the character 815, and their background images) is displayed in front of the error notification image 807 so as to cover a part or the whole of the error notification image 807, and this display In the example of the screen 812, an observer (a player, a clerk of a game store, etc.) can visually recognize the entire cut-in display 813.

Note that, hiding means covering up, but as described above, it is not limited to the mode in which the image on the back side (the image with a relatively low display priority) is completely invisible, and the image on the back side is not visible. A mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize may be included. For example, the cut-in display 813 is displayed semi-transparently (however, it is preferable that the transparency is low), and the image on the back side where the display position overlaps the cut-in display 813 (in this case, a part of the error notification image 807, etc.) It may be thin and transparent.

Then, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 on the display screens 811 and 812 and outputs a corresponding error notification sound (the same applies to display screens 812a, 812b, 812c in FIG. 107 described later). For example, a voice "error pulling sound" "Please pull out the ball" is output from the speakers 19a and 19b (sound output means). This error notification sound is given priority over the sound output for the effect such as BGM output together with the variable display effect being executed (including the notice effect such as the cut-in display 813). Specifically, the volume of the error notification sound (or a parameter that affects the ease of listening, such as the directivity of the sound) is set to be higher than the sound output for the performance, or the sound for the performance is output during the output of the error notification sound. Stop output.

Here, the effect by the cut-in display 813 corresponds to the first effect that is prioritized to the error notification (display for error notification (that is, error display), sound output for error notification, or the like). On the other hand, the effect by the sound output for the effect such as BGM corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

Even if an error occurs, the image (first effect) displayed in the strong notice effect (specific effect) is preferentially displayed over the error display as in the present embodiment. You can entertain the players and realize a high level of entertainment. That is, by displaying the error display on the front side preferentially to the error display, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player and improve the interest when the error occurs. When the error display is always prioritized even for the strong notice as in the conventional art, at least a part of the display cannot be visually recognized by the player even if the strong notice is displayed due to the error display. However, this embodiment solves this problem. In particular, the image (the image that the player pays the most attention to, the main display of the strong notice) that greatly changes the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the character 814 or the character 815 described above disappears due to an error display (particularly a weak error). If so, the interest of the game will be greatly reduced, but such a problem can be avoided in the present embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the error display is hidden by the strong notice, the error notification sound is prioritized over the sound output for effect (sound output forming the second effect). It becomes easier for the player or the like to notice that there is an error, the operation for correcting the error state can be appropriately performed, and the reliability of error notification can be secured.

It should be noted that the display priority order of the images (the order of whether they are displayed as if they are on the front side or on the rear side when the display positions overlap) is, for example, the effect display edit described above. It can be set according to the order of the editing process in the process (step D23). As one aspect, the image data that is edited first in the effect display editing process (step D23) and is pasted (written) in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) first has a lower display priority and is displayed on the far side. In this case, the editing process may be performed in order from the image data with the lowest display priority.

Next, the display screens 812a, 812b, 812c shown in FIGS. 107(1), (2), and (3) are replaced with the display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106(4), and the display screens shown in FIG. 106(3) are displayed. It is another specific example of the screen displayed after displaying the display screen 811 shown.

In the display screen 812a shown in FIG. 107(1), of the images forming the cut-in display 813, the background image is displayed as an auxiliary display on the back side of the error display image (that is, the error notification image 807), and the rest is displayed. In this example, only the images of the characters 814 and 815 are displayed on the front side with priority over the error notification image 807. In this way, the image that hides the error notification image is a part of the image displayed in the specific effect (for example, the effect of the strong notice) (preferably, a characteristic image that suggests a difference in the expectation of the big hit, such as the strong notice of the strong notice). (Main display) only. In the display screen 812a, for example, the character 814 may be displayed as an auxiliary display on the back side of the error notification image 807, and only the character 815 may be displayed as the main display on the front side of the error notification image 807. As a result, it is possible to realize a high degree of interest by a specific effect (for example, a strong notice effect) while ensuring the visibility of the error display to some extent.

Here, the effect by the character 815 or the like displayed on the front side of the error notification image 807 in the cut-in display 813 corresponds to the first effect prior to the error notification. On the other hand, the background image displayed on the back side of the error notification image 807 in the cut-in display 813 corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

On the display screen 812b shown in FIG. 107 (2), instead of the cut-in display 813, a plurality of small rocket-like characters 814a are displayed as an effect of a weak notice (a notice with a lower expectation of a big hit than a strong notice). There is. This small rocket-like character 814a is displayed behind the error notification image 807, and the error notification image 807 is not hidden. As described above, for the weak notice effect, the error display may be prioritized. As a result, for a weak notice effect, the visibility of the error display can always be kept good even if the notice is given. Here, the effect of the weak notice by the character 814a displayed on the back side of the error notification image 807 corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

When the display effect is inferior to the error notification (when the error display is prioritized over the display effect) like the weak notice effect shown in FIG. 107(2), the sound output for the effect is informed of the error. May be prioritized over the sound output for (particularly, a weak error notification sound). For example, FIG. 107(2) illustrates a mode in which a voice output of an error notification “Please pull out the ball” is performed. However, when a notice effect that the character 814a appears is being performed, this “ The volume of the audio output of the error notification "Please pull out the ball" is temporarily reduced or set to zero, and the sound output (BGM, sound effect, for example, "rocket group start") accompanying the notice production in which the character 814a appears. It is also possible to preferentially perform a voice such as "!" (for example, at a louder volume than the error notification sound).

As a result, even if a part of the display effect of the advance notice is hidden by the error display, the effect output and the interest are maintained by preferentially outputting the sound for the advance notice effect. In this case, the effect produced by the sound output for effect corresponds to the first effect prioritizing the error notification. On the other hand, the display effect by the character 814a corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

The display screen 812c shown in FIG. 107(3) is displayed when the error notification image 807 whose display is started on the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106(3) is a strong error (having a higher importance than the weak error). 9 is a specific example of a display screen after the display screen 811. As the strong error, for example, there is an illegal error detected by the board radio wave sensor 62 or the magnetic sensor 61 described above. On the display screen 812c, the error notification image 807, which is an error display of a strong error, is prioritized over the cut-in display 813, which is an effect display of a strong notice, and the error notification image 807 is displayed on the front side of the cut-in display 813. it's shown. In this way, the error notification image hidden by the specific effect may be limited to only weak errors. As a result, for the error display of an important strong error, the visibility can be reliably ensured and the reliability of the error notification can be ensured with high reliability.

When the error notification (error display or sound output for error notification) is continuously performed for a predetermined execution time, the execution time of the effect that hides the error display such as the cut-in display 813 described above and the error notification. It is preferable that the execution time of the sound output for effect that is prioritized over the sound output of 1 is less than the shortest execution time of the error notification. As a result, even if a performance for concealing the error display or a sound output for performance that is prioritized over the error notification is performed, the error notification is obstructed by these effects at least during a part of the period in which the error notification is performed. Surely done.

Further, when the error display is performed by blinking display (lighting and extinguishing periodically, or display and non-display are repeated), the execution time of the effect that hides the error display such as the cut-in display 813 described above is As shown in FIG. 113(2) described later, it is preferable that the lighting display time of the error display is shorter than the display time. As a result, even if the effect of concealing the error display is performed, the error display is reliably performed without being hindered by the effect during at least a part of the period in which the error display is performed.

When the error display is performed by blinking, the execution timing of the effect such as the above-described cut-in display 813 that conceals the error display is not synchronized with the lighting timing of the error display, for example, FIG. 113(3) described later. As shown in FIG. 7, a time offset (shift time) may be inserted as necessary to adjust the execution timing of the error display or the execution timing of the effect.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a main control means (game control means; game control device 100) for performing game control such as controlling the progress of the game, and identification information for effect (decorative special drawing, for example, the large symbol described above). A display means (display device 41) for playing a variable display game in which the group 801) is variably displayed, and a production means (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) including the display means based on a command (command) from the main control means. The subordinate control means (effect control means; effect control device 300) which performs effect control to control is provided. The slave control means can execute an error display for notifying an error occurring in the game machine 10 based on a command or an error determination by the slave control means, and the error display can be performed as an effect by the effect means. A control unit (CPU311) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, an effect of displaying a cut-in display 813) that hides at least a part thereof is provided. As the error display, the control unit displays, for example, an error notification image (for example, error notification image 807) that is an image for notifying an error on the display device, for example, and the specific effect hides at least a part of the error notification image. The error display and the specific effect may be performed by a display means different from the display means for playing the variable display game.

(2) Sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b) is further provided, and the control unit in (1) can output an error notification sound for notifying an error occurring in the gaming machine by the sound output means, When the specific effect includes the sound output for effect, the error notification sound is output with priority over the sound output for the effect.

(3) The control unit of (1) uses the first image (for example, the character 814 and the character 815 in the cut-in display 813) and the second image (for example, the background of the cut-in display 813) as the effect images in the specific effect. Image) can be displayed. The display priority of the first image is set higher than that of the error notification image, and the display priority of the second image is set lower than that of the error notification image. That is, the first image conceals the error notification image in the portion overlapping the error notification image, and the second image does not hide the error notification image even in the portion overlapping the error notification image (the error notification image is displayed so as to be on the front side). ).

(4) The control unit of (1) has a first effect corresponding to the specific effect (for example, a strong notice effect) and a second effect not corresponding to the specific effect (for example, a weak notice effect) as effects by the effect means. Can be executed, and the display priority of the effect image displayed in the first effect (for example, the cut-in display 813 or the character 814 in the cut-in display 813) is set higher than that of the error notification image. The display priority of the effect image (for example, the character 814a) displayed in the effect is set lower than that of the error notification image. That is, the effect image displayed in the first effect hides the error notification image in the portion overlapping the error notification image, and the effect image displayed in the second effect hides the error notification image in the portion overlapping the error notification image. Do not set (display the error notification image so that it is on the front side).

(5) The control unit of (1) can notify the first error (for example, a strong error) and the second error (for example, a weak error) as an error, and the display priority order of the images for notifying the first error Is set higher than the display priority of the image displayed as the specific effect, and the display priority of the image informing the second error is set lower than the display priority of the image displayed as the specific effect. That is, the image informing the first error is not hidden by the effect image in a portion overlapping the effect image displayed in the specific effect, and the image informing the second error is the effect image displayed in the specific effect. It is set so as to be hidden by the effect image in the portion overlapping with.

(6) The control unit in (1) can notify the first error (for example, a strong error) and the second error (for example, a weak error) as the error, and the sound output and the second error for notifying the first error The sound output for notifying the error is prioritized over the sound output performed as an effect including the specific effect.

(7) The control unit of (1) displays the display priority of the error notification image related to a predetermined error notification (for example, notification of a strong error) as a specific effect (for example, a strong notice or a weak notice effect). If the error notification image hides at least a part of the effect image, the effect sound output as the specific effect related to the concealed effect image is output as an error notification as a predetermined error notification. This is prioritized over the sound output. The feature described in (7) is, for example, a modification in which the effect sound output is prioritized over the error notification sound in the specific example (example in which error display is prioritized) shown in FIGS. 107(2) and 107(3). Corresponds to the characteristics of the example.

(8) The production means of (1) further includes sound output means (for example, speakers 19a, 19b) and movable production means (for example, board production device 44), and the control unit is generated by the gaming machine. It is possible to output an error notification sound for notifying an error that is present by the sound output means, and when the specific effect includes the effect sound output, the error notification sound is output with priority over the effect sound output. The display means displays an effect display (effect display) related to the movable operation regardless of whether or not the movable effect means performs the normal movable operation.

In addition, when the movable production means cannot perform a normal movable operation, that is, when the movable production means is defective, the actuator (motor or solenoid) of the movable production means is broken, a required connector is disconnected or is not properly connected, and wiring is There is a wire breakage or mechanical mechanism failure.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen and the movable accessory of the fifth embodiment.

Since the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 108 (1) is the same as the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3) described above, the description thereof will be omitted. After this display screen 811, the game machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) in which the movable accessory operates.

A display screen 821 shown in FIG. 108(2) is a screen after the display screen 811, and is a display screen displaying the effect images 816 and 817 as the background of the strong notice that the movable accessory operates. .. As the movable accessory, for example, the movable part of the above-described third board effect device 706 (described in the third embodiment with reference to FIG. 82) moves to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the display device 41, and is displayed. It is positioned at a predetermined position covering the vicinity of the upper part from the central part. The effect image 816 is a background image that spreads from the back side (back side) of the circular movable part of the third board effect device 706 to the surroundings, and is seen from the front (that is, from the player's perspective) the third board effect device 706. It is an image in which the periphery of the circular movable portion is decorated and an effect is produced integrally with the movable portion.

The effect image 817 is a pair of left and right images that represent a predetermined facial expression of the human eye, and is superimposed and displayed on the front side in the effect image 816. In the case of this example, the circular movable part of the third board effect device 706 is provided with openings 706a like left and right eyes of a person's face at two places, and an effect image 817 is provided from this opening 706a. Each is visible from the front, and the circular movable part of the third board effect device 706 and the effect image 817 realize a display like a human face having a predetermined expression.

It should be noted that the effect images 816 and 817 are set to have a lower display priority than the error notification image 807 and are displayed behind the error notification image 807. Further, the effect images 816 and 817 may be displayed as an integrated image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 108(2), the circular movable part of the third board effect device 706 that has moved to the predetermined position conceals almost the entire error notification image 807 in this case, and the error display is performed. Also entertains the player and realizes a highly entertaining production. The effect images 816 and 817 may be displayed in the state shown in FIG. 108(2) from the time when the movement is started from the position where the third board effect device 706 is housed, or the third board effect device is displayed. The same may be started when 706 has moved to a predetermined position, or in response to the appearance of the movable portion of the third board effect device 706, starting from the display of only the lower end portion of the effect image 816 to the third board effect. It may be displayed so as to move integrally with the movable part of the third board effect device 706 so as to follow the movement of the movable part of the device 706.

The display screen 821 shown in FIG. 108(3) is the same as the display screen 821 shown in FIG. 108(2) as an image displayed in the display area of the display device 41. In FIG. 108(3), the strong notice accompanied by the operation of the third board effect device 706 is started, but the movable part of the third board effect device 706 does not move from the storage position due to a failure of the third board effect device 706, for example. Indicates. As described above, when the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect images 816 and 817 are displayed as the effect of the strong notice, and the error image is displayed on the front side preferentially to the effect images 816 and 817. The entire notification image 807 becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player or the like recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory that the movable accessory does not move even though it is a strong notice that the movable accessory should move. Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (when no error has occurred), the effect images 816 and 817 are displayed in this way so that the player or the like can recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory. Is preferred.

Also in the case of the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and produces the corresponding sound output for error notification as in the case of the above-described FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment). Priority is given to sound output. In addition, in FIG. 108, not only the sound output for effect but also the sound output for error notification is omitted.

Here, the effect by the third board effect device 706 (movable accessory) corresponds to the first effect that gives priority to the error notification. On the other hand, the effect produced by the sound output for effect images 816, 817 and BGM corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the error notification image is hidden by the effect of the movable accessory is described. However, when the effect of the movable accessory is a weak notice effect, when the effect of the movable accessory occurs. In addition, when the error notification (including the display of the error notification image) is performed, for example, the movable accessory may be configured to change to an effect in which the operation of hiding the error notification image 807 is not executed.

[Modification 1 of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, an effect performed in the first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109: is a figure which shows an example of the display screen and movable accessory of the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment.

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 109(1) is the same as the above-mentioned display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106(3), and therefore description thereof will be omitted. After this display screen 811, the game machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) in which the movable accessory operates. Note that FIG. 109(1) shows a state in which the lower ends of the movable portions of the above-described second board effect devices 705L and 705R, which are movable accessory objects, are located at the upper left and upper right front surfaces of the display area of the display device 41. It is shown as an example. However, at this point in time, the lower ends of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R may not be located in front of the display area of the display device 41 and may be retracted upward from the display area.

A display screen 823 shown in FIG. 109(2) is a screen after the display screen 811, and is a display screen on which an effect image 816 is displayed as a background of a strong notice of the action of the movable accessory. As the movable accessory, for example, the movable portion of the second board effect device 705L, 705R (described in the third embodiment with reference to FIG. 82) moves toward the center of the display area of the display device 41, The lower end of the movable part is in a state of partially hiding the error notification image 807 displayed in the central part of the display area.

The display screen 824 shown in FIG. 109 (3) is the same as the display screen 823 shown in FIG. 109 (2) as an image displayed in the display area of the display device 41. However, the size and display position of the effect image 816 may be different between the display screen 824 and the display screen 823. Further, FIG. 109(3) shows a state in which the movement of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R, which are movable accessory parts, has reached a predetermined position. That is, the lower ends of the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R reach a position slightly lower than the center of the display area of the display device 41, and the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R are adjacent to each other on the left and right. It is positioned so that it is joined to fit. In this state, a wide area including substantially the upper half of the display area of the display device 41 is concealed by the movable parts of the joined second board effect devices 705L and 705R, and most of the error notification image 807 is the second board effect device 705L. , 705R is concealed by the moving part.

In this modification, the effect image 816 is a background image extending from the back side (back side) of the movable portion of the second board effect device 705L, 705R to the surroundings, and is the first image viewed from the front (that is, viewed from the player). This is an image in which the periphery of the movable portion of the two-board effect device 705L and 705R is decorated and the effect is performed integrally with the movable portion. Note that the same symbols are used because they are the same type of effect images, but the effect image 816 shown in FIG. 108 and the effect image 816 shown in FIG. The aspect of the image may be different. The effect image 816 is set to have a lower display priority than the error notification image 807, and is displayed behind the error notification image 807.

Then, as shown in FIG. 109(3), the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R that have moved to the predetermined positions conceal almost the entire error notification image 807 in this case, and the error display is performed. Also entertains the player and realizes a highly entertaining production. The effect image 816 may be displayed in the state shown in FIG. 109(2) from the time when the movement is started from the position where the second board effect devices 705L and 705R are housed, or the second board effect device is displayed. Similarly, it may be started at the time when 705L and 705R have moved to a predetermined position, or from the display of only the lower end of the effect image 816 corresponding to the appearance of the movable part of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R. It may be displayed so as to move integrally with the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R so as to follow the movement of the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R.

Also in the case of the present modification, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and produces a corresponding sound output for error notification as in the case of the above-described FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment). Priority is given to sound output. Note that in FIG. 109, the sound output for error notification is omitted in addition to the sound output for effect.

Here, the effect by the second board effect devices 705L and 705R (movable accessory) corresponds to the first effect that gives priority to the error notification. On the other hand, the effect produced by the sound output for effect images 816 and BGM corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

[Modification 2 of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, effects produced in the second modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the second modification of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 110(1) is the same as the above-mentioned display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106(3), and thus description thereof will be omitted. After this display screen 811, the game machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) in which the movable accessory operates.

A display screen 823a shown in FIG. 110(2) is a screen after the display screen 811, and displays the effect image 816 as the background of the strong notice that the movable accessory operates and the auxiliary display of the strong notice (failure recognition). It is a display screen on which the auxiliary images 826L and 826R that are (possible display) are displayed. Here, the effect image 816 is the same image as the effect image 816 of the first modification shown in FIG. 109(2). When the second board effect devices 705L and 705R operate normally, the auxiliary images 826L and 826R are located on the inner side of the movable portions of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R and the second board effect devices 705L and 705R. It is an image displayed in a position and a size that make it invisible by the movable part. In the case of the example shown in the figure, the auxiliary images 826L and 826R have an outer shape that is substantially similar to the movable portion of the second board effect device 705L and 705R, and are smaller in size than the movable portion.

The display screen 824a shown in FIG. 110(3) is a screen after the display screen 823a, and displays the effect image 816 and the auxiliary image 827 which is the auxiliary display of the strong notice (failure recognizable display). Is a display screen. Here, the effect image 816 is the same image as the effect image 816 of the first modification shown in FIG. 109(3). The auxiliary image 827 is located behind the movable portion of the second board effect device 705L, 705R when the second board effect device 705L, 705R operates normally, and the second board effect device 705L, 705R is movable. It is an image displayed in a position and size that is always hidden by a part and cannot be seen. In the case of the example in the figure, the auxiliary image 827 is an image that includes the characters "feature failure" and is smaller in size than the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R.

110(2) and FIG. 110(3) start a strong notice accompanied by the operation of the second board effect devices 705L, 705R, but the second board effect devices 705L, 705R malfunction, for example. The state where the movable part of the devices 705L and 705R does not move from the storage position is shown. That is, although FIG. 110(2) shows the timing of the advance notice effect in which the second board effect devices 705L and 705R are supposed to be operating as in FIG. This shows a state where the rendering devices 705L and 705R are not operating. In addition, FIG. 110(3) shows the timing of the notice effect in which the second board effect devices 705L and 705R are supposed to be operating as in FIG. The state where the devices 705L and 705R are not operating is shown.

As described above, when the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect image 816 is displayed as a strong notice effect, and the error notification image 807 displayed on the front side preferentially to the effect image 816 is displayed. The whole becomes visible, and further, the auxiliary images 826L and 826R and the auxiliary image 827 become visible. For this reason, it is possible to make the player or the like surely recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory that the movable accessory does not move even though it is a strong notice that the movable accessory should move. Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (when an error has not occurred), the effect image 816 is displayed in this way, or the auxiliary images 826L and 826R and the auxiliary image 827 are further displayed, and the movable character object is displayed. It is preferable that the player or the like recognize the abnormal state.

Also in the case of the present modification, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and produces a corresponding sound output for error notification as in the case of the above-described FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment). Priority is given to sound output. Note that in FIG. 110, in addition to the sound output for directing, the sound output for error notification is not shown.

[Modification 3 of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, an effect performed in the modified example 3 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen and a movable accessory according to Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 111(1) is the same as the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106(3) described above, and therefore description thereof will be omitted. After this display screen 811, the game machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) in which the movable accessory operates.

A display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111(2) is a screen after the display screen 811, and is a display screen displaying the effect images 816 and 828 as the background of the strong notice that the movable accessory is operating. .. As the movable accessory, for example, the movable part of the above-described third board effect device 706 (described in the third embodiment with reference to FIG. 82) moves to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the display device 41, and is displayed. It is positioned at a predetermined position covering the vicinity of the upper part from the central part. Similar to the example of FIG. 108(2) described above, the effect image 816 is a background image that spreads from the back side (back side) of the circular movable part of the third board effect device 706 to the surroundings, and the movable part when viewed from the front. It is an image that decorates the area around and creates an effect with the movable part.

The effect image 828 is a pair of left and right images that represent a predetermined facial expression of the human eye, and is superimposed and displayed on the front side in the effect image 816. In this example as well, similar to the example of FIG. 108(2) described above, the circular movable part of the third board effect device 706 is provided with openings 706a such as the eyes of a human face at two positions on the left and right. Therefore, the effect images 828 can be seen from the front through the openings 706a, and the circular movable part of the third board effect device 706 and the effect image 828 realize a display like a human face having a predetermined expression. To be done.

The effect images 816 and 828 are set to have a lower display priority than the error notification image 807, and are displayed behind the error notification image 807. Further, the effect images 816 and 828 may be displayed as an integrated image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 111(2), the circular movable part of the third board effect device 706 that has moved to a predetermined position conceals almost the entire error notification image 807, and even if an error display is displayed, the game is played. To entertain people and create highly entertaining productions. The effect images 816 and 828 may be displayed in the state shown in FIG. 111(2) from the time when the movement is started from the position where the third board effect device 706 is stored, or the third board effect device is displayed. The same may be started when 706 has moved to a predetermined position, or in response to the appearance of the movable portion of the third board effect device 706, starting from the display of only the lower end portion of the effect image 816 to the third board effect. It may be displayed so as to move integrally with the movable part of the third board effect device 706 so as to follow the movement of the movable part of the device 706.

The display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111(3) is a screen after the display screen 811, and the image displayed in the display area of the display device 41 is the same as the display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111(2). Is. In FIG. 111(3), the strong notice accompanied by the operation of the third board effect device 706 is started, but the movable part of the third board effect device 706 does not move from the storage position due to a failure of the third board effect device 706, for example. Indicates. As described above, when the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect images 816 and 828 are displayed as a strong notice effect, and the error image is displayed on the front side preferentially to the effect images 816 and 828. The entire notification image 807 becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player or the like recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory that the movable accessory does not move even though it is a strong notice that the movable accessory should move. Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (when no error occurs), the effect images 816 and 828 are displayed in this way so that the player or the like can recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory. Is preferred.

The display screen 821b shown in FIG. 111(4) is a screen after the display screen 811 similarly to the display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111(3). What is characteristic is that, in the display screen 821b shown in FIG. 111(4), in addition to the display of the effect images 816 and 828, the auxiliary image 829 that is a strong notice auxiliary display (failure recognizable display) is displayed. When the third board effect device 706 operates normally, the auxiliary image 829 is located behind the movable part of the third board effect device 706 and is always hidden by the movable part of the third board effect device 706. It is an image displayed in a position and size that make it invisible. In the case of the example in the figure, the auxiliary image 829 is an image smaller than that of the movable portion of the third board effect device 706, including the characters “feature failure”.

Then, in FIG. 111(4), similar to FIG. 111(3), the strong notice accompanied by the operation of the third board effect device 706 is started, but for example, the third board effect device 706 is broken due to a failure of the third board effect device 706. The state where the movable part of 706 does not move from the storage position is shown. That is, FIG. 111(4) is the timing of the notice effect that the third board effect device 706 should be operating as in FIG. 111(2), but the third board effect device 706 is not operating. Indicates the state.

In the case of the example shown in FIG. 111(4), when the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect images 816 and 828 are displayed as the effect of the strong notice, and the effect images 816 and 828 are given priority over the effect images. The entire error notification image 807 displayed on the front side is visible, and further the auxiliary image 829 is visible. For this reason, it is possible to make the player or the like surely recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory that the movable accessory does not move even though it is a strong notice that the movable accessory should move. Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (when an error has not occurred), the effect image 816 is displayed in this manner, or the auxiliary image 829 is further displayed, and the abnormal state of the movable actor is displayed. It is preferable that the configuration is made to be recognized by.

Also in the case of the present modification, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and produces a corresponding sound output for error notification as in the case of the above-described FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment). Priority is given to sound output. In addition, in FIG. 111, the sound output for error notification is omitted in addition to the sound output for effect.

Here, the effect by the third board effect device 706 (movable accessory) corresponds to the first effect that gives priority to the error notification. On the other hand, the effect produced by the sound output for effects such as the effect images 816, 828 and BGM corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

[Modification 4 of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, an effect performed in the modified example 4 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen and a light guide plate of Modification 4 of the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 112, a perspective view showing the arrangement and state of the light guide plate is shown on the left side, and an example of a display screen displayed in the display area of the display device 41 is shown on the right side. The perspective view on the left side of FIG. 112 shows only the arrangement and state of the light guide plate, and the image content of the display screen of the display device 41 is not shown in this perspective view.

The light guide plate has a plate-shaped body made of acrylic or the like as a main element, and light from a light-emitting element such as an LED is incident on the plate-shaped body from one side, and the light is surfaced by unevenness formed on the plate-shaped body. It is a device that can be made to emit light to the front side almost uniformly by displaying it to the side (front side), or to display specific characters or figures according to unevenness on the front side. As the light guide plate, when the light emitting element is not emitting light, the entire back side can be seen through from the front side with high transparency in the off state, and when the light emitting element is emitting light, the characters and figures corresponding to the unevenness are partially displayed. There are some that are displayed so as to stand out.

In this modification, the light guide plates 831 and 832 that are such light guide plates are arranged so as to overlap with each other on the front surface side of the display area of the display device 41 as shown on the left side of FIG. 112(1). In the present modification, for example, two sets of light guide plates 831 and 832 having a display portion (a portion that becomes a transparent window in the off state) having a size larger than the display area of the display device 41 are displayed on the display device 41. It is placed in a fixed state overlaid in front of the area. Note that illustrations of light emitting elements and the like attached to the light guide plates 831 and 832 are omitted. Further, the light guide plates 831 and 832 are movably provided, for example, from a standby position (storage position) retracted away from the front surface of the display area of the display device 41 to a position overlapping the front surface of the display area of the display device 41. It is also possible to move the light guide plates 831 and 832 from the standby position and use it as a movable accessory when performing the effect.

As shown on the right side of FIG. 112(1), the display screen 833 shown in FIG. 112(1) is similar to the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106(3) described above when the reach effect is generated after the start of the variable display. It is a display screen. The display screen 833 is, for example, a screen after the display screen 810 shown in FIG. 106(2) described above, and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols display “3”. Further, during the change to the display screen 833, for example, the above-mentioned overflow switch signal is output, and accordingly, the above-described error notification image 807 is displayed on the display screen 833.

In the state of FIG. 112(1), as shown on the left side of FIG. 112(1), both of the light guide plates 831 and 832 are in the off state, and the display on the back side of these light guide plates 831 and 832 is displayed. The entire screen 833 is clearly visible from the front side. In FIG. 112, the small symbol group 802, the special figure 1 hold number display 803, the special figure 2 hold number display 804, the hold display 805, and the hold exhaustion display 806 described with reference to FIG. Illustration is omitted and description is also omitted.

As shown on the right side of FIG. 112(2), the display screen 834 shown in FIG. 112(2) is similar to the display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106(4) described above, and is a display screen of the cut-in effect during the reach effect. Is. The display screen 834 is a screen after the display screen 833, and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols display “3”. The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation in the cut-in display 813a or the like (cut-in production) for the variation display during the reach production.

However, unlike the cut-in display 813 of the display screen 812 described above, the cut-in display 813a of the present modification is composed only of an image such as the background of a rocket (for example, a dark universe), and a character 814 such as a rocket. Does not include images.

In the state of FIG. 112(2), as shown on the left side of FIG. 112(2), only the light guide plate 832 among the light guide plates 831 and 832 is in the ON state, and the light guide plate 832 is in the ON state. As a result, the character 832a which is an image displayed on the light guide plate 832 becomes visible from the front side, and the display screen 834 on the back side of each light guide plate 831 and 832 is clear from the front side except the display range of the character 832a. Is visible. In other words, the display area of the display device 41 is partially hidden by the character 832a, which is an image displayed on the light guide plate 832, as shown on the right side of FIG. 112(2). In this case, of the error notification image 807, The corresponding range of is hidden by the character 832a. Therefore, even if an error is displayed, the player is entertained and a highly entertaining effect is realized.

Here, the character 832a, which is an image displayed on the light guide plate 832, is an image like a rocket like the character 814 shown in FIG. 106(4) described above, and the display screen 834 is cut when viewed from the front. The in-display 813a (display in the display area of the display device 41) is overlapped to realize an integrated display effect.

Note that this example is merely an example, and the image displayed on the light guide plate 832 may include other images, for example, a character on a rocket. Further, a part of the image like a rocket, for example, a part of the flame emitted from the rocket engine emitted from the lower end of the rocket is displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41 (that is, a part of the display screen 834). May be done. In the portion displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41, it is possible to easily change the mode (for example, display color) of the image according to the degree of expectation.

As shown on the right side of FIG. 112(3), the display screen 834a shown in FIG. 112(3) is similar to the display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106(4), and is a display screen for the cut-in effect during the reach effect. Is. Similar to the display screen 834 shown in FIG. 112(2), the display screen 834a is a screen after the display screen 833 shown in FIG. 112(1), and the reach pattern in which the left and right symbols display “3” is changing. Show the screen. The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation in the cut-in display 813a or the like (cut-in production) for the variation display during the reach production. The case of FIG. 112(3) is an effect that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of the case of FIG. 112(2) described above, for example.

The display screen 834a of the present modified example has a cut-in effect image, a cut-in display 813a which is an image like a background of a rocket (for example, an image like a dark universe), and a position where it looks like a person is on a rocket. 8 is a screen displaying a tiger-like character 835 displayed in FIG.

In the state of FIG. 112(3), as shown on the left side of FIG. 112(3), both of the light guide plates 831 and 832 are in the ON state, which causes the image displayed on the light guide plate 832. Character 832a and the characters 831a and 831b which are images displayed on the light guide plate 831 are visible from the front side, and the display screen 834a on the back side of each light guide plate 831 and 832 has characters 831a, 831b and 832a. It is clearly visible from the front side except the display range of. In other words, the display area of the display device 41 is partially hidden by the characters 831a, 831b, 832a which are images displayed on the respective light guide plates as shown on the right side of FIG. 112(3), and in this case, the error notification is issued. Many areas of the image 807 are hidden by the characters 831a, 831b, 832a. Therefore, even if an error is displayed, the player is entertained and a highly entertaining effect is realized.

Here, the characters 831a, 831b, and 832a, which are images displayed on the light guide plates 831, 832, are rocket-like images like the character 814 shown in FIG. 106 (4) described above, and are viewed from the front. And the cut-in display 813a of the display screen 834a and the character 835 (display of the display area of the display device 41) are overlapped to realize an integrated display effect. In particular, in this example, when viewed from the front (ie, when viewed by the player), as shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (3), the tiger-like character 835 appears to be on board the rocket-like character 831a. It has a structure that looks like.

Note that this example is merely an example, and the image displayed on the light guide plates 831 and 832 may include another image, for example, a character on a rocket. Further, a part of the image like a rocket, for example, a part of the flame emitted from the lower end of the rocket may be displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41 (that is, a part of the display screen 834a). .. Further, an image like a rocket may be displayed as a part of the cut-in display 813a of the display screen 834a so that a state in which more rockets are flying can be visually recognized when viewed from the front. In the portion displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41, it is possible to easily change the mode (for example, display color) of the image according to the degree of expectation. For example, the difference in the degree of expectation can be suggested by changing the presence or absence, the form (for example, display color), and the type of the character 835 riding on the character 831a such as a rocket.

Further, the light guide plate is not limited to two sets, and one set may be used, or three or more sets may be used. Further, the light guide plate may be in the ON state, for example, so that the entire light is emitted and, in an extreme example, the entire display area of the display device 41 is hidden. Also, due to the action of the light guide plate, part or the whole of the display screen is white-out (or black-out), or the brightness or illuminance of part or the whole of the display screen is reduced, so that the error notification image is hidden. There may be a mode. Further, the light guide plate may be configured to move from the front surface of the display device 41 and stand by at a position where it does not overlap the display area of the display device 41 when the effect is not produced. In this case, it is difficult to see through even in the off state. It is possible to use the one with a low translucency.

Also in the case of the present modification, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and produces a corresponding sound output for error notification as in the case of the above-described FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment). Priority is given to sound output. Note that in FIG. 112, not only the sound output for effect but also the sound output for error notification is omitted.

Here, the effect by the light guide plates 831 and 832 (display means, movable accessory) is equivalent to the first effect prioritizing the error notification. On the other hand, the effect produced by the sound output for the effect image 813a or BGM corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

In the present embodiment, there are display means for producing effects (including error notification), display means for producing effects by display, sound output means for producing effects by voice, and movable accessory that produces effects by the movement of the movable part. A concrete example of the priority order of the error notification and the notice production, including those described in the fifth embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, is summarized as follows, and differs depending on the production means.

First, the order of priority on the display means is strong error notification>strong notice effect>weak error notice>weak notice effect, if the highest priority order is described first. Next, the order of priority in the sound output means is similarly strong error notification> weak error notification> strong notice effect, weak notice effect. The priority order of the sound output means may be strong error notification>weak error notification>strong notice effect>weak notice effect. Next, the priority order of the movable accessory is similarly strong notice effect>strong error notification>weak error notification>weak notice effect. Here, a strong error means an error of relatively high importance, and a weak error means an error of lower importance than a strong error. Further, a strong notice means a notice with a relatively high degree of reliability (a degree of expectation such as a big hit), and a weak notice means a notice with a lower degree of reliability than the strong notice.

[Modification 5 of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, an effect performed in the modified example 5 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. This modified example is an effect that hides the error display and the error display described in the present embodiment (fifth embodiment) and the above-described fourth embodiment (a display effect of a strong notice such as a cut-in effect, a movable accessory). Is characterized by the execution time and the execution timing of the effect by the movement of the movable part, the effect of the display and movement of the light guide plate. FIG. 113 is an example of a timing chart showing the temporal relationship between the error display (blinking display) and the effect of hiding the error display.

First, although not shown, when an error notification (error display or sound output for error notification) is continuously performed for a predetermined execution time (when not a blinking display), the above-described third board effect device 706 or The execution time of the effect for concealing the error display by the second board effect devices 705L and 705R and the light guide plates 831 and 832 is preferably less than the shortest execution time of the error notification. As a result, even if the effect of concealing the error display is performed, the error notification is reliably performed without being hindered by the effect during at least a part of the period in which the error notification is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(1), when the error display is performed by blinking display (lighting and extinguishing periodically or display and non-display are repeated), the effect of concealing the error display (the above-mentioned cut The execution time of the in-display 813, the third board effect device 706, the second board effect devices 705L and 705R, and the light guide plates 831 and 832 is executed as the error display lighting time (described later) as shown in FIG. 113(2). The execution time Ton) is preferably shorter.

Here, in FIG. 113(1), when the error display is a blinking display in which the operation time Ton is executed and the operation is stopped (hidden) for the non-execution time Toff, the error display is concealed. 5 is an example of a timing chart when the execution time TP of is longer than the execution time Ton of the error display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 113(1), if the execution timing of the error display and the execution timing of the effect for concealing the error display are synchronized with each other, the entire error display of the execution time Ton of one time is entirely. Since it is hidden, the longest continuous time during which the observer (player, etc.) cannot visually recognize the error display becomes a considerably long time T0 (T0=Ton+2×Toff).

However, as shown in FIG. 113(2), if the execution time of the effect for hiding the error display is less than the lighting display time of the error display (TP<Ton), as shown in FIG. 113(2), once. The entire execution time Ton of the error display is not hidden in time, and the longest continuous time during which the error display cannot be visually recognized by the observer becomes a time T1 (T1<Ton+Toff) which is significantly shorter than T0. In other words, even if the effect of concealing the error display is performed, at least part of the period during which the error display is performed, the error display is surely made without being hindered by this effect, and the longest continuous time during which the error display cannot be visually recognized. Remarkably reduced.

Further, when the error display is performed by blinking, as shown in FIG. 113(3), the execution timing of the effect for concealing the error display is not synchronized with the execution timing of the error display. A configuration may be adopted in which the execution timing of error display is adjusted by inserting an offset ΔT (shift time).

The operation shown in FIG. 113(3) is, for example, in the control process in the effect control device 300 that performs the error display (blinking display) shown in FIG. 113(1), the execution period of the error display and the execution of the effect for concealing the error display are performed. Whether or not the periods overlap (at the same time) is determined in each cycle in advance, and when it is determined that the periods overlap, the timing to start the error display is delayed by an offset ΔT with respect to the overlapping period. ..

Note that, unlike the mode shown in FIG. 113(3), the execution timing of the effect may be adjusted by inserting a temporal offset ΔT in the effect that hides the error display. Further, in the control process for inserting the offset ΔT in this way, whether the execution time TP of the effect is the same as the execution time Ton of the error display, or the execution time TP of the effect is the execution time of the error display as shown in FIG. 113(1). The configuration may be performed only when it is longer than Ton (that is, when TP≧Ton).

In any case, by inserting the offset ΔT as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 113(3), the error display of one execution time Ton is not entirely concealed in time, and the observation is not performed. The longest continuous time during which the person cannot visually recognize the error display is a time T2 which is significantly shorter than T0. In other words, even if the effect of concealing the error display is performed, at least part of the period during which the error display is performed, the error display is surely made without being hindered by this effect, and the longest continuous time during which the error display cannot be visually recognized. Remarkably reduced.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including the first to fifth modifications) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a main control unit (game control unit; game control device 100) that performs game control such as controlling the progress of a game, and identification information for effect (decorative special drawing, for example, the large symbol described above). A display means (display device 41) for playing a variable display game in which the group 801) is variably displayed, and a rendering means (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, second) including the display means based on a command (command) from the main control means. Sub effect control means (effect control means; effect control device 300) for performing effect control for controlling the effect devices 705L and 705R, the third effect device 706, and the like). The slave control means can execute an error display for notifying an error occurring in the game machine 10 based on a command or an error determination by the slave control means, and the error display can be performed as an effect by the effect means. It is possible to execute a specific effect of hiding at least a part (for example, a strong notice effect of operating a movable accessory 706 to hide the error display, or a strong notice effect of hiding the error display by the light guide plates 831 and 832). It includes a control unit (CPU311). As the error display, the control unit displays, for example, an error notification image (for example, error notification image 807) that is an image for notifying an error on the display device, for example, and the specific effect hides at least a part of the error notification image. The error display and the specific effect may be performed by a display means different from the display means for playing the variable display game.

(2) Sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b) is further provided, and the control unit in (1) can output an error notification sound for notifying an error occurring in the gaming machine by the sound output means, When the specific effect includes the sound output for effect, the error notification sound is output with priority over the sound output for the effect.

(3) The control unit of (1) actuates the movable accessory (the second board effect device 705L, 705R or the third board effect device 706, or the light guide plates 831 and 832 when movable) as the specific effect. Then, at least a part of the display area of the display means (at least a part of the error notification image) is hidden by the movable accessory, and a background image (for example, effect images 816 and 817) corresponding to the movable accessory as an effect image in the specific effect. ) Can be displayed, and the display priority of the background image is set lower than that of the error notification image. That is, the activated movable accessory conceals the error notification image in the portion overlapping the error notification image, and the background image does not hide the error notification image even in the portion overlapping the error notification image (the error notification image is displayed so as to be on the front side). To set.

(4) The control unit of (1) has a first effect corresponding to the specific effect (for example, a strong notice effect) and a second effect not corresponding to the specific effect (for example, a weak notice effect) as effects by the effect means. Can be executed, and the error notification image is not hidden in the second effect (for example, when the error notification is performed, even if the advance effect for operating the movable accessory is generated, the movable accessory is moved to the predetermined position. Change to the production that does not work). Further, the error notification sound for notifying an error (weak error and strong error) is output with priority over the sound output for the effects as the first effect and the second effect.

(5) The control unit of (1) is an auxiliary image that is hidden by the activated movable accessory when performing an effect that the movable accessory is operated as a specific effect, and is visually recognized when the movable accessory does not operate. A possible auxiliary image (for example, auxiliary images 826L and 826R, auxiliary image 827, auxiliary image 829, or part of effect image 816) is displayed on the display means.

(6) The auxiliary image of (5) visually recognizes that the movable accessory does not perform a predetermined action (a malfunction of the movable accessory or a change to an effect in which the movable accessory does not move to a predetermined position). Includes information (characters or graphics) to be used.

(7) The production means of (1) further includes sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b) and movable production means (for example, board production device 44), and the control unit is generated by the game machine. It is possible to output an error notification sound for notifying an error that is present by the sound output means, and when the specific effect includes the effect sound output, the error notification sound is output with priority over the effect sound output. The display means displays an effect display (effect display) related to the movable operation regardless of whether or not the movable effect means performs the normal movable operation.

In addition, when the movable production means cannot perform a normal movable operation, that is, when the movable production means is defective, the actuator (motor or solenoid) of the movable production means is broken, a required connector is disconnected or is not properly connected, and wiring is There is a wire breakage or mechanical mechanism failure.

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes a production means including a display means (display device 41) and a movable production means (for example, a board production device 44), and a control means for controlling the production means (production control means; production control device 300). ) And. The control means causes the display means to display an effect display (effect display) related to the movable operation regardless of whether or not the movable effect means performs a normal movable operation.

[Calculation and display of base]
Here, the calculation and display of the base as the game performance performed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. Here, the base is the ball output rate in the normal game state. Here, the normal game state is a state that is neither a time saving state nor a big hit game state (big hit state), and more generally, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is a normal probability state (low probability). State) is a state. The ball payout rate is the number of balls paid out per 100 out balls. Therefore, when the number of out balls in the normal game state is Nout and the number of payout balls in the normal game state is Nsafe, the base B is calculated by the formula B=(Nsafe÷Nout)×100. The number of out balls is the number of balls launched into the game area and entered the out port or the winning opening (for example, the number of balls counted based on the above-mentioned out ball detection switch signal), and is the number of out balls or simply. It may also be called out. Further, the number of payout balls is the number of prize balls paid out for winning, and may be referred to as the number of payout balls, the number of safe balls, or simply safe.

As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the game control device 100 of the gaming machine 10 is provided with the state display device 135. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a status display device 135 which is a display means of the base and a storage area for the base. FIG. 114(1) shows the display portion of the status display device 135, and FIG. 114(2) is for the base. Shows the storage area of. Further, FIG. 115 shows a display example by the state display device 135.

As shown in FIG. 114(1), the status display device 135 is composed of four-segment seven-segment LEDs arranged side by side, and a dot point (small circular light emission) is located at the lower right of each seven-segment LED. Section) is provided. Regarding the display of the base, of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, the left 2-digit is an identification segment that displays the measurement time of the base (whether it is being measured or not, and the measurement order). Is a ratio segment that displays the base value. As shown in FIG. 115, the 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 actually displays “B” in the form of a lowercase letter “b”.

The game control device 100 (specifically, the CPU 111A which is the control unit) sets a storage area for the base as shown in FIG. 114(2) in the RWM such as the RAM 111C, and calculates the base and displays the base. use. That is, the game control device 100 sets, as the base calculation storage area, “the number of out balls” that stores the cumulative value of the number of out balls and “the number of payout balls” that stores the cumulative value of the number of paid out balls. Further, “base (BL)”, “base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, and “base (B3)” are set as the base storage area for storing the calculated value of the base.

Here, "base (BL)" is an area for storing the base being measured, "base (B1)" is an area for storing the base measured one time before, and "base (B2)" is 2 This is an area for storing the base measured three times before, and "base (B3)" is an area for storing the base measured three times before. That is, it is an area for storing the measurement value (calculated value) of the oldest base among the storage areas in which “base (B3)” is set.

The above-mentioned stored values in the base calculation storage area and the base storage area are backed up and stored when the power is turned off, and when the RAM is cleared (power is turned on by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112) except when the RWM is abnormal. It is desirable that the memory is retained and not cleared to zero at the time.

The game control device 100 uses the state display device 135 except when the setting content of the probability setting (any one of five levels) is displayed on the state display device 135 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described above. The base is displayed. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the mode in which the setting content of the probability setting is displayed by the probability setting value display device 136 has been described. However, the probability setting value display device 136 may be deleted, and the state display device 135 may also function as a probability setting value display device. In that case, the state display device 135 displays the above-mentioned setting contents in each of the above. In the other modes, the status display device 135 displays the base in other cases.

The game control device 100 calculates and displays the base as follows, for example. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 first blinks all the segments (including dot points) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

After that, the game control device 100 displays the BL display state as shown in FIG. 115(1), the B1 display state as shown in FIG. 115(2), the B2 display state as shown in FIG. 115(3), and the FIG. 115( The operation of maintaining the B3 display state as shown in 4) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is repeatedly executed. That is, in the steady state after the power is turned on, the BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B2 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B3 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and then The BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and the four states are sequentially switched and repeated.

Here, in the BL display state, the game control device 100 displays “bL” (BL) indicating that the base measurement time is being measured (this time) in the identification segment, and the base storage area “base” in the ratio segment. (BL)” value (or "- -") is displayed. Further, in the B1 display state, the game control device 100 displays “b1” (B1) indicating that the base measurement time is one time before in the identification segment, and the ratio storage segment “base (B1)”. Value (or "- -") is displayed. Further, in the B2 display state, the game control device 100 displays “b2” (B2) indicating that the base measurement time is two times before in the identification segment, and the base storage area “base (B2)” in the ratio segment. Value (or "- -") is displayed. Further, in the B3 display state, the game control device 100 displays “b3” (B3) indicating that the base measurement time is three times before in the identification segment, and the base storage area “base (B3)” in the ratio segment. Value (or "- -") is displayed.

On the other hand, in order to calculate the base, the game control device 100, after starting, in the normal game state, for example, each time an out ball is detected (that is, every time an out ball detection switch signal is output), the " The stored value of "number of out balls" is increased by a value corresponding to the number of detected out balls, and each time there is a prize in the winning opening of the game ball in the normal game state (or a prize ball is paid out based on the prize). For each), the stored value of the “number of payout balls” in the storage area for base calculation is generated (or it may be the number of award balls actually paid out detected based on the signal from the payout control device 200). Increase the value by In addition, the game control device 100 calculates the base B by the above-described formula every time the stored value of the “out ball number” or the “payout ball number” in the base calculation storage area changes, and the calculated result is calculated as the base B value. The latest value is overwritten on "base (BL)" in the base storage area.

It should be noted that, when the stored value of the “out sphere number” in the base calculation storage area reaches a prescribed number of measurements (for example, 60000), the game control device 100 determines that one measurement has ended, and performs the following measurement. It is configured to perform processing at the end. In the process at the end of this measurement, the value of the base storage area "base (B2)" at that time is overwritten on the base storage area "base (B3)", and the base storage area "base (B1)" at that time is overwritten. Value of the base storage area "base (B2)" is overwritten, the value of the base storage area "base (BL)" at that time is overwritten on the base storage area "base (B1)", and The stored values of the “out ball number” and the “payout ball number” in the base calculation storage area are cleared and reset to zero. As a result, the base value up to three times before and the base value currently being measured are always stored.

Then, when the game control apparatus 100 is turned on for the first time (the storage value of the base calculation storage area “out sphere number is zero”), the storage value of the base calculation storage area “out sphere number” is a predetermined calculation start number (for example, In a period A that is less than a predetermined number (less than 300 pieces), in each display state, characters indicating a base measurement time such as “bL”, “b1”... Are blinked in the identification segment, and the ratio segment is displayed in FIG. As shown in (), "- -" (a state in which only the central, horizontally long segment is made to emit light) is displayed to notify that it is in an unmeasured state.

Next, when the stored value of the base calculation storage area “number of out balls” reaches a predetermined calculation start number (for example, a predetermined number less than 300), the game control device 100 sets the base calculation storage area and the base storage area. Initialize (clear to zero) and start the first measurement.

Then, the game control device 100, in the period B from the start of the first measurement until the storage value of the base calculation storage area “out sphere number” reaches the measurement number (for example, 60000), the identification segment in the BL display state. "BL" is displayed blinking or lit, and in the ratio segment, the value of the base storage area "base (BL)" is displayed. Further, in the period B, in other display states (B1 to B3 display states), characters indicating the base measurement time such as "b1"... Are blinked in the identification segment, and "- -" is displayed in the ratio segment. Notify that it is in an unmeasured state.

In addition, the display of "bL" in the identification segment in the BL display state is a blinking display when the stored value of the base calculation storage area "out sphere number" is less than the measured number, and the base calculation storage area "out" is displayed. When the stored value of "number of balls" reaches the number of measurements, the display is turned on. Further, the blinking period of the blinking display in the identification segment or the ratio segment is, for example, a 0.6 second period, of which, for example, 0.3 seconds for lighting and 0.3 seconds for extinguishing. Further, when the stored value of the “number of out balls” reaches the measured number (for example, 60000) and the period B ends, the above-described processing at the time of ending the measurement is performed, and the next second measurement is started.

After that, the game control device 100, like the period B in which the first measurement is performed, the period C in which the second measurement is performed, the period D in which the third measurement is performed, the period E in which the fourth measurement is performed,... To measure continuously. Since the calculated values of the base for the past three times are stored after the time when the third measurement is completed, the base measurement time such as “b1”... Is displayed in the identification segment in all the B1 to B3 display states. The indicated character is lit and displayed, and the value of the corresponding base storage area (one of "base (B1)", "base (B2)", and "base (B3)") is displayed in the ratio segment.

115(1) to 115(4) show an example of specific display in each display state in the period D after the second measurement is completed. In this case, since there is no measurement result three times before, in FIG. 115(4) which is a specific example of the B3 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “−−” (display indicating the unmeasured state).

Further, in FIG. 115(1), which is a specific example of the BL display state, the display of the ratio segment is “58 ”, which indicates that the real-time base value currently being measured is 58. Further, in FIG. 115(2), which is a specific example of the B1 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “6 7 ”, and the base value for the specified number of measurements measured one time before is 67. It is shown that. Further, in FIG. 115(3) which is a specific example of the B2 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “49 ”, and the base value is 49 with respect to the specified number of measurements measured two times before. It is shown that. If the value of the base is 100 or more, 100 or more by setting the display of the ratio segment to "9. 9" (display the number 99 in the ratio segment and turn on the dot point of the last digit). Is notified.

Further, the base value is generally in the normal range of, for example, about 25 to 35, and it is abnormal if it is smaller than this range or larger than this range, and this abnormality is called base abnormality. The display example of FIG. 115 described above shows, as an example, a state in which the measurement results of the base abnormality exceeding the normal range are continuous, and in the normal case, the identification segment has a numerical value within the normal range of about 25 to 35. Is displayed.

The game control device 100, for example, the measurement values of the past three times stored in the base storage area (“base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, and “base (B3)”) (the above B1 When all the display values of the ratio seg in the B3 display state are out of the normal range and are abnormal, it is determined that a base abnormality has occurred, and a signal indicating that the base abnormality has occurred is output to an external device such as a game hall internal management device. (Hall computer)

The signal (information) indicating this base abnormality is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a command, for example, and the display region of the display device 41 is informed of this base abnormality under the control of the effect control device 300 which receives this signal. An image (for example, an image corresponding to the error notification image 807) may be displayed. Further, since this base abnormality may occur when an illegal act is performed, it is desirable to set the above-mentioned strong error.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the measured value of the base is stored and displayed up to the past 3 times, but the number of the base storage areas is increased to store and display the past 4 times or more. It may be configured to be used. In addition, although the storage area for base calculation is set only for the one being measured, it is possible to provide a storage area for storing the number of out balls and the number of payout balls, which are the basis for calculating the past measured values. Good.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment (including modified examples) will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 122. The effect control device 300 in the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment determines a detailed effect mode within the range of the change pattern specified by the game control device 100 (for example, within the change time specified by the game control device 100). There is. At this time, the effect control device 300 receives the variation pattern command from the game control device 100 and determines the detailed effect mode by lottery. Therefore, even if the game control device 100 transmits the same variation pattern command, the effect control device 300 does not always execute the same effect mode.

Such detailed determination of the rendering mode by lottery makes it difficult to perform the desired rendering operation from the outside and requires a large number of man-hours in the development process. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can receive the detailed change pattern command in addition to the change pattern command, so that the detailed effect mode can be determined by the detailed change pattern command without using the lottery. ing. Since the production control device 300 sends the detailed variation pattern command to the game control device 100, the production control device 300 can determine a detailed production mode by lottery when the detailed variation pattern command is not received.

First, the command system of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. First, a command system between the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of the command system according to the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 can determine a variation pattern for instructing an outline of the effect by random number lottery, and notify the effect pattern number to the effect control device 300 by a variation pattern command (command).

The effect control device 300 acquires a detailed variation pattern number based on a random number lottery within the range of the outline of the effect instructed by the game control device 100. At this time, the effect control device 300 determines the detailed variation pattern command from the result of the random number lottery, and acquires the detailed variation pattern number corresponding to the detailed variation pattern command (command).

The effect control device 300 determines a detailed effect corresponding to the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and controls the effect device 850 with the determined effect content. The production device 850 is a general term for convenience of various devices related to game production. Specifically, the effect device 850 includes a display device 41, a board decoration device 46, a frame decoration device 18, a board effect device 44, speakers 19a, 19b, and the like.

Thereby, the effect control device 300 can control the effect device 850 in the effect mode within the range instructed by the game control device 100. Further, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the processing load on the game control device 100 while controlling the rendering device 850 in various rendering modes.

Next, a command system between the game control device 100 and the test device 851 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the command system according to the sixth embodiment. The test device 851 can send an arbitrary fluctuation pattern command and an arbitrary detailed fluctuation pattern command to notify the effect control device 300.

The test device 851 can test the operation of the effect control device 300, and is, for example, a computer having a debugger function, an ICE (In-Circuit Emulator) function, or the like. The test device 851 can be connected to the production control device 300 instead of the game control device 100 or in addition to the game control device 100 in the development environment. The test device 851 is not limited to the development environment and may be used in the installation environment of the game machine 10 in the game arcade. Further, the test apparatus 851 is not limited to the one used for the test use, but may be used for the development use, the verification use, and other uses.

The production control device 300 acquires the detailed fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the detailed fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation pattern number (fluctuation pattern command) and the detailed fluctuation pattern command acquired from the test device 851.

The effect control device 300 determines a detailed effect corresponding to the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and controls the effect device 850 with the determined effect content.
As a result, the effect control device 300 can control the effect device 850 in the effect mode as instructed by the test device 851. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can cause the rendering device 850 to perform a desired rendering operation from the outside.

As described above, the effect control device 300 can follow the instruction from the outside (the test device 851) by receiving the detailed change pattern command until the details in which the effect contents are not clarified only by the change pattern command are received. it can. Further, the effect control device 300 can determine by itself (random number lottery) up to the details where the effect content is not clarified only by the variation pattern command, without receiving the detailed variation pattern command.

In addition, the effect control device 300 can catch a variation pattern command that can be acquired only from the outside as an external command in one aspect, and can capture a detailed variation pattern command that can be generated internally as an internal command in one aspect. Further, the effect control device 300 can capture the variation pattern command that defines the outline of the effect as an outline command on one side, and can capture the detailed variation pattern command that defines the details of the effect as a detailed command on one side. .. In addition, the production control device 300 can catch the variation pattern command used in the operating environment of the game hall as a command for actual operation in one aspect, and is used in the non-operating environment of the game hall (for example, under the test environment). The detailed variation pattern command that is generated can be regarded as a non-actual operation command (test command) in one aspect.

Next, the variation command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variable-time command according to the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 transmits a fluctuation command consisting of a group of commands to the effect control device 300 at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure game. For example, if the special figure game is a special figure 1 game, the game control device 100 sets a variable time command in the special figure 1 game process (see FIG. 22) and transmits it to the effect control device 300. If the special figure game is the special figure 2 game, the game control device 100 sets a variation time command in the special figure 2 game process (see FIG. 23) and transmits it to the effect control device 300.

The command at fluctuation (fluctuation system command) indicates a command transmitted by the game control device 100 at the start of fluctuation of the special figure game. First, the game control device 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “1” (command name “decorative design designation”). The command name "decorative design designation" includes MODE "85H" and any of ACTION "11H" to ACTION "7FH" depending on the decorative design.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “2” (command name “variation pattern designation”). The command name "variation pattern designation" includes any one of MODE "C0H" to MODE "D2H" and one of ACTION "01H" to ACTION "7FH" corresponding to each variation pattern. Further, the command name "variation pattern designation" may include any of ACTION "01H" to ACTION "7FH", followed by any of OPTION "FFF000H" to OPTION "FFF7FFH" capable of designating detailed effects. it can.

From the viewpoint of reducing the processing load, the game control device 100 only targets MODE and ACTION in the command name “variable pattern designation”, and does not target OPTION. The option in the command name “variable pattern designation” is, for example, the transmission target of the test apparatus 851.

MODE is a 1-byte command that sets the most significant bit to “1”, and ACTION is a 1-byte command that sets the most significant bit to “0”. Thereby, production control device 300 can determine whether the command received by the most significant bit is MODE or ACTION. Further, OPTION is a 3-byte command, and the most significant bit of the first byte and the most significant bit of the second byte are set to "1". As a result, the effect control device 300 negates the combination of MODE and ACTION from the most significant bit “1” of the first byte and the most significant bit “1” of the second byte of the received command, and receives the command. Is an option.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “3” (command name “special figure 1 number of reservations”). The command name “special figure 1 number of reservations” includes MODE “A1H” and any of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to no reservation to number 4 of reservations.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “4” (command name “special figure 2 hold number”). The command name “special figure 2 number of reservations” includes MODE “A2H” and any of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to no reservation to number of reservations 4.

Here, the distribution table to be referred to when the effect control device 300 receives a command in the transmission order “2” (command name “variation pattern designation”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating an example of the distribution table according to the sixth embodiment (No. 1). FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table according to the sixth embodiment (No. 2).

If the received command is any of MODE “C0H” to MODE “D2H”, production control device 300 can determine that the command corresponds to the command name “variation pattern designation”. For example, effect control device 300 can determine that distribution table 852 is a reference candidate when MODE “C0H” is received. The distribution table 852 is a general term for a group of distribution tables 852a, 852b, 852c,..., 852n that are reference candidates.

If the received command is any of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “7FH”, production control device 300 can uniquely identify a particular distribution table to be referenced from distribution table 852. For example, production control device 300 specifies the distribution table (variation pattern command: 01H) 852a as a specific distribution table to be referenced when the received command is ACTION “01H”.

The distribution table 852a defines the correspondence relationship between the random selection random number value and the detailed variation pattern command. The distribution table 852a shows that the possible range of the lottery random number value is from “0” to “999”. The random number value may be a pseudo random number extracted from a high speed counter or the like as long as it has a certain degree of randomness. Further, the distribution table 852a indicates that there are six detailed variation pattern commands from "FFFA01H" to "FFFA06H" that can be selected when the ACTION "01H" (variation pattern command: 01H) is received.

For example, the detailed fluctuation pattern command “FFFA01H” is a command selected with a probability of 800/1000, and the detailed fluctuation pattern command “FFFA02H” is a command selected with a probability of 50/1000. “FFFA03H” is a command selected with a probability of 50/1000, detailed fluctuation pattern command “FFFA04H” is a command selected with a probability of 50/1000, and detailed fluctuation pattern command “FFFA05H” is 25 The detailed variation pattern command “FFFA06H” is a command selected with a probability of /1000, and is selected with a probability of 25/1000.

The production control device 300 refers to the relationship table using the detailed variation pattern command as a key to obtain the detailed variation pattern number. Here, the relationship table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship table according to the sixth embodiment.

The relationship table 853 is a table that defines the correspondence relationship between the detailed fluctuation pattern command and the detailed fluctuation pattern number. The detailed fluctuation pattern command corresponds to a detailed fluctuation mode (effect mode). For example, the detailed fluctuation pattern command “FFFA01H” corresponds to the detailed fluctuation pattern number “001001”, and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 as a detailed fluctuation mode according to the detailed fluctuation pattern number “001001”. To do. The detailed fluctuation pattern command “FFFA02H” corresponds to the detailed fluctuation pattern number “001002”, and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 by a left slip fluctuation as a detailed fluctuation mode according to the detailed fluctuation pattern number “001002”. .. The detailed fluctuation pattern command "FFFA03H" corresponds to the detailed fluctuation pattern number "001003", and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 by right slip variation as a detailed variation mode according to the detailed variation pattern number "001003". .. The detailed fluctuation pattern command “FFFA04H” corresponds to the detailed fluctuation pattern number “001004”, and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 by the inclining fluctuation as a detailed change mode according to the detailed fluctuation pattern number “001004”. .. The detailed fluctuation pattern command “FFFA05H” corresponds to the detailed fluctuation pattern number “001005”, and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 by a special fluctuation as a detailed fluctuation mode according to the detailed fluctuation pattern number “001005”. The detailed fluctuation pattern command “FFFA06H” corresponds to the detailed fluctuation pattern number “001006”, and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 by the short reach fluctuation as a detailed fluctuation mode according to the detailed fluctuation pattern number “001006”. ..

The related table 853 is not limited to the distribution table 852a, but includes detailed fluctuation pattern commands specified in other distribution tables such as the distribution tables 852b and 852c, and all the details set in the effect device 850. It may specify the correspondence with the fluctuation pattern number.

The distribution table 852 and the relationship table 853 are stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300.
Next, the effect distribution processing executed by the effect control device 300 when receiving the command (command name “change pattern designation”) in the transmission order “2” of the change time commands (change command) will be described with reference to FIG. 122. To do. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect distribution process of the sixth embodiment. The effect distribution process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D56 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). The control unit executes the effect allocation process when the received MODE is within the range of “C0H” to “D2H”.

[Step D311] The control unit acquires the command MODE and the command ACTION.
[Step D312] The control unit determines whether or not the command OPTION has been received. Normally, the effect control device 300 does not include the command OPTION in the received command when the command is received from the game control device 100, but in the received command when the command is received from the test device 851. It may include the command OPTION. The control unit proceeds to step D313 when the command OPTION is not received, and proceeds to step D315 when the command OPTION is received.

[Step D313] The control unit selects the distribution table 852 based on the command MODE and the command ACTION.
[Step D314] The control unit determines and acquires a detailed variation pattern command by random number lottery using the selected distribution table 852. As a result, the effect control device 300 randomly acquires the detailed variation pattern command when the command optION is not received from the game control device 100.

[Step D315] The control unit acquires the command ACTION. Thereby, the effect control device 300 acquires the detailed variation pattern command designated by the test device 851 when the command OPTION is received from the test device 851.

[Step D316] The control unit refers to the relationship table 853 and acquires the detailed fluctuation pattern number using the detailed fluctuation pattern command as a key. Thereby, the production control device 300 can acquire the detailed variation pattern number regardless of whether or not the command OPTION has been received.

[Step D317] The control unit executes an effect pattern setting process for setting a specific effect pattern based on the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and ends the effect allocation process.
In the gaming machine 10 as described above, the details of the effect control performed by the effect control device 300 can be designated externally, and the development load of the program of the effect control device 300 can be reduced. Further, the gaming machine 10 does not increase the control load on the game control apparatus 100 even if the details of the effect control performed by the effect control apparatus 300 can be designated from the outside.

For example, when the effect control device 300 wants the effect control device 300 to execute effect control corresponding to the detailed variation pattern number “001006”, the game control device 100 specifies the command MODE and the command ACTION, and causes the effect control device 300 to display the distribution table 852a. One of the detailed variations defined can be randomly selected. However, production control device 300 is not guaranteed by how many trials detailed variation pattern number “001006” can be selected. The number of trials increases as the effect contents become more complicated and the options defined in the distribution table 852a increase. On the other hand, when the production control device 300 receives a command from the test device 851, the command MODE, the command ACTION, and the command OPTION are designated and selected from among the detailed variation modes defined in the desired distribution table 852a. One can be identified and selected. The production control device 300 as described above improves workability in production control program development and debug work.

[Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. The effect control device 300 of the sixth embodiment was able to specify a detailed variation mode from the variation pattern designation command including one 3-byte INPUT, but the effect control of the first modification of the sixth embodiment The device 300 differs in that a detailed variation mode can be specified from a variation pattern specification command including two or more 3-byte ACTIONs. First, the detailed process of determining the variation mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of the effect distribution of the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 is not limited to the case where the variation pattern command is received once and the distribution table 852 is used only once, and the distribution table 852 is used twice to perform a more complicated effect. The above may be done. For example, the performance control device 300 prepares a distribution table set when the distribution is performed twice or more. The distribution table set includes a distribution table for each distribution point that performs distribution. When the production control device 300 receives a variation pattern command including MODE “C1H” and ACTION “01H”, the production control device 300 includes five distribution tables (one form of the distribution table 852) of the distribution tables FT1 to FT5. The minute table set is referred to to determine the detailed effect of the first half fluctuation.

The production control device 300 receives the variation pattern command including the OPTION corresponding to the number of distribution points. For example, when the production control device 300 receives a variation pattern command including OPTION “FFFA11H”, OPTION “FFFA22H”, and OPTION “FFFA41H”, it refers to the distribution table FT1 at the first distribution point and then selects OPTION. The detailed variation pattern 11 (detailed variation pattern number is simply written) is selected according to "FFFA11H". Next, the production control device 300 refers to the distribution table FT2 at the distribution point corresponding to the detailed fluctuation pattern 11, and selects the detailed fluctuation pattern 22 (detailed fluctuation pattern number is abbreviated) according to OPTION “FFFA22H”. .. Further, the effect control device 300 refers to the distribution table FT4 at the distribution point corresponding to the detailed variation pattern 22 and selects the detailed variation pattern 41 (detailed variation pattern number is abbreviated) according to the OPTION “FFFA41H”. Then, the effect control device 300 proceeds to the selection of the second half effect (second half A) corresponding to the detailed variation pattern 41. In addition, the effect control device 300 can select the detailed effect of the latter half variation (second half A) in the same manner as the first half variation. Even in this case, the effect control device 300 can receive the variation pattern command including the OPTION corresponding to the number of distribution points in the latter half variation.

In this way, the effect control device 300 receives the variation pattern command including the OPTION corresponding to the number of distribution points even if a more complicated effect is performed, and thus the detailed control is performed in response to the complicated effect. Can be specified.

If the variation pattern command can include two or more options, a termination command that can specify the last option may be set. For example, with the OPTION "FFFFFFH" as a dummy command, the effect control device 300 may determine that there is no further OPTION reception by receiving the OPTION "FFFFFFH".

If the variation pattern command can include two or more OPTIONS, the OPTIONS may be connected by a predetermined command. For example, with “3AH” as the special command, the effect control device 300 determines that the additional command is received by receiving the special command “3AH” after receiving the option, and the special control “3AH” is received. It may be possible to determine that the additional OPTION is not received by not receiving the OPTION. Since the special command “3AH” means the character “;” in the ASCII code, the test apparatus 851 can easily generate the variation pattern command from the character string including two or more OPTIONs connected by the character “;”. it can.

Further, when the variation pattern command can include two or more OPTIONS, it is assumed that the OPTIONS are connected by a predetermined command, but the OPTION is connected by a predetermined bit string, an arbitrary data pattern such as a predetermined bit length, or the like. The end may be determined.

Next, the effect distribution process of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect distribution process of the first modification of the sixth embodiment. The effect distribution process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D56 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). The control unit executes the effect allocation process when the received MODE is within the range of “C0H” to “D2H”.

[Step D321] The control unit acquires a command MODE and a command ACTION.
[Step D322] The control unit determines whether or not the command OPTION has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D323 when the command OPTION has not been received, and proceeds to step D326 when the command OPTION has been received.

[Step D323] The control unit selects the distribution table set based on the command MODE and the command ACTION.
[Step D324] The control unit determines and acquires a detailed variation pattern command by random number selection using the first distribution table from the selected distribution table set.

[Step D325] The control unit determines whether or not the distribution ends, whether or not there is a distribution point corresponding to the selected detailed variation pattern command. The control unit proceeds to step D323 when the distribution is not ended (there is a distribution point), and proceeds to step D328 when the distribution is completed (there is no distribution point).

[Step D326] The control unit acquires one command OPTION.
[Step D327] The control unit determines whether or not all commands OPTION have been acquired. The control unit proceeds to step D326 when not all command options have been acquired, and proceeds to step D328 when all command options have been acquired.

[Step D328] The control unit refers to the relationship table 853 and acquires the detailed fluctuation pattern number using the detailed fluctuation pattern command as a key. As a result, the effect control device 300 can acquire the detailed variation pattern number regardless of whether or not the command OPTION has been received, and regardless of the number of distribution points.

[Step D329] The control unit executes an effect pattern setting process for setting a specific effect pattern based on the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and ends the effect distribution process.
In the gaming machine 10 as described above, the details of the effect control performed by the effect control device 300 can be designated externally, and the development load of the program of the effect control device 300 can be reduced. Further, the gaming machine 10 does not increase the control load on the game control apparatus 100 even if the details of the effect control performed by the effect control apparatus 300 can be designated from the outside.

It should be noted that some of the options may specify the detailed variation pattern command selection by random number lottery without corresponding to the detailed variation pattern command. In this case, the effect control device 300 may determine for each distribution point whether to acquire the detailed fluctuation pattern command by the command OPTION or the random fluctuation lottery. As a result, the effect control device 300 selects the detailed variation pattern command designated by OPTION for the sorting tables FT1 to FT4 among the sorting tables FT1 to FT5, and the detailed variation pattern determined by random number lottery for the sorting table FT5. You can select the command. Such a gaming machine 10 contributes to improvement in development efficiency of the effect control device 300.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described sixth embodiment (including modified examples) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing effect control based on an external command. The effect control means includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321) and a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit defines the distribution of the internal command (detailed variation pattern command (OPTION)) with the first table data (for example, the distribution table), and the second table that defines the correspondence between the internal command and the effect pattern. Table data (for example, a relation table) is stored. When the external command (fluctuation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit performs the distribution lottery of the internal command using the first table data, and uses the distributed internal command and the second table data. When the external command includes an internal command, the effect pattern (detailed variation pattern number) is determined using the internal command included in the external command and the second table data.

(2) The gaming machine 10 is provided with a main control unit (game control device 100) for performing game control, and a subordinate control unit (production control device 300) capable of performing production control based on an external command from the main control unit. .. The sub control unit includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321) and a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit defines the distribution of the internal command (detailed variation pattern command (OPTION)) with the first table data (for example, the distribution table), and the second table that defines the correspondence between the internal command and the effect pattern. Table data (for example, a relation table) is stored. When the external command (fluctuation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit performs the distribution lottery of the internal command using the first table data, and uses the distributed internal command and the second table data. When the external command includes the internal command, the effect pattern is determined using the internal command included in the external command and the second table data.

(3) The gaming machine 10 includes main control means (game control device 100) for performing game control, and slave control means (production control device 300) capable of executing effect control based on an external command from the main control means. .. The sub control unit includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321) and a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit defines the distribution of the internal command (detailed variation pattern command (OPTION)) with the first table data (for example, the distribution table), and the second table that defines the correspondence between the internal command and the effect pattern. Table data (for example, a relation table) is stored. When the external command (fluctuation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit performs the distribution lottery of the internal command using the first table data, and uses the distributed internal command and the second table data. And the first internal command included in the external command when the external command includes the first internal command and does not include the connection command (for example, the special command “3AH”). A second pattern is determined using the second table data, and when the external command includes the first internal command and the connection command, the second internal command and the second table following the first internal command and the connection command. An effect pattern is determined using the data and.

(4) The gaming machine 10 is provided with an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing effect control based on an external command. The effect control means includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321) and a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit defines the distribution of the internal command (detailed variation pattern command (OPTION)) with the first table data (for example, the distribution table), and the second table that defines the correspondence between the internal command and the effect pattern. Table data (for example, a relation table) is stored. When the external command (fluctuation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit performs a sorting lottery of the internal command by using the first table data, and outputs the distributed internal command and the second table data. When the effect pattern (detailed variation pattern number) is determined using the external command and the external command includes the first internal command and does not include the connection command (for example, the special command “3AH”), the first internal command included in the external command. The effect pattern is determined using the command and the second table data, and when the external command includes the first internal command and the connection command, the second internal command and the second internal command following the first internal command and the connection command. The effect pattern is determined using the table data of No. 2.

(5) The control unit of (4) determines the presence or absence of the connection command after receiving (acquiring) the first internal command, and receives (acquires) the second internal command when determining that there is the connection command. It is assumed that the second internal command is not received (acquired) when it is determined that there is no connection command.

(6) The control unit of (4) receives (acquires) the connection command as an independent command different from the internal command.
(7) The connection command of (4) is a data pattern corresponding to a predetermined character string of one or more characters.

(8) The connection command of (4) is a predetermined data pattern included in the first internal command.
[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. The game machine 10 of the seventh embodiment enables a required operation by the game hall staff when the front frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 in the installation environment in the game hall. First, the required operating environment of the game machine 10 by the game hall staff will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a perspective view (No. 1) showing an example of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. The gaming machines 10 of the first to sixth embodiments have the same configuration.

FIG. 125 shows how the game machine 10 opens the front frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. The game machine 10 has an outer frame 11 fixed to a game hall facility generally called an island, and a front frame 12 is opened so that maintenance work can be performed by a staff member. Therefore, the game machine 10 is excellent in workability in the installation environment on the open side rather than the shaft support side that pivotally supports the front frame 12 on the outer frame 11. In particular, in recent game machines, since the amount of protrusion of the front side constituent members (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the upper plate 21) of the front frame 12 is large, the front frame 12 is used for the game hall equipment (for example, the calling lamp). Or, it may interfere with the card unit or the like, and the opening amount of the front frame 12 may be limited.

The required operations by the amusement park staff include, for example, a set value confirmation operation, a set value change operation, an operation operation including a RAM clear operation, and a maintenance operation including a wiring connection confirmation operation.

The front frame 12 includes a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, a payout control device 200, and a power supply device 400 on the back side of the front frame 12. Further, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are provided on the back surface side of the game board 30.

The game control device 100 includes a status display device 135, a probability setting value display device 136, a setting value change switch 126, a setting key switch 127, and a RAM initialization switch 112 facing the back side of the front frame 12.

The game machine 10 facilitates the operation operation by the game hall staff by opening the front frame 12 in the installation environment of the game hall. In other words, the game machine 10 makes the operation difficult when the front frame 12 is not opened in the installation environment of the game hall, for example, when the player is playing a game.

By accepting the operation of the setting key switch 127, the game machine 10 makes it possible to confirm the set value by the probability setting value display device 136. Further, the game machine 10 makes it possible to confirm the state of the game machine 10 by the state display device 135. Further, the game machine 10 accepts the operation of the set value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127, so that the set value can be changed while displaying the set value on the probability setting value display device 136. Further, the game machine 10 makes it possible to clear the RAM 111C by accepting the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112.

The operation operation of the game machine 10 by the game hall staff is performed by opening the front frame 12 in the installation environment of the game hall. Therefore, the game hall staff will perform the operation operation by looking into the back side of the front frame 12 in the open state of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game hall staff mainly grasps the operation state from the state display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136 provided on the back side of the front frame 12.

Therefore, the game machine 10 supports grasping the operation state of the game hall staff by the effect device provided on the front side of the front frame 12. Next, the effect device provided on the front side of the front frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a perspective view (No. 2) showing an example of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment.

The game machine 10 includes speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b on the front side of the front frame 12. The speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R) are provided on the upper portion of the front frame 12 (see FIG. 1), the speaker 19a (L) is provided on the left side when viewed from the front side of the front frame 12, and the speaker 19a (L) is provided on the right side. R) is provided. Further, the speaker 19b is provided at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and above the operation unit 24 (see FIG. 1). The speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b can output sound independently. The speaker 19a (L) cannot be directly observed from the back surface side of the front frame 12, but is located at the upper right portion when viewed from the back surface side of the front frame 12. Further, the speaker 19a (R) cannot be directly observed from the back surface side of the front frame 12, but is located at the upper left portion when viewed from the back surface side of the front frame 12. Further, the speaker 19b cannot be directly observed from the back surface side of the front frame 12, but is located at the lower left side when viewed from the back surface side of the front frame 12.

The speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b are provided on the front side of the front frame 12 and play a game effect, but during the operation operation, the sound output supports the grasping of the operation state of the game hall staff.

Further, the game machine 10 is provided with a display device 41 at the center of the front frame 12 on the front side of the game board 30. The display device 41 cannot be directly observed from the back surface side of the front frame 12, but is also located at the center when viewed from the back surface side of the front frame 12. The display device 41 is provided on the front side of the front frame 12 to play a game effect, but at the time of operation operation, the operation state by the game hall staff can be guided to a third party by video output.

It should be noted that the notification and guidance of the operation status by these effect devices (speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), 19b, display device 41) do not necessarily have the same amount of information as the status display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136. It does not have to have.

Next, the control state after the power is turned on in the game machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of a control state after the power is turned on in the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment.

The game machine 10 (game control device 100) shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S3 according to the input states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127 when the power is turned on. The game control device 100 shifts to the control state S0 (setting change state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON when the power is turned on. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S1 (setting confirmation state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON when the power is turned on. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S2 (RAM clear) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is OFF when the power is turned on. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S3 (power failure recovery) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF when the power is turned on.

Further, when the setting key switch 127 is turned off in the control state S0, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S5 (game state). Further, when the setting key switch 127 is turned off in the control state S1, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S3. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S5 after clearing the RAM in the control state S2. Further, when the game control device 100 detects a data abnormality (data abnormality in the power failure inspection area or checksum abnormality in the data backup area) in the control state S3, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S4 (abnormality) and causes a data abnormality in the control state S3. If it is not detected (that is, the data is normal), the control state S5 is entered.

The game control device 100 clears the RAM in the control state S0 (setting change state) and accepts the operation of changing the set value. In the control state S0, the game control device 100 transmits a RAM initialization (RAM clear) command and a probability setting changing command to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S0, and notifies the RAM clear and the setting change state by using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value being changed in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value being changed on the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is changed by the effect device.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S0 to the control state S5. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects the confirmation of the changed set value and notifies the determination of the set value by using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value determined by the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value determined by the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the set value has been determined by the effect device.

The game control device 100 transmits a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 in the control state S1 (setting confirmation state). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S1, and notifies the setting confirmation state by using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value set in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value set in the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is confirmed by the effect device.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits a probability confirmation end command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S1 to the control state S3 (power failure recovery). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects the end of the setting confirmation state and notifies the end of the setting confirmation state by using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 ends the display of the set value in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the end of the setting confirmation state on the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting confirmation state has been completed by the effect device. The game control device 100 may not transmit the probability confirmation end command, and the effect control device 300 may receive a command (in that case) received as the transition from the control state S3 to the control state S5. The end of the setting confirmation status may be detected by receiving the power failure recovery command).

The game control device 100 transmits a RAM initialization command to the effect control device 300 in the control state S2 (RAM clear). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S2, and notifies that the RAM has been cleared by using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value set in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value set in the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is confirmed by the effect device.

When the game control device 100 detects a data abnormality in the control state S3 (power failure recovery), the game control device 100 transmits a setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 and terminates abnormally. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 has terminated abnormally, and guides the setting change instruction using the effect device because the normal set value is lost. Further, the game control device 100 hides the probability set value display device 136.

The game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command to the effect control device 300 when it detects normal data in the control state S3. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S5, and waits for the reception of the effect control command. Further, the game control device 100 hides the probability set value display device 136 and displays the state on the state display device 135. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the transition to the game state, and can confirm the transition to the game state by resuming the game effect in the effect device.

The status display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136 may be a common display device, function as the probability set value display device 136 in the control states S0 and S1, and the state display device 135 in the control state S5. It may function as.

In addition, instead of notifying the effect control device 300 that the RAM has been initialized by transmitting the RAM initialization command from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the game machine 10 has a command during the probability setting change. Or, the effect control device 300 may be notified that the RAM has been initialized by transmitting a probability setting confirmation command. In this case, the game machine 10 can notify the RAM clear even if the transmission of the RAM initialization command from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is omitted.

Next, guidance or notification of the control state in the effect device will be described. First, the transition timing from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart at the time of transition from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) of the seventh embodiment.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON when the power is turned on, the game machine 10 shifts to the control state S0 and executes RAM clear at the timing t0. The game machine 10 is in the control state S0 as long as the setting key switch 127 is ON even if the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned OFF at the timing t1.

In the game machine 10, the set value is initialized to "0" after the RAM is cleared in the control state S0, and each time the pressing operation of the set value change switch 126 is detected, the game machine 10 is incremented by "1", and when the maximum set value is exceeded, " Return to "0". For example, the game machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the set value change switch 126 at the timing t2 and updates the set value to "1", and detects the pressing operation of the set value change switch 126 at the timing t3 and sets the set value. Update to "2".

The game machine 10 detects the OFF of the setting key switch 127 at the timing t4, confirms the update of the set value, and shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S5. At this time, the game machine 10 uses the effect device to notify the setting change and the RAM clear.

Next, a notification mode for notification regarding setting change and notification regarding RAM clear will be described. First, a notification mode regarding a setting change and a notification regarding RAM clear in the display device 41, which is one of the effect devices, will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the display device of the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command transmitted by the game control device 100 in the control state S0, and causes the display device 41 to display the display screen 860 (FIG. 129 (1)). The notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the RAM clear are performed. At this time, since the effect control device 300 has not yet received the command related to the game control, the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862 are displayed against the background of the initial setting display (for example, the front single color). indicate. For example, the RAM initialization notification display 861 includes the display code “01” and the message “RAM has been initialized” in the display contents. Further, the display 862 during the probability setting change includes the display code "02" and the message "setting value changing operation in progress" in the display contents. As a result, the game machine 10 can guide the content of the notification by a message, and can grasp the detailed control state corresponding to the display code by referring to the instruction manual or the like. Although the game machine 10 includes the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862 with a display code and a message, it may include either one. The effect control device 300 displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862 during the control state S0, so that the display device 41 can easily grasp the control state of the game machine 10. The effect control device 300 may display the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862 by using effects such as blinking display and scroll display.

The effect control device 300 determines the probability setting to be transmitted by the game control device 100 at the transition timing from the control state S0 to the control state S5 (the timing may be immediately before the transition or the timing may be immediately after the transition). Upon receiving the command, the display screen 863 (FIG. 129 (2)) is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the setting change. At this time, if the effect control device 300 has not yet received the command related to the game control, the effect control device 300 displays the probability setting confirmation display 864 against the background of the initial setting display. For example, the probability setting confirmation display 864 includes the display code "03" and the message "change of setting value accepted" in the display contents. The effect control device 300 further displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 in order to ensure the notification regarding the RAM clear. The effect control device 300 displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 until the command related to the game control is received, so that the display device 41 can easily grasp the control state of the game machine 10. enable. The effect control device 300 may display the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 by using effects such as blinking display and scroll display.

The effect control device 300 receives a command related to game control (for example, a customer waiting command) transmitted by the game control device 100 in the control state S5, and causes the display device 41 to display the display screen 865 (FIG. 129 (3)). .. The effect control device 300 notifies the setting change until a predetermined notification end trigger is established even after the transition to the control state S5. At this time, after receiving the command related to the game control, the effect control device 300 displays the probability setting confirmation display 864 against the background of the corresponding game in-game display (for example, the customer waiting screen 866). The effect control device 300 further displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 in order to ensure the notification regarding the RAM clear. The effect control device 300 displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 until the notification end trigger is established, so that the display device 41 can display the game machine 10 even after the game control has started. The control status can be easily grasped. The effect control device 300 may display the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 by using effects such as blinking display and scroll display. The notification end trigger includes a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), the establishment of a predetermined condition (blockage detection of the front frame 12, game start detection by winning prize detection, etc., and execution of a predetermined number of variable display games (for example, special feature). Figure Game variation display once execution), push button 25 pressing operation detection, etc.).

Further, in order to ensure the notification of the display device 41 to the game hall staff, the game machine 10 displays the notification content started during the opening of the front frame 12 and ends the predetermined notification after the opening of the front frame 12 is completed. It may be continued until the trigger is established (for example, the elapse of a predetermined period or the detection of the push button 25 pressing operation).

Next, a notification mode for setting change and notification for RAM clear in the speakers 19a and 19b (sound output device), which is one of the effect devices, will be described. First, FIG. 130 will be described with respect to a notification mode by sound output control for each of a plurality of channels prepared for sound output. FIG. 130 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a notification mode for notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100, and notifies from the speakers 19a and 19b using a plurality of channels prepared for sound output from the timing t0. Sound A and notification sound B are output as sounds. For example, the effect control device 300 repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B in synchronization with the channel 1 and the channel 2 (FIG. 130 (1)). Then, the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100, and uses the plurality of channels prepared for sound output from the timing t4 to notify the notification sound A and the notification sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Sound output with C. For example, the effect control device 300 repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C in synchronization with the channel 1 and the channel 2. Then, the effect control device 300 switches the sound output from the channel that repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

The notification sound A includes an alarm sound for notifying the RAM clear (for example, an electronic sound "pune, pune") and a message for notifying the RAM clear (for example, "RAM has been initialized"). The notification sound A may include either an alarm sound or a message.

Further, the notification sound B includes a warning sound 1 (for example, an electronic sound "Pippi, Pippi") for notifying that the probability setting is being changed and a message for notifying that the probability setting is being changed (for example, "the probability setting is being changed"). including. The notification sound B may include either one of the alert sound 1 and the message.

Further, the notification sound C includes a warning sound 2 (for example, an electronic sound "Helicobacter pylori") for notifying the probability setting confirmation and a message for notifying the probability setting confirmation (for example, "the probability setting has been changed"). including. The notification sound C may include either one of the alert sound 2 and the message. Further, the game control sound D includes BGM and sound effects according to the game control state.

As a result, the game machine 10 can suppress the simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound B. Further, the game machine 10 can suppress the simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound C. Therefore, the game machine 10 can preferably inform the operator who is in the process of changing the probability setting that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting is being changed. Further, it is preferable that the game machine 10 is changing the probability setting for the operator because the notification sound of the RAM clear does not interfere with the notification sound during the probability setting change work during the probability setting change work. I can guide you. Further, the game machine 10 can preferably inform the operator who has performed the probability setting change work that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting has been confirmed (completed). Further, since the RAM clear notification sound does not interfere with the probability setting confirmation notification sound when the probability setting is confirmed, the game machine 10 can preferably inform the operator that the probability setting is confirmed. it can. Such a game machine 10 can provide a good working environment for a worker who performs a setting operation.

Further, the effect control device 300 may make the notification sound different for each channel when the notification sound A and the notification sound B are output from the speakers 19a and 19b using a plurality of channels. For example, when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t0, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the channel 1 and the notification sound to the channel 2. B is assigned (FIG. 130 (2)). At this time, the effect control device 300 alternately outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B so as not to output the sound at the overlapping timing. Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs the sound from the timing t4, the notification sound A is assigned to the channel 1 and the notification sound C is assigned to the channel 2. At this time, the effect control device 300 alternately outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C so as not to output the sound at the overlapping timing. Then, the effect control device 300 switches channels 1 and 2 to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

Further, when the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B from the speakers 19a and 19b using a plurality of channels, the notification sound is made different for each channel and different notification sounds are output. An interval period Δt may be provided between them (FIG. 130 (3)). For example, when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t0, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the channel 1 and the notification sound to the channel 2. Allocate B. Then, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A from the channel 1, waits for the interval period Δt, and then outputs the notification sound B from the channel 2. Similarly, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound B from the channel 2, waits for the interval period Δt, and then outputs the notification sound A from the channel 1. After that, the effect control device 300 repeats the same cycle. The effect control device 300 may set the interval period Δt as a silent period or an output period of a predetermined sound (for example, the interval sound “picone”). Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t4, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the channel 1, assigns the notification sound C to the channel 2, and notifies the notification sound A. And the notification sound C set the interval period Δt when they are alternately output. Then, the effect control device 300 switches channels 1 and 2 to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

As shown in FIG. 130 (1), the effect control device 300 sets the interval period Δt when switching the notification sound even when the notification sound is repeatedly output in synchronization with the channel 1 and the channel 2. You may try to do it.

The gaming machine 10 may allocate a specific channel to a specific speaker. For example, of the speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R), the speaker 19a (L) outputs the notification sound set for the channel 1 and does not output the notification sound set for the channel 2. Further, the speaker 19a (R) outputs the notification sound set to the channel 2 and does not output the notification sound set to the channel 1.

Next, FIG. 131 will be described with respect to a notification mode by sound output control for each of a plurality of speakers prepared for sound output. FIG. 131 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a notification mode for notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100, and a plurality of speakers 19a (L), 19a (R) prepared for sound output from the timing t0. , 19b is used to output the notification sound A and the notification sound B. For example, the effect control device 300 repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B in synchronization with the speaker L (speaker 19a (L)) and the speaker R (speaker 19a (R)) (FIG. 131 (1). )). Then, the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100, and outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C from the speaker L and the speaker R from the timing t4. For example, the effect control device 300 repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C in synchronization with the speaker L and the speaker R. Then, the effect control device 300 converts the sound output from the speaker L and the speaker R, which repeatedly output the notification sound A and the notification sound C, to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time elapses from the timing t4. Switch.

As a result, the game machine 10 can suppress the simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound B. Further, the game machine 10 can suppress the simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound C. Therefore, the game machine 10 can preferably inform the operator who is in the process of changing the probability setting that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting is being changed. Further, it is preferable that the game machine 10 is changing the probability setting for the operator because the notification sound of the RAM clear does not interfere with the notification sound during the probability setting change work during the probability setting change work. I can guide you. Further, the game machine 10 can preferably inform the operator who has performed the probability setting change work that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting has been confirmed (completed). Further, since the RAM clear notification sound does not interfere with the probability setting confirmation notification sound when the probability setting is confirmed, the game machine 10 can preferably inform the operator that the probability setting is confirmed. it can. Such a game machine 10 can provide a good working environment for a worker who performs a setting operation.

Further, the effect control device 300 may make the notification sound different for each speaker when the notification sound A and the notification sound B are output from the speaker L and the speaker R. For example, when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t0, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the speaker L and the notification sound to the speaker R. B is assigned (FIG. 131 (2)). At this time, the effect control device 300 alternately outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B so as not to output the sound at the overlapping timing. Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t4, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the speaker L and the notification sound C to the speaker R. At this time, the effect control device 300 alternately outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C so as not to output the sound at the overlapping timing. Then, the effect control device 300 switches the speakers L and R to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

Further, when the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B from the speaker L and the speaker R, the notification sound is made different for each speaker, and the interval period is between outputting the different notification sounds. Δt may be provided (FIG. 131 (3)). For example, when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t0, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the speaker L and the notification sound to the speaker R. Allocate B. Then, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L, waits for the interval period Δt, and then outputs the notification sound B from the speaker R. Similarly, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound B from the speaker R, waits for the interval period Δt, and then outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L. After that, the effect control device 300 repeats the same cycle. The effect control device 300 may set the interval period Δt as a silent period or an output period of a predetermined sound (for example, the interval sound “picone”). Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t4, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the speaker L, assigns the notification sound C to the speaker R, and notifies the notification sound A. And the notification sound C are alternately output, and the interval period Δt is set. Then, the effect control device 300 switches the speakers L and R to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

As shown in FIG. 131 (1), the effect control device 300 sets the interval period Δt when switching the notification sound even when the speaker L and the speaker R synchronize with each other to repeatedly output the notification sound. You may try to do it.

In the game machine 10, the speakers that output different notification sounds are set according to the left-right arrangement of the game machine 10, but the speakers may be arranged vertically or according to the speaker characteristics such as treble and bass output.

Next, FIG. 132 will be described with respect to a notification mode in which different notification sounds are simultaneously output and controlled by a plurality of speakers prepared for sound output. FIG. 132 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the notification mode of the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100, and a plurality of speakers 19a (L), 19a (R) prepared for sound output from the timing t0. , 19b is used to control the sound output of the notification sound A and the notification sound B. For example, the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t0, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound A by the speaker L (speaker 19a (L)). Further, the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t0, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound B by the speaker R (speaker 19a (R)). Then, the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100, switches the notification sound from the timing t4 to start the sound output control, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound A by the speaker L. Further, the effect control device 300 switches the notification sound from the timing t4 to start the sound output control, and the speaker R repeatedly outputs the notification sound C. Then, the effect control device 300 repeatedly outputs the sound output from the speaker L that repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the speaker R that repeatedly outputs the notification sound C from the timing t6 when a predetermined time elapses from the timing t4. Switch to the game control sound D and start sound output control.

As a result, the game machine 10 simultaneously controls the sound output of the notification sound A and the notification sound B. As described above, the effect control device 300 can suppress the control load because the control of different timings is unnecessary by simultaneously performing the sound output control of different notification sounds.

An output mode of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output and controlled will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of output modes of different notification sounds in the case where different notification sounds of the seventh embodiment are simultaneously sound output controlled. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of output modes of different notification sounds in the case where different notification sounds of the seventh embodiment are simultaneously sound output controlled.

The effect control device 300 starts sound output control from the timing t4, causes the speaker L (speaker 19a (L)) to output the notification sound A, and the speaker R (speaker 19a (R)) outputs the notification sound C. (Fig. 133 (1)).

At this time, the speaker L is on the shaft support side of the front frame 12, and the speaker R is on the open end side of the front frame 12. Therefore, when an operator (for example, a game hall staff member) opens the front frame 12 to perform setting change work or setting confirmation work, the sound output from the speaker R is heard more than the sound output from the speaker L. Cheap.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 causes the notification sound A to be output from the speaker L on the shaft support side even when the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output at the same time (FIG. 133 (2)). By outputting the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side, the notification effect of the notification sound related to the work of the operator is ensured.

As a result, the game machine 10 can maintain the required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 outputs a notification sound having a small degree of relevance to the work of the operator from the speaker L on the shaft support side, and outputs a notification sound having a large degree of relevance to the work of the operator to the speaker on the open end side. Although the sound is output from R, a speaker that outputs a notification sound may be set according to the presence or absence of the degree of relevance to the work of the operator, the work procedure, and the like.

Further, the effect control device 300 may exclusively output the sound so that the notification sound A and the notification sound C are not output at the same time (FIG. 133 (3)). For example, when the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t4, the notification sound A is immediately output from the speaker L on the shaft support side and muted at the timing t4a. On the other hand, when the sound output control is started from the timing t4, the effect control device 300 outputs the sound in the mute state, waits for the timing t4a, and outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side.

According to this, the game machine 10 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the shaft support side and outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side, and outputs the notification sound related to the work of the operator. The notification effect of is more preferably secured. It is said that the effect control device 300 first outputs sound from the speaker L on the shaft support side and then outputs sound from the speaker R on the open end side with a delay, but first outputs sound from the speaker R on the open end side. Then, the sound may be output from the speaker L on the shaft support side after a delay. Further, the effect control device 300 first outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L, and later outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R, but the notification sound has a large degree of relevance to the work of the operator. The sound C may be output from the speaker L first, and the notification sound A having a small degree of relevance to the work of the operator may be output from the speaker R later.

Further, if the sound output of the notification sound A at the maximum volume and the sound output of the notification sound C at the maximum volume are exclusive, the effect control device 300 allows the sound output to overlap at some timings. You may. For example, when the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t4, the notification sound A is immediately output from the speaker L on the shaft support side and muted at the timing t4b (FIG. 133 (4)). On the other hand, when the sound output control is started from the timing t4, the effect control device 300 increases the volume while fading in from the mute state of the timing t4 to the maximum volume state of the timing t4b, and sets the notification sound C on the open end side. Sound is output from the speaker R.

Further, when the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t4, the notification sound C is immediately output from the speaker L on the shaft support side and muted while fading out from the timing t4c (FIG. 134 (1)). .. On the other hand, when the sound output control is started from the timing t4, the effect control device 300 outputs the sound in the mute state, waits for the timing t4c, and outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the shaft support side.

According to this, the game machine 10 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the shaft support side and outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side, and the maximum volumes of the two notification sounds overlap. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the game machine 10 has both the guarantee of the notification effect of the two notification sounds and the guarantee of the notification effect of the notification sounds related to the work of the operator.

It is assumed that the effect control device 300 fades in (FIG. 133 (4)) or fades out (FIG. 134 (1)) for one of the notification sounds, but fades in or fades out for each of the two notification sounds. May be good. For example, the effect control device 300 may output the notification sound A and the notification sound C as sound by fading in, the notification sound A and the notification sound C as sound output by fading out, or the notification sound A. May be output by fading in and the notification sound C may be output by fading out, or the notification sound C may be output as sound by fading in and the notification sound A may be output as sound by fading out.

Further, although the effect control device 300 assumes that one of the notification sounds fades in (FIG. 133 (4)) or fades out (FIG. 134 (1)), one of the notification sounds may be faded in and faded out. However, both (all) notification sounds may be faded in and faded out.

Further, when the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t4, the notification sound A is output from the speaker L on the shaft support side at a suppressed volume, and the notification sound C is output in a mute state. Waiting for the timing t4d, the speaker R on the open end side outputs a sound at a volume louder than the notification sound A (for example, the maximum volume) (FIG. 134 (2)).

As a result, the game machine 10 can maintain the required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300. Although the effect control device 300 is supposed to wait for the timing t4d to output the notification sound C, the sound may be output immediately from the timing t4.

In addition, in FIG. 133 (3), the effect control device 300 exclusively outputs the sound so that the notification sound A and the notification sound C are not output at the same time, but instead of muting one of the sounds. The sound output may be suppressed. For example, the effect control device 300 outputs an unsuppressed sound (for example, maximum volume) when the sound output control is started from the timing t4 and the notification sound A is sound output controlled from the speaker L on the shaft support side at the timing t4. After that, the timing t4a is waited for and the suppression sound is output. On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 controls the sound output of the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side at the timing t4, the effect control device 300 outputs the suppression sound and then waits for the timing t4a to output the non-suppression sound. The suppression sound may be one that suppresses the volume, or may be one that suppresses the notification mode (notification message or warning sound, replacement or deletion of warning sound, insertion of interval period, etc.). ..

Further, when the sound output control is started from the timing t4, the effect control device 300 periodically changes the volume so that the volume of the notification sound A becomes the maximum at the timing t4e and the volume of the notification sound A becomes the minimum at the timing t4f. You may let it. At this time, the effect control device 300 periodically changes the volume so that the volume of the notification sound C becomes the minimum at the timing t4e and the volume of the notification sound C becomes the maximum at the timing t4f (FIG. 134 (3)). ).

As a result, the game machine 10 can maintain the required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 sets a half-cycle time lag at the timing at which the notification sound A and the notification sound C reach the maximum volume, but the timing at which the notification sound A and the notification sound C reach the maximum volume does not overlap. If so, it is not limited to a half cycle.

Further, when the effect control device 300 exclusively outputs the sound so that the notification sound A and the notification sound C are not output at the same time, the number of notifications is the same in the notification example shown in FIG. 133 (3). , The number of notifications may be different (FIG. 134 (4)). For example, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A three times from the speaker L on the shaft support side and outputs the notification sound C to the speaker R on the open end side by the timing t4g when the sound output control is started from the timing t4. Sound is output once from.

As a result, the game machine 10 can maintain the required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300. Further, the game machine 10 can provide a difference in the notification effect between the notification sound A and the notification sound C. It is said that the effect control device 300 provides a difference in the notification effect between the notification sound A and the notification sound C by different the number of notifications, but the difference in the notification time is the difference in the notification effect between the notification sound A and the notification sound C. May be provided.

Although the case where the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output as sounds has been described, other combinations of notification sounds such as the notification sound A and the notification sound B can also be applied. Further, the case where the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output by the speaker L and the speaker R has been described, but the present invention also applies to other combinations of speakers such as the speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R) and the speaker 19b. It is possible. Further, although the case where the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output by the speaker L and the speaker R has been described, the combination of two or more channels such as channel 1 and channel 2 can also be applied.

Next, the power-on notification setting process of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the power-on notification setting process of the seventh embodiment. The power-on notification setting process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D62 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). The control unit executes the power-on notification setting process when the received command is a RAM initialization command, a probability setting changing command, a probability setting checking command, or a probability setting change instruction command.

[Step D331] The control unit determines whether or not the command during the probability setting change has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D332 when the command during the probability setting change is received, and proceeds to step D334 when the command is not received.

[Step D332] The control unit sets the RAM clear notification and the setting changing (probability setting changing) notification. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification and probability setting changing notification by the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.). The control unit is trying to reduce the control load by simultaneously performing the RAM clear notification and the probability setting changing notification.

[Step D333] The control unit sets the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the notification during the setting change (probability setting change). For example, the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the setting changing notification is a transition from the control state S0 to the control state S5. The control unit ends the power-on notification setting process after setting the end triggers for the RAM clear notification and the setting changing notification.

[Step D334] The control unit determines whether or not the command during probability setting confirmation has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D335 when the command during probability setting confirmation is received, and proceeds to step D337 when the command is not received.

[Step D335] The control unit sets the notification during setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation). As a result, the effect control device 300 notifies the probability setting during confirmation by the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.).

[Step D336] The control unit sets the end trigger of the notification during setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation). For example, the end trigger of the probability setting confirmation notification is the transition from the control state S1 to the control state S3. The control unit ends the power-on notification setting process after setting the end trigger of the probability setting confirmation notification.

[Step D337] The control unit determines whether or not the RAM initialization command has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D338 when the RAM initialization command is received, and proceeds to step D340 when the RAM initialization command is not received.

[Step D338] The control unit sets the RAM clear (RAM initialization) notification. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification by the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.).

[Step D339] The control unit sets the end trigger of the RAM clear notification. For example, the end trigger of the RAM clear notification is a predetermined period elapse (for example, 30 seconds elapse) after the transition from the control state S2 to the control state S5. The control unit ends the power-on notification setting process after setting the end trigger of the RAM clear notification.

[Step D340] The control unit sets the probability setting change instruction notification because the received command is neither a RAM initialization command, a probability setting changing command, or a probability setting checking command, that is, a probability setting change instruction command. To do. As a result, the effect control device 300 uses the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) to notify the probability setting change instruction. The control unit ends the power-on notification setting process after setting the probability setting change instruction notification. Since the control unit of the game control device 100 prohibits RAM access and waits for a restart after transmitting the probability setting change instruction command, the control unit of the effect control device 300 is a trigger for ending the probability setting change instruction notification. Does not require a set of.

As a result, the game machine 10 can perform notification according to the control state when the power is turned on.
Next, the power-on notification end setting process of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the power-on notification end setting process of the seventh embodiment. The power-on notification end setting process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D62 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). The control unit executes the power-on notification end setting process when the notification set in the power-on notification setting process is being executed or when the notification set in the power-on notification end setting process is being executed. ..

[Step D341] The control unit determines whether or not the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the setting changing notification is established. The control unit proceeds to step D342 when the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the setting changing notification is established, and proceeds to step D344 when it is not established.

[Step D342] The control unit ends the RAM clear notification and the setting changing notification, and sets the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) notification. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification and probability setting confirmation notification by the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.).

[Step D343] The control unit sets the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting (probability setting confirmation) notification. For example, the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification is a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed) from the start of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification. The control unit ends the notification end setting process when the power is turned on after setting the end triggers of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification.

[Step D344] The control unit determines whether or not the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) notification is established. The control unit proceeds to step D345 when the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification is established, and proceeds to step D346 when the end trigger is not established.

[Step D345] The control unit ends (clears) the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification, and ends the power-on notification end setting process.
[Step D346] The control unit determines whether or not the end trigger of the notification during the setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) has been established. The control unit proceeds to step D347 when the end trigger of the probability setting confirmation notification is established, and proceeds to step D348 when it is not established.

[Step D347] The control unit ends (clears) the notification during setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation), and ends the notification end setting process when the power is turned on.
[Step D348] The control unit determines whether or not the end trigger of the RAM clear notification is established. The control unit proceeds to step D349 when the end trigger of the RAM clear notification is established, and ends the notification end setting process at power-on when the end trigger is not established.

[Step D349] The control unit ends (clears) the RAM clear notification, and ends the notification end setting process when the power is turned on.
As a result, the game machine 10 can perform notification according to the control state when the power is turned on.

In the power-on notification setting process, the control unit considers that the RAM is initialized by receiving the command during the probability setting change because the probability setting change involves RAM clear, but the command during the probability setting change in step D331. The reception of the RAM initialization command may be added to the judgment requirement in addition to the reception of. That is, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command have been received, and if the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command are received, the process proceeds to step D332 to proceed to the RAM initialization. If the conversion command and the command for changing the probability setting are not received, the process may proceed to step D334.

In this case, the control unit can change the notification mode and notification timing of the RAM clear depending on whether or not another command (for example, a command during the probability setting change) is received when the RAM initialization command is received. For example, when the effect control device 300 does not receive the command during the probability setting change when receiving the RAM initialization command, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification by a notification device (for example, display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, etc.), and RAM When the command for changing the probability setting is being received at the time of receiving the initialization command, the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) performs the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification.

In addition, the control unit determines whether or not the notification mode of RAM clear and the notification timing are different, and whether or not other commands are received when the RAM initialization command is received, but from the reception of the RAM initialization command. It may be determined whether or not another command (for example, a command during which the probability setting is being changed) is received within a predetermined time.

The change of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 140. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example (No. 4) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the seventh embodiment.

When the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 137 (1)), the effect control device 300 notifies the RAM clear up to the timing t10 by the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.). Do it.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting changing command and the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 137 (2)), the notification device provides a RAM clear notification and a setting changing notification (probability setting change). Medium notification). The effect control device 300 performs the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received, and then performs the setting confirmation notification (probability setting confirmation notification) only for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 performs the RAM clear notification from the timing t12 to the timing t13 further delayed by the period T2.

As described above, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 137 (1)) and the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 137 (2)). Set a different notification period for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the conversion command. Such a game machine 10 can surely perform the RAM clear notification according to the presence / absence of the notification during the setting change.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting changing command and the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 137 (3)), the notification device sets the RAM clear to non-notification and notifies the setting change during setting. Do it. The effect control device 300 performs the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received, and then performs the setting confirmation notification only for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12. The effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification from the timing t12 to the timing t13 delayed by the period T2.

As described above, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 137 (1)) and the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 137 (3)). Set a different notification start time for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the conversion command. Such a game machine 10 can surely perform the RAM clear notification according to the presence / absence of the notification during the setting change.

It should be noted that the game machine 10 has different notification periods and notification start times of the RAM clear notification depending on whether or not a command during the probability setting change (may be another command such as a probability setting confirmation command) is received. The notification end time, notification volume, notification content, notification frequency, and other notification modes of the clear notification may be different.

When the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on, the effect control device 300 may provide a predetermined delay period Δt to notify the RAM clear up to the timing t10 by the notification device (FIG. 138 (FIG. 138). 1)).

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change during the predetermined delay period Δt set by receiving the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on, the delay period Δt elapses from the reception of the RAM initialization command. Later, the notification device may be used to perform RAM clear notification and setting changing notification (FIG. 138 (2)). The effect control device 300 performs the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received, and then performs the setting confirmation notification only for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 performs the RAM clear notification from the timing t12 to the timing t13 further delayed by the period T2.

Even in such a case, the effect control device 300 does not receive the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 138 (1)) and the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 138 (2)). Then, a different notification period is set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the RAM initialization command. Such a game machine 10 can reliably perform RAM clear notification regardless of the presence or absence of notification during setting change.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change during the predetermined delay period Δt set by receiving the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 139 (1)), the notification device is used. The RAM clear is set to non-notification and notification is performed while the setting is being changed. The effect control device 300 performs the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received, and then performs the setting confirmation notification only for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12. The effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification from the timing t12 to the timing t13 delayed by the period T2.

As described above, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 138 (1)) and the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 139 (1)) at the initial RAM. Set a different notification start time for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the conversion command. Such a game machine 10 can surely perform the RAM clear notification according to the presence / absence of the notification during the setting change.

The gaming machine 10 has different notification periods and notification start times for RAM clear notifications depending on whether or not a command (other command) whose probability setting is being changed is received. However, the notification end time, notification volume, and notification of RAM clear notifications are different. The content, notification frequency, and other notification modes may be different.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change during the predetermined delay period Δt set by receiving the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on, the delay period Δt elapses from the reception of the RAM initialization command. Later, the notification device may be used to non-notify the RAM clear so that the notification during the setting change is performed (FIG. 139 (2)). The effect control device 300 performs the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received, and then performs the setting confirmation notification only for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12. Since the effect control device 300 executes the probability setting change and the RAM clear as a pair, the RAM clear that is naturally performed may be omitted by the notification during the setting change. That is, even when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on, it depends on whether or not the command during the probability setting change (may be another command such as the probability setting confirmation command) is received. Decide whether to notify RAM clear. As a result, the game machine 10 can omit the RAM clear notification that is naturally understood by the notification during the setting change. Such a game machine 10 can simplify the notification content and makes it easier for the operator to grasp the situation.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 140 (1)), the speaker L, R, B (for example, the speaker 19a (L), the speaker 19a (R), the speaker) According to 19b (B)), the RAM clear notification is performed at the maximum volume up to the timing t20.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the command for changing the probability setting and the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 140 (2)), the probability setting is confirmed by the speaker L (for example, the speaker 19a (L)). RAM clear notification is performed at a volume suppressed until the timing t21 when the command is received (for example, half of the maximum volume), a predetermined muffling period (for example, 10 seconds) is provided until the timing t22, and then a predetermined period (for example) at the maximum volume. , 30 seconds) RAM clear notification is performed. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a setting changing notification (probability setting changing notification) at the maximum volume up to the timing t21 when the probability setting confirmation command is received by the speaker R (for example, the speaker 19a (R)). Further, the effect control device 300 performs setting confirmation notification (probability setting confirmation notification) at the maximum volume from timing t21 to timing t22 when the probability setting confirmation command is received by the speaker B (for example, speaker 19b).

As described above, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 140 (1)) and the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 140 (2)), and the RAM is initially set. A different notification period, a different notification device, and a different notification intensity (for example, volume) are set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the conversion command. Such a game machine 10 can surely perform the RAM clear notification according to the presence / absence of the notification during the setting change.

Next, a modified example of the control state after the power is turned on in the game machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described with reference to FIG. 127 will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of a control state after the power is turned on in the game machine of the first modification of the seventh embodiment.

The game machine 10 (game control device 100) shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S3 according to the input states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127 when the power is turned on. The game control device 100 shifts to the control state S0 (setting change state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON when the power is turned on. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S1 (setting confirmation state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON when the power is turned on. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S2 (RAM clear) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is OFF when the power is turned on. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S3 (power failure recovery) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF when the power is turned on.

Further, when the setting key switch 127 is turned off in the control state S0, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S2 (RAM clear). Further, when the setting key switch 127 is turned off in the control state S1, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S3. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S5 (game state) after clearing the RAM in the control state S2. Further, when the game control device 100 detects a data abnormality (data abnormality in the power failure inspection area or checksum abnormality in the data backup area) in the control state S3, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S4 (abnormality) and causes a data abnormality in the control state S3. If it is not detected (that is, the data is normal), the control state S5 is entered.

The game control device 100 transmits a command during the probability setting change to the effect control device 300 in the control state S0 (setting change state). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S0, and notifies the setting change state using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value being changed in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value being changed on the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is changed by the effect device.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S0 to the control state S2 (RAM clear). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects the confirmation of the changed set value, and notifies the determination of the set value using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value determined by the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value determined by the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the set value has been determined by the effect device. The game control device 100 may transmit a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 when the control state S0 shifts to the control state S2.

The game control device 100 transmits a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 in the control state S1 (setting confirmation state). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S1, and notifies the setting confirmation state using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value set in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value set in the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is confirmed by the effect device.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits a probability confirmation end command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S1 to the control state S3 (power failure recovery). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects the end of the setting confirmation state and notifies the end of the setting confirmation state using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 ends the display of the set value in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the end of the setting confirmation state on the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting confirmation state has been completed by the effect device. The game control device 100 may not transmit the probability confirmation end command, and the effect control device 300 may receive a command (in that case) received as the transition from the control state S3 to the control state S5. The end of the setting confirmation status may be detected by receiving the power failure recovery command).

The game control device 100 transmits a RAM initialization (RAM clear) command to the effect control device 300 in the control state S2 (RAM clear). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S2, and notifies that the RAM has been cleared by using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value set in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value set in the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is confirmed by the effect device.

When the game control device 100 detects a data abnormality in the control state S3 (power failure recovery), the game control device 100 transmits a setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 and terminates abnormally. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 has terminated abnormally, and since the normal set value is lost, guides the setting change instruction using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 hides the probability set value display device 136.

The game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command to the effect control device 300 when it detects normal data in the control state S3. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S5, and waits for the reception of the effect control command. Further, the game control device 100 hides the probability set value display device 136 and displays the state on the state display device 135. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the transition to the game state, and can confirm the transition to the game state by resuming the game effect in the effect device.

The status display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136 may be a common display device, function as the probability set value display device 136 in the control states S0 and S1, and the state display device 135 in the control state S5. It may function as.

Next, guidance or notification of the control state in the effect device of the game machine 10 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the transition timing from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S2 (RAM clear) and the control state S5 (game state) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart at the time of transition from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) of the modification 1 of the seventh embodiment.

The game machine 10 shifts to the control state S0 when the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON when the power is turned on. The game machine 10 is in the control state S0 as long as the setting key switch 127 is ON even if the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned OFF at the timing t1. Since the game machine 10 accepts the execution reservation for clearing the RAM by shifting to the control state S0, the input state of the RAM initialization switch 112 after the transition to the control state S0 does not matter.

The game machine 10 increments the preset set value by "1" each time it detects the pressing operation of the set value change switch 126, and returns to "0" when the maximum set value is exceeded. For example, the game machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the set value change switch 126 at the timing t2, updates the preset set value "5 (maximum value)" to "0", and changes the set value at the timing t3. The pressing operation of the switch 126 is detected and the set value is updated to "1".

The game machine 10 detects the OFF of the setting key switch 127 at the timing t4, confirms the update of the set value, shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S2, clears the RAM in the control state S2, and controls after the RAM is cleared. It shifts to the state S5. However, the set value storage area is outside the initialization target area and is not initialized.

The game machine 10 uses the effect device to notify the setting change in the control state S0, and uses the effect device to notify the setting change confirmation and the RAM clear in the control state S2 and thereafter.

Next, the game machine 10 of the second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the game machine 10 of the second modification of the seventh embodiment, the output mode of the notification sound differs depending on the installation position of the speaker. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of output modes of different notification sounds in the case where different notification sounds of the second embodiment of the seventh embodiment are simultaneously sound output controlled. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of output modes of different notification sounds in the case where different notification sounds of the second embodiment of the seventh embodiment are simultaneously sound output controlled. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of output modes of different notification sounds in the case where different notification sounds of the second embodiment of the seventh embodiment are simultaneously sound output controlled.

As shown in FIG. 143 (1), the game machine 10 has a probability of being a shaft support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. Performs setting change notification and RAM clear notification. At this time, the game machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12, and the notification mode differs depending on whether the front frame 12 is closed or opened.

For example, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "setting is being changed. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" is output from both the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "RAM cleared. RAM cleared. Setting is being changed. (Hereinafter, loop)" is output from the speaker on the open end side. Sound "Settings are being changed. Settings are being changed. RAM has been cleared. (Loop below)" is output.

In this way, the game machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, the game machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened, and the front frame 12 is opened so that the operator can easily hear the opening. The end-side speaker gives weight to the notification content that is highly relevant to the work content. Further, in the game machine 10, the front frame 12 is opened and the notification content that is less relevant to the work content is weighted from the shaft support side speaker at a position that is difficult for the worker to hear, and the notification content is different. Balance the notification effect.

The weighting for the notification content is not limited to the number of repetitions (number of notifications), and may be the notification time or notification volume, or may be other as long as the notification effect can be different. ..

The game control device 100 can detect the opening of the front frame 12 by monitoring the input state of the main body frame opening detection switch 64, and the effect control device 300 detects the opening of the front frame 12 for game control. The opening of the front frame 12 can be detected by receiving a required command from the device 100.

In this way, the game machine 10 can detect the setting change work, the setting confirmation work, and the RAM clear work by the operator by detecting the opening of the front frame 12. The opening detection of the front frame 12 is one aspect of the detection of the setting change work, the setting confirmation work, and the RAM clear work by the operator, and may be performed by other methods.

Further, as shown in FIG. 143 (2), the game machine 10 sets the probability between the work position remote speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and the work position proximity speaker (for example, speaker 19b) of the front frame 12. The changing notification and the RAM clear notification may be performed. At this time, the game machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12, and the notification mode differs depending on whether the front frame 12 is closed or opened.

For example, when the front frame is closed, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "setting is being changed. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" is output from both the work position remote speaker and the work position vicinity speaker. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "RAM cleared. RAM cleared. Setting is being changed. (Hereinafter, loop)" is output from the work position remote speaker and notified from the work position vicinity speaker. Sound "Settings are being changed. Settings are being changed. RAM has been cleared. (Loop below)" is output.

In this way, the game machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the work position remote speaker and the work position vicinity speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, when the front frame is opened, the game machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the work position remote speaker and the work position vicinity speaker, and the work is in a position where it is easy for the worker who works with the front frame 12 to hear. The notification content that is highly relevant to the work content is weighted and notified from the speaker near the position. Further, the game machine 10 weights the notification contents having a low relevance to the work contents from the work position remote speaker at a position where it is difficult for the worker who works by opening the front frame 12 to hear the different notification contents. Balance the notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (1), the game machine 10 includes a shaft support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. , The notification during the probability setting change and the RAM clear notification may be performed. At this time, the game machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12, and the notification mode differs depending on whether the front frame 12 is closed or opened.

For example, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "setting is being changed. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" is output from both the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "setting is being changed. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" from the speaker on the shaft support side, and the notification sound "setting is being changed" from the speaker on the open end side. (Hereafter loop) ”is output.

In this way, the game machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, the game machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened. At this time, the game machine 10 makes the notification sound of the shaft support side speaker the same when the front frame is closed and when the front frame is open, and makes the notification sound of the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed and when the front frame is open. Wrong. Further, the game machine 10 outputs a plurality of notification sounds (probability setting changing notification sound and RAM clear notification sound) from the shaft support side speaker when the front frame is opened to ensure the notification effect of the plurality of notification sounds. On the other hand, when the front frame is opened, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound (notification sound during probability setting change) that is highly related to the work content from the open end side speaker to assist the worker's workability.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (2), the game machine 10 includes a speaker on the shaft support side (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and a speaker on the open end side (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. , Probability setting changing notification and RAM clear notification may be performed. At this time, the game machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12, and the notification mode differs depending on whether the front frame 12 is closed or opened.

For example, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "setting is being changed. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" is output from both the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed. In addition, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "RAM cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" from the shaft support side speaker when the front frame is opened, and a notification sound "setting is being changed" from the open end side speaker (hereinafter, loop). ) ”Is output.

In this way, the game machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, the game machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened, and the front frame 12 is opened so that the operator can easily hear the opening. The end side speaker notifies the notification content that is highly relevant to the work content. Further, the game machine 10 notifies the worker who works by opening the front frame 12 from the speaker on the shaft support side at a position where it is difficult to hear the notification content which is not closely related to the work content.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (1), the game machine 10 includes a shaft support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. , Probability setting changing notification and RAM clear notification may be performed. At this time, the game machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12, and the notification mode differs depending on whether the front frame 12 is closed or opened.

For example, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "setting is being changed. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" is output from both the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "The front frame is being opened. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" is output from the speaker on the shaft support side, and the notification sound "Setting change" is output from the speaker on the open end side. Medium. (Hereafter loop) "is output.

In this way, the game machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, the game machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened. At this time, the game machine 10 includes the notification sound related to the opening of the front frame in the notification sound of the shaft support side speaker. Further, in the game machine 10, the notification sound of the open end side speaker is different between when the front frame is closed and when the front frame is opened. Further, the game machine 10 outputs a plurality of notification sounds (a notification sound while the front frame is open and a RAM clear notification sound) from the shaft support side speaker when the front frame is opened to ensure the notification effect of the plurality of notification sounds. On the other hand, when the front frame is opened, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound (notification sound during probability setting change) that is highly related to the work content from the open end side speaker to assist the worker's workability.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (2), the game machine 10 includes a shaft support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. , The notification volume may be different. For example, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound at a preset volume from both the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed. Further, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound from the shaft support side speaker at a suppressed volume suppressed from the set volume when the front frame is opened, and emphasizes a louder volume (for example, maximum volume) than the set volume from the open end side speaker. Outputs a notification sound with. As a result, the game machine 10 assists the workability of the worker while ensuring the notification effect of the notification sound to other than the worker.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (3), the game machine 10 includes a shaft support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. , The channel used may be different. For example, the game machine 10 allocates a maintenance channel (maintenance channel) among a plurality of channels that can be used for sound output. The game machine 10 allows notification sound output from all channels from both the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed. Further, the game machine 10 limits the output of the notification sound from the maintenance channel on the shaft support side speaker when the front frame is open, and allows the output of the notification sound from the maintenance channel on the open end side speaker. As a result, the game machine 10 assists the workability of the worker while ensuring the notification effect of the notification sound to other than the worker.

The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136). ), Clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112), and notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification device). The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means executes the first video output for notifying the confirmation of the setting change and the second video output for notifying the clearing of the game information with an overlapping period, and notifies the confirmation of the setting change. The sound output of the above and the second sound output for notifying the clearing of the game information are executed without overlapping periods (see FIGS. 128 to 131).

(2) The game information of (1) includes setting information.
(3) The game machine 10 includes information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136). ), Clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112), and notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification device). The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means includes a first video output for notifying the confirmation of the setting change, a second video output for notifying the clearing of the game information, a first sound output for notifying the confirmation of the setting change, and the game information. The second sound output for notifying the clear is executed with an overlapping period, and the overlap of the maximum volume output period is eliminated by fading at least one of the first sound output and the second sound output. Sound output is performed (see FIGS. 128, 129, 133 (4), 134 (1), (3)).

(4) The game information of (3) includes setting information.
(5) The notification control means of (3) executes sound output by fading in at least one of the first sound output and the second sound output to eliminate duplication of the maximum volume output period (5). See FIG. 133 (4)).

(6) The notification control means of (3) executes sound output by fading out at least one of the first sound output and the second sound output to eliminate duplication of the maximum volume output period (FIG. 6). 134 (1)).

(7) The game machine 10 includes information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136). ), Clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112), and notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification device). The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means includes a first video output for notifying the confirmation of the setting change, a second video output for notifying the clearing of the game information, a first sound output for notifying the confirmation of the setting change, and the game information. When the second sound output for notifying clear is executed with an overlapping period, one of the first sound output and the second sound output is made larger than the other volume. The sound output from the speaker L is prioritized before and after the timing t4 to t4b in FIG. 133 (1) and the timing t4e in FIG. 134 (3), and the sound output from the speaker L is prioritized. ) Is set to the overlapping period (priority is given to the sound output from the speaker R before and after the timing t4f), and the sound output is executed (see FIGS. 133 (4), 134 (1), (2), and (3)). ..

(8) The notification control means of (7) increases the volume of one of the first sound output and the second sound output as compared with the volume of the other, so that one notification is notified to the other. (For example, the sound output from the speaker L is prioritized before and after the timing t4e in FIG. 134 (3)) and the volume of the other is increased in comparison with the volume of the other to give priority to the other. The sound output is executed by setting the second priority period (priority is given to the sound output from the speaker R before and after the timing t4f in FIG. 134 (3)) in which the notification is prioritized over one notification as the overlapping period (FIG. 134). See (3) and (4)).

(9) Even if the game machine 10 has a main body (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front surface (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15). Good), a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C). ), Setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112). , The notification control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300, the notification device). The front portion is pivotally attached to the front side of the main body portion with one side as an axis so as to be openable and closable. The first sound output unit is provided on the shaft attachment side of the front surface portion. The second sound output unit is provided on the open end side of the front surface portion. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means notifies the setting change and the game information clear, the second sound output unit performs either the setting change notification or the game information clear notification (FIGS. 128, FIG. 129, see FIGS. 143 to 145).

(10) The game machine 10 may have a main body (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front surface (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15). Good), a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C). ), Setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112). , The notification control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300, the notification device). The front portion is pivotally attached to the front side of the main body portion with one side as an axis so as to be openable and closable. The first sound output unit is provided on the shaft attachment side of the front surface portion. The second sound output unit is provided on the open end side of the front surface portion. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means performs notification regarding setting change and notification regarding clearing of game information between the first sound output unit and the second sound output unit, the first sound output unit is set as the first notification mode. The second sound output unit has a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (see FIGS. 128, 129, 143 to 145).

(11) The game information of (9) or (10) includes setting information.
(12) The game machine 10 may have a main body portion (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front portion (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15). Good), a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C). ), Setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112). , The notification control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300, the notification device). The front portion is pivotally attached to the front side of the main body portion with one side as an axis so as to be openable and closable. The first sound output unit is provided on the shaft attachment side of the front surface portion. The second sound output unit is provided on the open end side of the front surface portion. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means notifies the setting change and clears the game information, either the notification regarding the setting change or the notification regarding the clearing of the game information is performed in the second sound output unit in the open state where the front portion is open. One of them is set to the priority notification state (see FIGS. 128, 129, 143 to 145).

(13) The game machine 10 may have a main body portion (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front portion (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15). Good), a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C). ), Setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112). , The notification control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300, the notification device). The front portion is pivotally attached to the front side of the main body portion with one side as an axis so as to be openable and closable. The first sound output unit is provided on the shaft attachment side of the front surface portion. The second sound output unit is provided on the open end side of the front surface portion. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means performs notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding clearing of game information in an open state in which the front portion is open, the first sound output unit and the second sound output unit are set to the first notification mode. Then, when the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the clearing of the game information are performed in the closed state where the front portion is blocked, the first sound output unit and the second sound output unit are different from the first notification mode. 2 is the notification mode (see FIGS. 128, 129, 143 to 145).

(14) The game machine 10 includes a game control means (game control device 100) and an effect control means (effect control device 300). The game control means controls the game. The effect control means receives a command from the game control means and controls the effect means (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, board effect device 44, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.). The game control means includes an information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C), a setting means (for example, a game control device 100, a set value change switch 126, a setting key switch 127, and a probability set value display device 136). A clearing means (for example, a game control device 100, a RAM initialization switch 112) and a notification means (CPU unit 110, output unit 130) are included. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification means notifies the effect control means by the first command (for example, RAM clear command) that the game information has been cleared, and the second command (for example, probability) that the game performance setting has been changed. Notify the effect control means by the setting confirmation command). The effect control means includes a first notification means, a second notification means, and a notification timing control means. The first notifying means receives the first command and notifies by the directing means that the game information has been cleared. The second notifying means receives the second command and notifies by the directing means that the setting of the game performance has been changed. When the notification timing control means receives the first command, the notification timing control means changes the execution timing of the first notification means according to whether or not the second command is received (see FIGS. 137 to 139).

(15) The game machine 10 includes a game control means (game control device 100) and an effect control means (effect control device 300). The game control means controls the game. The effect control means receives a command from the game control means and controls the effect means (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, board effect device 44, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.). The game control means includes an information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C), a setting means (for example, a game control device 100, a set value change switch 126, a setting key switch 127, and a probability set value display device 136). A clearing means (for example, a game control device 100, a RAM initialization switch 112) and a notification means (CPU unit 110, output unit 130) are included. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification means notifies the effect control means by the first command (for example, RAM clear command) that the game information has been cleared, and the second command (for example, probability) that the game performance setting is being changed. Notify the effect control means by the setting confirmation command). The effect control means includes a first notification means, a second notification means, and a notification timing control means. The first notifying means receives the first command and notifies by the directing means that the game information has been cleared. The second notifying means receives the second command and notifies by the effecting means that the setting of the game performance is being changed. When the notification timing control means receives the first command, the notification timing control means changes the execution timing of the first notification means according to whether or not the second command is received (see FIGS. 137 to 139).

(16) The notification timing control means of (14) or (15) changes the execution start timing of the first notification means (see FIGS. 137 (1) and (3)).
(17) The notification timing control means of (14) or (15) changes the execution period of the first notification means (see FIGS. 137 (1), (2), and (3)).

[Eighth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment displays the detected error in the first display area of the display device when it belongs to the first category, and the detected error belongs to the second category different from the first category. Sometimes it is displayed in the second display area of the display device. Further, the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment displays the detected error in the second display area of the display device when it belongs to a second category different from the first category, and displays the first display area or the second display. When displaying two or more errors in an area, the two or more errors are displayed in a cascading display arranged in a predetermined order. As a result, the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment can quickly deal with errors even when a plurality of errors are duplicated.

First, the error display screen of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a normal time and a display screen in which an error is occurring according to the eighth embodiment.

The display screen 868 shown in FIG. 146 (1) is a normal display screen in the display device 41, and is, for example, a display screen in which the symbol is stopped and displayed before the start of the fluctuation in the variation display game. The display screen 868 displays the large symbol group 501, the small symbol group 502, the special figure 1 hold number display 503, the special figure 2 hold number display 504, the hold display 505, and the hold digestion display 506. The display screen 868 includes a first display area 870 for displaying errors belonging to the first category and a second display area 880 for displaying errors belonging to the second category. However, since the display screen 868 is in a state in which no error has occurred, the display contents related to the error are not included in the first display area 870 and the second display area 880.

The display screen 869 shown in FIG. 146 (2) is a display screen in which an error is occurring in the display device 41. The display screen 869 displays errors 8701, 8702, 8703 belonging to the first category in the first display area 870. Further, the display screen 869 displays an error 8801 belonging to the second category in the second display area 880.

When displaying two or more errors, for example, errors 8701, 8702, 8703 in the first display area 870, the game machine 10 performs a cascade display in which two or more errors are superimposed and displayed at slightly shifted positions. As a result, the game machine 10 makes it possible to easily grasp the number of errors occurring at the same time, and secures sufficient distinctiveness for the errors located in the foreground. For example, when multiple errors belonging to the first category occur, the gaming machine 10 displays the error that should call the most attention to the notification target person in the foreground. The same applies when the gaming machine 10 displays two or more errors in the second display area 880.

Further, when the gaming machine 10 displays only one error, for example, error 8801 (overflow error) in the second display area 880, the error is displayed with sufficient distinguishability. The same applies when the gaming machine 10 displays only one error in the first display area 870.

Compared to the second display area 880, the first display area 870 overlaps with many of the display elements in the variable display game on the front side thereof, so that an error having a higher importance (or urgency) is displayed. It has an aspect as a display area. For example, the first display area 870 is displayed so as to overlap the large symbol group 501, the hold display 505, and the hold digestion display 506, but the second display area 880 is only displayed so as to overlap the large symbol group 501. .. The game machine 10 displays the small symbol group 502, the special figure 1 hold number display 503, and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 at positions that do not overlap with either the first display area 870 or the second display area 880. Sufficient visibility is ensured and the player is prevented from causing an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, the error belonging to the first category and the error belonging to the second category will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of an error category for each error in the eighth embodiment.

The game machine 10 prepares various errors. The game machine 10 classifies errors by type and sets priorities and error categories. For example, in the error notification by sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the game machine 10 notifies an error having a high priority in preference to an error having a low priority. Further, in the error notification by the display output of the display device 41, the game machine 10 notifies the error having a high priority for each error category with priority over the error having a low priority.

There are two types of errors related to "power on": "RAM initialization" and "power failure recovery". "RAM initialization (priority" 1 ")" is the error with the highest priority, and is to be notified in preference to other errors. On the other hand, "power failure recovery (priority" 16 ")" is an error having the lowest priority, and is subordinated to other errors to be notified.

An error related to the type "illegal" is an error notified when an event that hinders a fair game is detected, and in descending order of priority, "large winning opening fraudulent winning error (priority" 2 ")", "general". Electric fraudulent winning error (priority "3") "," magnetic error (priority "4") "," board radio error (priority "5") "," frame radio error (priority "6") " , "Strong error reservation (priority" 7 ")".

The error related to the type "door opening" is the error with the highest priority next to the type "illegal", and is "front frame opening error (priority" 8 ")" and "game frame opening error (priority" 9 "). There is. The "front frame opening error" is an error that is output by detecting the opening of the glass frame 15, and the "game frame opening error" is an error that is output by detecting the opening of the front frame 12.

The errors related to the type "mechanism" are the errors with the highest priority next to the type "door open", and in descending order of priority, "start port error (priority" 10 ")" and "switch error error (priority)". There are "11") "and" weak error reservation (priority "12") ".

The error related to the type "payout" is the error with the highest priority next to the type "mechanism", and in descending order of priority, "shoot ball out error (priority" 13 ")", "overflow error (priority" 14 ")" and "Payout error (priority" 15 ")".

The strong error reservation and the weak error reservation are reservation errors for future error type expansion. The game machine 10 secures the expandability of future errors by reserving errors having different intensities in advance.

"RAM initialization" and "power failure recovery" belong to the error category "0", and "large winning opening illegal winning error", "general electric illegal winning error", "magnetic error", "board radio wave error", "frame" "Radio error" and "strong error reservation" belong to the error category "1", and "front frame opening error", "game frame opening error", "starting port error", "switch error error", "weak error reservation" , "Shoot ball out error", "Overflow error", and "Payout error" belong to the error category "2".

The error category "1" corresponds to the first category to be displayed in the first display area 870, and the error category "2" corresponds to the second category to be displayed in the second display area 880. The error category "0" is an error category to which an error to be displayed belongs independently of the first display area 870 and the second display area 880.

In this way, the game machine 10 classifies the error categories according to the priority order and displays the errors for each category, so that the error handling procedure can be easily understood and shown to the observer. For example, when "overflow error", "large winning opening illegal winning error", "board radio wave error", and "frame radio wave error" occur in duplicate, if all the errors are displayed so that they can be observed at the same time, the observer will see. It takes time to grasp the contents, and on the contrary, it may take time to deal with the error. However, the game machine 10 displays "overflow error", "large winning opening illegal winning error", "board radio wave error", and "frame radio wave error" as shown on the display screen 869.

As a result, the game machine 10 has three errors having a high priority from the display contents of the first display area 870, and the error to be dealt with with the highest priority is the "large winning opening illegal winning error". It is possible to easily make an observer (for example, a game hall clerk, a player, etc.) grasp that there is one error having a low priority from the display contents of the second display area 880. Therefore, the game machine 10 makes it possible to quickly deal with errors (for example, cancel errors) even when a plurality of errors are duplicated.

The game machine 10 is not limited to classifying error categories according to priorities, but may also classify error categories according to other criteria. Here, a modified example of the error category classification will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of an error category for each error in the modified example of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of an error category for each error in the modified example of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of an error category for each error in the modified example of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example (No. 4) of an error category for each error in the modified example of the eighth embodiment.

In the error category classification shown in FIG. 148, errors related to the type "power on" are classified into error category "0", and among the remaining errors, errors with external information output are classified into error category "1", and externally. Errors with no information output are classified into error category "2".

That is, "RAM initialization" and "power failure recovery" belong to the error category "0", and "large winning opening illegal winning error", "general electric illegal winning error", "magnetic error", "board radio wave error", "Frame radio error", "strong error reservation", "front frame opening error", and "game frame opening error" belong to the error category "1", and are "starting port error", "switch abnormality error", and "weak". "Error reservation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "payout error" belong to the error category "2".

The error category "1" corresponds to the first category to be displayed in the first display area 870, and the error category "2" corresponds to the second category to be displayed in the second display area 880. The error category "0" is an error category to which an error to be displayed belongs independently of the first display area 870 and the second display area 880.

The external information output is a signal output to the outside of the game machine 10 via the external information terminal board 71. Usually, the game hall staff can know that there is external information output from the game machine 10 via the hall equipment. The game machine 10 can confirm the abnormality notified by the external information output by having the game hall staff confirm the display contents of the first display area 870.

In this way, the game machine 10 classifies error categories according to the presence or absence of external information output, and displays errors for each category so that the error handling procedure can be easily understood and shown to the observer. An error with external information output is an error that requires an urgent response by a game hall staff member, and an error without an external information output is an error that does not require an urgent response by a game hall staff member. For example, for an error belonging to the type "illegal" such as "large winning opening fraudulent winning error", it is indispensable for the game hall staff to deal with it in order to ensure a fair game. On the other hand, the "overflow error" may be sufficient to alert the player and may not require the action of the game hall staff.

In the error category classification shown in FIG. 149, errors related to the type "power on" are classified into error category "0", and among the remaining errors, errors with sound (notification sound) output are classified into error category "1". Then, an error with no sound output is classified into an error category "2".

That is, "RAM initialization" and "power failure recovery" belong to the error category "0", and "large winning opening illegal winning error", "general electric illegal winning error", "magnetic error", "board radio wave error", "Frame radio error", "strong error reservation", "front frame opening error", and "game frame opening error" belong to the error category "1", and are "starting port error", "switch abnormality error", and "weak". "Error reservation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "payout error" belong to the error category "2".

The error category "1" corresponds to the first category to be displayed in the first display area 870, and the error category "2" corresponds to the second category to be displayed in the second display area 880. The error category "0" is an error category to which an error to be displayed belongs independently of the first display area 870 and the second display area 880.

The sound output is a notification sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and includes an alarm sound, a voice message, and the like in the output content. The game machine 10 notifies the surroundings of an abnormality by emitting a notification sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. The gaming machine 10 outputs the notification sound of the error having a high priority in preference to the notification sound of the error having a low priority. The game machine 10 can make all the abnormalities confirmed by having the game hall staff detect the abnormalities from the notification sound and confirm the display contents of the first display area 870.

In this way, the game machine 10 classifies the error categories according to the presence or absence of sound output, and displays the errors for each category, so that the error handling procedure can be easily understood and shown to the observer. An error with a sound output is an error that requires an urgent response by a game hall staff member, and an error without a sound output is an error that does not require an urgent response by a game hall staff member. For example, for an error belonging to the type "illegal" such as "large winning opening fraudulent winning error", it is indispensable for the game hall staff to deal with it in order to ensure a fair game. On the other hand, the "overflow error" may be sufficient to alert the player and may not require the action of the game hall staff.

Although the error category is classified according to the presence or absence of sound output, it may be classified according to the type of output target speaker. For example, the error output from the upper speaker (speaker 19a) may be classified into the error category "1", and the error output from the lower speaker (speaker 19b) may be classified into the error category "2". ..

Further, although the error category is classified according to the presence / absence of sound output, it is classified according to the presence / absence of notification output by other notification devices (for example, board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18, etc.) such as the presence / absence of lamp output. It may be one.

In the error category classification shown in FIG. 150, errors that require no special action (errors related to the type "power-on") are classified into error category "0", and the responder is the administrator among the remaining errors. (For example, a game hall clerk, etc.) is classified into an error category "1", and an error in which the corresponding person is a player is classified into an error category "2".

That is, "RAM initialization" and "power failure recovery" belong to the error category "0", and "large winning opening illegal winning error", "general electric illegal winning error", "magnetic error", "board radio wave error", "Frame radio error", "Strong error reservation", "Front frame opening error", "Game frame opening error", "Starting port error", "Switch error error", "Weak error reservation", "Shoot ball out error" , And "Payout error" belong to the error category "1", and "Overflow error" belongs to the error category "2".

The error category "1" corresponds to the first category to be displayed in the first display area 870, and the error category "2" corresponds to the second category to be displayed in the second display area 880. The error category "0" is an error category to which an error to be displayed belongs independently of the first display area 870 and the second display area 880.

An error that requires only confirmation and does not require any special action is an error that is notified of the occurrence of an event such as RAM initialization or power failure recovery, but is cleared after a lapse of a predetermined time. An error in which the responder becomes the administrator is an error that prompts the administrator to resolve the cause of the error. An error in which the responder is a player is an error that prompts the player to eliminate the cause of the error. For example, for an error belonging to the type "illegal" such as "large winning opening fraudulent winning error", it is indispensable for the game hall staff to resolve the cause of the error. On the other hand, the "overflow error" can be resolved by the player performing a ball pulling operation by alerting the player.

In this way, the game machine 10 classifies error categories according to the type of responder and displays the error for each category so that the error response procedure and the target person can be easily understood and shown to the observer. it can.

In the error category classification shown in FIG. 151, the error related to the type "power on" is classified into the error category "0", and the error in which the subject of the error detection is the game control device 100 is classified into the error category "1". An error in which the main body of detection is the effect control device 300 is classified into an error category "2".

The game machine 10 prepares an error in which the main body of error detection is the effect control device 300, in addition to the error in which the main body of error detection shown in FIG. 147 and others is the game control device 100. The game machine 10 includes an error related to the type "wiring" and an error related to the type "mechanism" as errors in which the main body of error detection is the effect control device 300.

The game machine 10 sets the priority order subordinated to the error in which the main body of error detection is the effect control device 300 to the error in which the main body of error detection is the effect control device 300. For example, in the game machine 10, the priority order "1" to "16" is set for the error in which the main body of the error detection is the effect control device 300 as in the error shown in FIG. 147 and others, and the main body of the error detection produces the effect. The priority order "17" to "20" is set for the error of the control device 300.

There are two types of errors related to the type "wiring": "connector disconnection 1 (priority order" 17 ")" and "connector disconnection 2 (priority order" 18 ")". For example, "connector disconnection 1" indicates an error in which the connection of one of the connectors connected to the effect control device 300 (for example, the connector connected to the relay board relaying to the lamp board) cannot be confirmed. Further, "connector disconnection 2" indicates an error in which the connection of one of the connectors connected to the effect control device 300 (for example, the connector connected to the relay board relayed to the board effect device 44) cannot be confirmed.

There are two types of errors related to the type "mechanism": "operation abnormality 1 (priority order" 19 ")" and "operation abnormality 2 (priority order" 20 ")". For example, "operation abnormality 1" indicates an error in which the operation state (presence or absence of operation, confirmation of initial position, etc.) of one of the mechanisms (for example, the rotation mechanism) included in the board effect device 44 cannot be confirmed. Further, "operation abnormality 2" indicates an error in which the operation state (presence or absence of operation, confirmation of initial position, etc.) of one of the mechanisms (for example, the slide mechanism) included in the board effect device 44 cannot be confirmed.

That is, "RAM initialization" and "power failure recovery" belong to the error category "0", and "large winning opening illegal winning error", "general electric illegal winning error", "magnetic error", "board radio wave error", "Frame radio error", "Strong error reservation", "Front frame opening error", "Game frame opening error", "Starting port error", "Switch error error", "Weak error reservation", "Shoot ball out error" , "Overflow error", and "Disbursement error error" belong to the error category "1", and "Connector missing 1", "Connector missing 2", "Operation error 1", and "Operation error 2" belong to the error category. It belongs to "2".

The error category "1" corresponds to the first category to be displayed in the first display area 870, and the error category "2" corresponds to the second category to be displayed in the second display area 880. The error category "0" is an error category to which an error to be displayed belongs independently of the first display area 870 and the second display area 880.

In this way, the game machine 10 classifies the error categories according to the error detection subject and displays the error for each category, so that the error detection subject can be easily understood and shown to the observer.

Next, the display position and the sound output for each error category will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a display position and a sound output for each error category of the eighth embodiment.

The error belonging to the error category "1" is an error in which the display position is set to the first display area 870, and is displayed as the window B in the first display area 870. The error belonging to the error category "2" is an error in which the display position is set to the second display area 880, and is displayed as the window C in the second display area 880. An error belonging to the error category "0" is an error in which the display position is set in a display area independent of the first display area 870 and the second display area 880, and is displayed as a window A in the independent display area. If duplicate errors occur in each category, the duplicate errors in each category are displayed by the cascade display of the corresponding window.

Further, the error belonging to the error category "0" has priority over the error in which the sound output of the notification sound belongs to the error category "1" and the error belonging to the error category "2". That is, even if an error belonging to the error category "1" and an error belonging to the error category "2" occur while the game machine 10 is outputting the notification sound of the error belonging to the error category "0", the error category "1" The notification sound of the error belonging to the error category "0" is continuously output without outputting the notification sound of the error belonging to the error category "2" and without outputting the notification sound of the error belonging to the error category "2". Note that the error belonging to the error category "0" is always the highest-level error and there is no non-top-level error because "RAM initialization" and "power failure recovery" do not occur at the same time.

Further, the error belonging to the error category "1" is inferior to the error belonging to the error category "0" in the sound output of the notification sound, and takes precedence over the error belonging to the error category "2". That is, the game machine 10 does not output the notification sound of the error belonging to the error category "1" when an error belonging to the error category "0" occurs while outputting the notification sound of the error belonging to the error category "1". However, when an error belonging to the error category "2" occurs, the notification sound output of the error belonging to the error category "1" is continued. If errors belonging to the error category "1" occur in duplicate, the notification sound of the highest-level error is output and the notification sound of the non-top-level error is not output (non-output). ..

Further, the error belonging to the error category "2" is inferior to the error in which the sound output of the notification sound belongs to the error category "0" and the error belonging to the error category "1". That is, when the game machine 10 outputs an error notification sound belonging to the error category "2" and an error belonging to the error category "0" or an error belonging to the error category "1" occurs, the error category "2" The notification sound of the error belonging to is not output. If errors belonging to the error category "2" occur in duplicate, the notification sound of the highest-level error is output and the notification sound of the non-top-level error is not output (non-output). ..

The game machine 10 can change the sound output mode according to the overlapping state of errors. As a result, the game machine 10 can notify the observer of the overlapping state of the error by the sound output mode of the error notification sound. The sound output mode for each error category will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of a sound output mode for each error category of the eighth embodiment.

In the game machine 10, as the error notification sound belonging to the error category "0", the error belonging to the error category "0" has priority over the error belonging to another category, and the error belonging to the same category is not duplicated. Only one sound output mode A is prepared. For example, the sound output mode A includes a predetermined alarm sound and a voice message.

Further, the game machine 10 prepares a sound output mode B1 as an error notification sound belonging to the error category "1" when no other error has occurred, and sounds when there are duplicate errors belonging to the same category. The output mode B2 is prepared, and the sound output mode B3 is prepared when an error occurs in the lower category (error category “2”). When the errors belonging to the error category "1" are duplicated, the game machine 10 targets the highest-level error as the sound output target and does not target the non-top-level error as the sound output target. The sound output modes B1, B2, and B3 all include a predetermined alarm sound and a voice message, and have different sound output modes. For example, the sound output mode B1 is a voice message by the voice of the character A appearing in the game production, and the sound output mode B2 is a voice message by the voice of the character B appearing in the game production, and the sound output mode B3. Is a voice message by the voice of the character C appearing in the game production. As a result, the game machine 10 can make the observer aware of the existence of an error that overlaps with the error belonging to the error category "1" depending on which character's voice message is used.

Further, the game machine 10 prepares a sound output mode C1 as an error notification sound belonging to the error category "2" when no other error has occurred, and sounds when there are duplicate errors belonging to the same category. Output mode C2 is prepared. When the errors belonging to the error category "2" are duplicated, the game machine 10 targets the highest-level error as the sound output target and does not target the non-top-level error as the sound output target. Each of the sound output modes C1 and C2 includes a predetermined alarm sound and a voice message, and has different sound output modes. For example, the sound output mode C1 is a voice message by the voice of the character A appearing in the game production, and the sound output mode C2 is a voice message by the voice of the character B appearing in the game production. As a result, the game machine 10 can make the observer aware of the existence of an error that overlaps with the error belonging to the error category "2" depending on which character's voice message is used.

In this way, the game machine 10 can guide the presence or absence of a duplicate error depending on the difference in the sound output mode. Such a game machine 10 contributes to improving the workability of error cancellation when the display content of the display device 41 cannot be confirmed, such as during work involving opening of the front frame 12.

In the game machine 10, the difference in the sound output mode is represented by the characters appearing in the game production, but if the difference in the sound output mode can be recognized, the volume, tempo, alarm sound, voice message, etc. It may be represented by a difference in other factors or the like.

Although the game machine 10 is supposed to change the sound output mode according to the overlapping state of errors, the sound output device may be changed according to the overlapping state of errors. Here, a modified example of the error duplication state notification will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a sound output device for each error category of the modified example of the eighth embodiment.

The game machine 10 includes a plurality of sound output devices. Specifically, the game machine 10 includes speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b on the front side of the front frame 12 (see FIG. 126). The speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R) are provided on the upper portion of the front frame 12 (see FIG. 1), the speaker 19a (L) is provided on the left side when viewed from the front side of the front frame 12, and the speaker 19a (L) is provided on the right side. R) is provided. Further, the speaker 19b is provided at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and above the operation unit 24 (see FIG. 1). The speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b can output sound independently.

In the game machine 10, when an error belonging to the error category "0" occurs, the error belonging to the error category "0" takes precedence over the error belonging to another category and there is no duplication of errors belonging to the same category. The notification sound is output from the speakers (speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), 19b) of.

Further, when an error belonging to the error category "1" occurs, the game machine 10 outputs an error notification sound from all the speakers when no other error has occurred. The game machine 10 outputs the highest error notification sound from the upper speakers (speakers 19a (L), 19a (R)) when duplicate errors belonging to the error category "1" occur, and outputs the highest error notification sound from the lower speaker (speaker 19b). Outputs a non-top error notification sound. If there are a plurality of non-top errors, the highest error among the non-top errors is the notification sound output target, and the remaining errors are not the notification sound output target.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the observer aware of the existence of an error that overlaps with the error belonging to the error category "1" depending on which speaker the notification sound is output from.

Further, when an error belonging to the error category "2" occurs, the game machine 10 outputs an error notification sound from the lower speaker when no other error has occurred, and when an error belonging to the error category "2" occurs in duplicate. The highest error notification sound is output from the lower speaker, and the non-top error notification sound is not output. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can sequentially make the observer aware of the errors belonging to the error category “2”. Further, since the game machine 10 does not output the error notification sound from the upper speaker when an error belonging to the error category "2" occurs, the game machine 10 can output the error notification sound in parallel with the game effect (effect sound output).

In this way, the game machine 10 can guide the presence / absence of duplicate errors and the error priority order depending on the difference in the sound output device. Such a game machine 10 contributes to improving the workability of error cancellation when the display content of the display device 41 cannot be confirmed, such as during work involving opening of the front frame 12.

Next, the abnormality notification mode determination process of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the abnormality notification mode determination process of the eighth embodiment. The abnormality notification mode determination process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in the loop process of steps D18 to D31 of the main process (see FIG. 49).

[Step D351] The control unit collects abnormality information. The control unit can collect abnormality information by receiving a one-shot command transmitted from the game control device 100. Abnormal information is information related to the occurrence or resolution of an error. The control unit can also include the error detected by the effect control device 300 in the collection target of the abnormality information.

[Step D352] The control unit determines from the collected abnormality information whether or not there is an abnormality to be notified. The control unit proceeds to step D353 when there is an abnormality to be notified, and ends the abnormality notification mode determination process when there is no abnormality to be notified.

[Step D353] The control unit classifies the errors that are occurring into categories. For example, the control unit can refer to a table as shown in FIG. 147 to determine an error category for each error and classify the error being generated by category.

[Step D354] When a plurality of errors occur in the same category, the control unit arranges the occurring errors in a predetermined order (for example, an order according to the priority order) and determines the highest order for each category.

[Step D355] The control unit sets the display mode for each category in the display device 41 according to the alignment result for each category.
[Step D356] The control unit sets the sound output modes for each category in the speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b according to the alignment results for each category, and ends the abnormality notification mode determination process.

As a result, the game machine 10 can perform display output and sound output related to error notification after classifying the errors that are occurring into categories.
Next, a display example of the error display area (for example, the first display area 870 and the second display area 880) in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of the error display mode of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of the error display mode of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of the error display mode of the eighth embodiment.

The display device 41 includes a first display area 870, a second display area 880, and a third display area 890. The first display area 870 is a display area for displaying errors belonging to the error category "1", and the second display area 880 is a display area for displaying errors belonging to the error category "2", and the third display area is a third display area. 890 is a display area for displaying an error belonging to the error category “0”.

First, an error display area in a state where no error has occurred will be described. As shown in FIG. 156 (1), the first display area 870 and the second display area 880 are in a positional relationship so as not to overlap with each other, and the third display area 890 is the first display area 870 and the first display area 870. 2 There is a positional relationship having an area overlapping with the display area 880. For example, the first display area 870 and the second display area 880 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction with a predetermined gap, and the third display area 890 includes the first display area 870 and the second display area 880. It is placed in the center so as to straddle. The first display area 870, the second display area 880, and the third display area 890 do not display an error notification in a state where no error has occurred. The first display area 870, the second display area 880, and the third display area 890 are displayed in preference to the display related to the game effect, as shown in FIG. 136.

Next, an error display area in a state where only one error belonging to the error category "0" has occurred will be described. As shown in FIG. 156 (2), when an error belonging to the error category "0", for example, "RAM initialization" occurs, the game machine 10 displays an error window 8901 corresponding to "RAM initialization" as a third display. Display in area 890. The error window 8901 is a rectangle and displays an error message and a model code. The error message is a message notifying the initialization of the RAM (for example, "RAM cleared"), and the model code is information that can identify the model (series machine) (for example, the code "01"). At this time, the game machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the third display area 890.

Next, an error display area in a state where only one error belonging to the error category "1" has occurred will be described. As shown in FIG. 156 (3), when an error belonging to the error category "1", for example, "large winning opening illegal winning error" occurs, the gaming machine 10 has an error corresponding to "large winning opening illegal winning error". The window 8701 is displayed in the first display area 870. The error window 8701 is rectangular and displays an error message. The error message is a message notifying the illegal winning of the winning opening (for example, "illegal winning error of the winning opening"). At this time, the game machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the first display area 870.

Next, an error display area in a state where only one error belonging to the error category "2" has occurred will be described. As shown in FIG. 157 (1), when an error belonging to the error category “2”, for example, an “overflow error” occurs, the gaming machine 10 displays an error window 8801 corresponding to the “overflow error” in the second display area 880. Display in. The error window 8801 is rectangular and displays an error message. The error message is a message notifying the overflow (for example, "overflow error"). At this time, the game machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the second display area 880.

Next, an error display area in a state in which one error belonging to the error category “1” and one error belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated will be described. As shown in FIG. 157 (2), the gaming machine 10 displays an error window 8701 corresponding to an error belonging to the error category “1” (for example, “large winning opening illegal winning error”) in the first display area 870. , The error window 8801 corresponding to the error belonging to the error category "2" (for example, "overflow error") is displayed in the second display area 880. At this time, the game machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the first display area 870.

Next, an error display area in a state where two errors belonging to the error category "2" are duplicated will be described. As shown in FIG. 157 (3), the gaming machine 10 corresponds to an "overflow error" when two errors belonging to the error category "2", for example, an "overflow error" and a "payout abnormality error" occur. The error window 8801 and the error window 8802 corresponding to the "payout abnormality error" are cascaded in the second display area 880.

At this time, the game machine 10 displays an error window 8801 corresponding to the "overflow error" having the higher priority among the "overflow error (priority" 14 ")" and the "payout abnormality error (priority" 15 ")". It is displayed in front of the error window 8802 corresponding to the "payout abnormality error". At this time, the game machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error window 8801 displayed on the front side in the second display area 880.

As a result, the game machine 10 informs the observer that two errors belonging to the error category "2" have occurred in duplicate, and has better visibility than the "payout abnormality error". It informs that "overflow error" is a high priority error. The visibility of the rear window (for example, the error window 8802) of the two windows may be identified by displaying a part of the message so that it can be identified when carefully observed. It may be unspecified so as not to impose an unnecessary burden on the person.

Even in a state where two errors belonging to the error category "1" occur in duplicate, it can be the same as in a state in which two errors belonging to the error category "2" occur in duplicate. ..

If the "payout abnormality error" occurs while the "overflow error" shown in FIG. 157 (1) has occurred, the "payout abnormality error" that occurs later is the back side of the "overflow error". It became. This is because the "payout error" has a lower priority than the "overflow error".

On the other hand, when an error having a higher priority than the "overflow error" occurs while the "overflow error" shown in FIG. 157 (1) has occurred, as shown in FIG. 158 (1). become. That is, the game machine 10 has a "shoot ball out error (priority)" belonging to the error category "2" in a state where the "overflow error (priority" 14 ")" belonging to the error category "2" has occurred first. When "13") "occurs, the error window 8801 corresponding to the" overflow error "and the error window 8803 corresponding to the" shoot ball out error "are cascaded in the second display area 880.

At this time, the game machine 10 changes the error window 8803 corresponding to the "shoot ball out error" having the higher priority among the "overflow error" and the "shoot ball out error" to the error window 8801 corresponding to the "overflow error". Display on the front. At this time, the game machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error window 8803 displayed on the front side in the second display area 880.

As a result, the game machine 10 informs the observer that two errors belonging to the error category "2" have occurred in duplicate, and has a visibility more suitable than the "overflow error". We will inform you that "shoot ball out error" is a high priority error. The visibility of the rear window (for example, the error window 8801) of the two windows may be identified by displaying a part of the message so that it can be identified when carefully observed. It may be unspecified so as not to impose an unnecessary burden on the person.

Even in a state where two errors belonging to the error category "1" occur in duplicate, it can be the same as in a state in which two errors belonging to the error category "2" occur in duplicate. ..

Next, an error display area in a state in which three errors belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated will be described. As shown in FIG. 158 (2), when three errors belonging to the error category "2", for example, "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "payout error" occur, the game machine 10 causes. The error window 8801 corresponding to the "overflow error", the error window 8802 corresponding to the "payout abnormality error", and the error window 8803 corresponding to the "shoot ball out error" are cascaded in the second display area 880.

In this way, even if three errors belonging to the error category "2" are duplicated, the game machine 10 can be made in the same manner as when two errors belonging to the error category "2" are duplicated. The same can be applied when four or more errors belonging to the error category "2" are duplicated.

Even in a state where two errors belonging to the error category "1" occur in duplicate, it can be the same as in a state in which two errors belonging to the error category "2" occur in duplicate. ..

Next, a modified example of the error display area in which three errors belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated will be described. As shown in FIG. 158 (3), when three errors belonging to the error category "2", for example, "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "payout error" occur, the game machine 10 causes. The error window 8805 corresponding to the "shoot ball out error", the error window 8806 corresponding to the "overflow error", and the error window 8807 corresponding to the "payout abnormality error" are cascaded in the second display area 880.

At this time, the error windows 8806 and 8807 may not ensure the visibility of a part of the message in the error window. Instead of the visibility of the message that cannot be secured due to the duplicate display of a large number of windows, or in addition, the display mode of the windows is different for each error to assist the identification of the error. For example, the error window 8805 is displayed with a first background color (single diagonal line hatching), the error window 8806 is displayed with a second background color (crossed diagonal line hatching), and the error window 8807 is displayed with a third background color. It is displayed in (dark color display). As a result, the game machine 10 can easily grasp the number of error windows that are displayed in duplicate. Further, the gaming machine 10 can make it possible to identify the duplicated error by preparing a unique background color (display mode) for each error. The display mode for assisting the identification of the error is not limited to the background color, but may be a pattern, a shape (for example, the position of the index tag) or the like.

In the eighth embodiment, the priority of errors is defined in advance as shown in FIG. 147, but as a modification, the priority of errors may be determined after the fact without being defined in advance. For example, the priority may be determined according to the error occurrence order, or the priority may be determined according to the recommended error clearing order. For example, when it is necessary to open the front frame 11 for error release, a "front frame open error" may occur as a new error during the error release operation that occurred earlier. Prioritizing the error notification in which such an "front frame opening error" occurs first, the workability of error cancellation may be reduced. Such a game machine 10 can suppress a decrease in workability of error cancellation by flexibly determining a priority.

It is assumed that the display device 41 includes all of the first display area 870, the second display area 880, and the third display area 890, but two or more display devices include the first display area 870 and the second display area 880. The third display area 890 may be shared and included. For example, the first display device may include two of the first display area 870, the second display area 880, and the third display area 890, and the second display device may include the remainder. Further, the first display device, the second display device, and the third display device may include the first display area 870, the second display area 880, and the third display area 890, respectively.

Next, a modified example of the error display that makes it possible to identify all the errors that are occurring at the same time even if a plurality of errors are duplicated will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of the error display mode of the modified example of the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 159 (1), the game machine 10 assigns a unique bit for each error. For example, in the game machine 10, the bits "0" to the bit "15" are sequentially ordered from "RAM initialization", "large winning opening illegal winning error", "Public electric winning illegal winning error", "magnetic error", and "board". "Radio error", "Frame radio error", "Strong error reservation", "Front frame opening error", "Game frame opening error", "Starting port error", "Switch error error", "Weak error reservation", "Shoot" Allocate one bit at a time to "ball out error", "overflow error", "payout error", and "power failure recovery".

Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (1), "large winning opening illegal winning error", "magnetic error", "board radio wave error", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "payout abnormality error". When the six errors of the above are duplicated, the game machine 10 displays the error windows 8721, 8722, 8723 in the first display area 870, and displays the error windows 8821, 8822, 8823 in the second display area 880. .. At this time, the game machine 10 secures the visibility of the error window 8721 by displaying the error window 8721 in the foreground in the first display area 870, but does not secure sufficient visibility for the error windows 8722 and 8723. .. In such a display state, the observer can confirm the occurrence of the "large winning opening illegal winning error" and the existence of two errors hidden there, but when the error windows overlap, the number is grasped. Is not easy.

Further, the game machine 10 secures the visibility of the error window 8821 by displaying the error window 8821 in the foreground in the second display area 880, but does not secure sufficient visibility for the error windows 8822 and 8823. In such a display state, the observer can confirm the occurrence of the "shoot ball out error" and the existence of two errors hidden there, but it is easy to grasp the number when the error windows overlap. Not.

Therefore, the game machine 10 sets the bit specific to the error being generated to "1" and sets the bit specific to the error not occurring to "0" to align them, and obtains the binary number "0101100000001110B". The game machine 10 converts the binary number "0101100000001110B" into the hexadecimal number "580EH" and sets it as the error code "580E". The game machine 10 displays the error code display 900 so as to straddle the first display area 870 and the second display area 880.

As a result, the game machine 10 can make the observer aware of all the errors that are occurring. Although the game machine 10 is assigned a unique bit for each error, it may be assigned a unique bit for each error in each error category. In that case, the game machine 10 may display an error code in each error category. Further, the game machine 10 is supposed to display an error code in hexadecimal notation, but the present invention is not limited to this as long as it makes it possible to grasp all the errors occurring, and even if it is a character code, a character code, or the like. Good.

Next, if an error having the same error category as the error occurring earlier and having a lower priority occurs later, the error occurring later may not ensure sufficient visibility. Therefore, a modified example of the error display that can ensure the visibility of the error that occurs later will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of the error display mode of the modified example of the eighth embodiment.

First, FIG. 157 (1) shows an error display area in which only one error belonging to the error category “2” has occurred. The game machine 10 displays an error window 8831 corresponding to the “overflow error” in the second display area 880.

When an "payout error" occurs as a new error while the error window 8831 corresponding to the "overflow error" is displayed in the second display area 880, the gaming machine 10 has priority as shown in FIG. 160 (2). The error window 8832 corresponding to the "payout abnormality error" is displayed on the front side of the error window 8831 corresponding to the "overflow error" regardless of the order.

The game machine 10 temporarily displays the error window 8832 on the front side of the error window 8831, and then, as shown in FIG. 160 (3), the back side of the error window 8831 corresponding to the "overflow error" according to the priority. The error window 8832 corresponding to the "payout error" is displayed in.

As a result, the game machine 10 can easily inform the observer of the change in the error occurrence status (for example, the occurrence of a new error). Note that the error window that is temporarily displayed on the front side due to a change in the error occurrence status may be different from the normal display mode to call attention. For example, the error window 8832 shown in FIG. 160 (2) is larger than the error window 8831, which is an enlarged display mode of the normal display mode. Further, the error window 8832 shown in FIG. 160 (2) overlaps the display position different from the normal display position, that is, the second display area 880, but also outside the second display area 880.

Next, another modification of the error display that makes it possible to identify all the errors that are occurring at the same time even if a plurality of errors are duplicated will be described with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of an error display mode of a modified example of the eighth embodiment.

First, FIG. 161 (1) shows an error display area in which three errors belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated. In the game machine 10, when three errors belonging to the error category "2", for example, "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "payout abnormality error" occur, the error window 8841 corresponding to the "overflow error" occurs. The error window 8842 corresponding to the "payout error" and the error window 8843 corresponding to the "shoot ball out error" are cascaded in the second display area 880.

In this way, when a plurality of errors belonging to the error category "2" are duplicated in the game machine 10, even if the visibility of the error window 8841 on the front is sufficiently secured, the visibility of the error windows 8842 and 8843 on the back is sufficiently secured. Sex may not be sufficiently ensured. In order to respond to the observer's request to confirm all errors in such a case, the game machine 10 accepts the operation of the push button 25 and displays the error window cascaded as shown in FIG. 161 (2). Expanded display or rotation display may be performed. Thereby, the game machine 10 can switch between a simple error display state and a detailed error display state.

Next, a modified example of the error display of the error category “0” will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example (No. 4) of an error display mode of a modified example of the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 162 (1), an error display of the first display area 870 (for example, an error window 8701 corresponding to the "large winning opening illegal winning error") and an error display of the second display area 880 (for example, "" When displaying the error window 8901 corresponding to the error belonging to the error category "0" (for example, "RAM initialization") in the third display area 890, which overlaps with the error window 8801) corresponding to the "overflow error", an error occurs. The window 8901 is displayed in the foreground in preference to the error display of the first display area 870 and the error display of the second display area 880. As a result, the game machine 10 preferably informs the execution of RAM clear even during the occurrence of other errors. At this time, the game machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the third display area 890.

As shown in FIG. 162 (2), the visibility of the error display of the first display area 870 and the error display of the second display area 880 can be ensured even during the error display of the third display area 890. May be good. For example, when displaying an error window 8911 corresponding to an error belonging to the error category "0" (for example, "RAM initialization") in the third display area 890, which overlaps with the error window 8701 or the error window 8801, an error occurs. The window 8911 is displayed at the rearmost surface, which is inferior to the error display of the first display area 870 and the error display of the second display area 880. However, the error window 8911 faces the error message and the model code, which are the main parts thereof, from the gap between the error window 8701 and the error window 8801.

When the error belonging to the error category "1" and the error belonging to the error category "2" are duplicated and the error windows are displayed in cascade, the game machine 10 displays the error window 8911 as the error window 8701 or the error window. It may be inferior to the error display of 8801 and may be displayed with priority over the error window 8701 and the error window located at the back of the error window 8801.

As a result, the game machine 10 can secure the visibility of the error display of the first display area 870, the error display of the second display area 880, and the error display of the third display area 890. At this time, the game machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the third display area 890.

Although the positions of the first display area 870, the second display area 880, and the third display area 890 shown in FIGS. 162 (1) and 162 (2) were fixed, they are shown in FIG. 162 (3). The position may be changed as follows. For example, in the game machine 10, when an error belonging to the error category "0" (for example, "RAM initialization") occurs, an error belonging to the error category "1" or an error belonging to the error category "2" occurs. In this case, the error display area belonging to the error category "0" is set as the third display area 891. The third display area 891 is arranged at a position biased to the lower left of the display area of the display device 41, and secures an empty area in the lower right of the display area of the display device 41. The game machine 10 arranges the error display area belonging to the error category "1" as the first display area 871 and the error display area belonging to the error category "2" as the second display area 881 in the free area.

At this time, the game machine 10 may be changed in size in addition to changing the positions of the first display area 871, the second display area 881, and the third display area 891. For example, the third display area 891 is larger than the third display area 890 shown in FIGS. 162 (1) and 162 (2). Further, the first display area 871 and the second display area 881 are smaller than the first display area 870 and the second display area 880 shown in FIGS. 162 (1) and 162 (2).

In this way, the game machine 10 displays the error window 8711 corresponding to the "large winning opening illegal winning error" in the first display area 871, and the error window 8811 corresponding to the "overflow error" in the second display area 881. Is displayed, and the error window 8912 corresponding to "RAM initialization" is displayed in the third display area 891.

As a result, the game machine 10 can secure the visibility of the error display in the first display area 871, the error display in the second display area 881, and the error display in the third display area 891. At this time, the game machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the third display area 891.

The gaming machine 10 may output an error notification sound that gives priority to cancellation when a plurality of errors overlap, and also displays an error window for errors that give priority to cancellation by blinking or highlighting. The mode may be different.

Next, as a modification of the eighth embodiment, application of the error window to other displays of the cascade display will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of a cascade display of a modified example of the eighth embodiment.

The display screen 895 shown in FIG. 163 (1) is a display screen at a normal time in the display device 41, and is, for example, a display screen in which a symbol is stopped and displayed before the start of fluctuation in a variation display game. The display screen 895 has a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, a hold display 551, a hold digestion display 506, and a mode display 896. 897 is displayed.

The hold display 551 can clearly indicate the number of hold memories of the special figure variation display game by the number of hold memories displayed in cascade, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold memory by the display mode for each hold memory displayed in cascade. For example, the hold display 551 notifies that the display mode of the hold memory 551a, which is the third from the top, is different from that of other hold memories, and the degree of expectation for the game result is higher than that of the other hold memories.

Further, in the mode display 896, 897, the mode display 896 located on the front side in the cascade display notifies the current game mode, and the mode display 897 located on the back side notifies the game mode to be next transitioned. The game mode referred to here may be an effect mode (for example, effect modes A, B, etc.) or a game state (for example, low accuracy state, high accuracy state, normal electric support state, etc.). May be good.

The display screen 898 shown in FIG. 163 (2) is a display screen at the time of hit (big hit) in the display device 41, and includes a round display 899 in the display contents. In the round display 899, the current number of rounds can be specified by displaying the window (for example, 5R) located in the foreground among the windows for each round displayed in cascade. Further, in the round display 899, the number of remaining rounds can be clearly indicated by the number of windows for each round displayed in cascade. For example, the display screen 898 clearly indicates that the current round is 5R and the remaining 3R, that is, up to 8R. Further, the round display 899 can guide the value of the round by changing the display mode of the window for each round displayed in cascade. For example, in the round display 899, the display mode of the hatched window 899a is different from the display mode of the other windows, the window 899a (that is, 7R) has a 10-count winning opening open, and the other windows have 1 count. It is possible to inform that the winning opening is open.

The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a display device (for example, a display device 41) and a control unit (for example, a game control device 100 and an effect control device 300). When the detected error belongs to the first category (for example, error category "1"), the control unit displays the detected error in the first display area (for example, the first display area 870) of the display device, and the detected error is the first. When it belongs to a second category (for example, error category "2") different from the first category, it is displayed in the second display area (for example, the second display area 880) of the display device, and the first display area or the second display is displayed. When displaying two or more errors in an area, the two or more errors are displayed in a cascade display arranged in a predetermined order (see FIGS. 155 to 158).

(2) The first category of (1) is errors related to fraud detection (for example, "Large winning opening fraudulent winning error", "Public electric fraud winning error", "Magnetic error", "Board radio error", "Frame radio error" and "strong error reservation") belong to the category, and the second category is an error not related to fraud detection (for example, "front frame open error", "game frame open error", "start". This is a category to which "mouth error", "switch error error", "weak error reservation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "payout error error") belong (see FIG. 147).

(3) The first category of (1) is a category to which an error having a higher priority than a predetermined threshold value (for example, priority "2" to "7") belongs, and the second category is a predetermined category. This is a category to which an error having a priority lower than the threshold value (for example, priority “8” to “15”) belongs (see FIG. 147).

(4) The first category of (1) is an error involving external information output (for example, "Large winning opening illegal winning error", "Public electric illegal winning error", "Magnetic error", "Board radio error", The category to which "frame radio error", "strong error reservation", "front frame opening error", and "game frame opening error") belongs, and the second category is an error that does not involve external information output (for example, "frame opening error"). This is a category to which "starting port error", "switch error error", "weak error reservation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "payout error error") belong (see FIG. 148).

(5) The first category of (1) is an error with sound output (for example, "Large winning opening illegal winning error", "Public electric illegal winning error", "Magnetic error", "Board radio error", " The category to which "frame radio error", "strong error reservation", "front frame opening error", and "game frame opening error") belongs, and the second category is an error without sound output (for example, "starting port"). This is a category to which "error", "switch error error", "weak error reservation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "payout error error") belong (see FIG. 149).

(6) The first category of (1) is an error that asks the administrator to take action (for example, "Large winning opening illegal winning error", "Public electric illegal winning error", "Magnetic error", "Board radio error". , "Frame radio error", "Strong error reservation", "Front frame opening error", "Game frame opening error", "Starting port error", "Switch error error", "Weak error reservation", "Shoot ball out error" , And "Payout error"), and the second category is the category to which the error requesting the player to respond (for example, "overflow error") belongs (see FIG. 150).

(7) The first category of (1) is an error detected by the main control device (for example, the game control device 100) (for example, "large winning opening illegal winning error", "Public electric winning illegal winning error", "magnetic". "Error", "Board radio error", "Frame radio error", "Strong error reservation", "Front frame opening error", "Game frame opening error", "Starting port error", "Switch error error", "Weak error" "Reservation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "payout error") belong to the category, and the second category is directed based on the command of the slave control device (for example, the game control device 100). This category includes errors detected by the effect control device 300 that controls the device (for example, “connector disconnection 1”, “connector disconnection 2”, “operation error 1”, and “operation error 2”) (see FIG. 151). ).

(8) The game machine 10 of (1) includes a sound output device (for example, speakers 19a and 19b). When the error of the first category and the error of the second category overlap, the control unit outputs a notification sound of one of the errors (see FIG. 152).

(9) The control unit of (8) differs in the sound output mode of the error notification sound depending on whether the error of the first category and the error of the second category overlap or do not overlap (see FIG. 153).
(10) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a plurality of sound output devices (for example, speakers 19a and 19b). The control unit outputs an error notification sound from different sound output devices for the error in the first category and the error in the second category (see FIG. 154).

(11) The game machine 10 includes a display device (for example, a display device 41), a sound output device (for example, speakers 19a and 19b), and a control unit (for example, a game control device 100 and an effect control device 300). Including. When the detected error belongs to the first category (for example, error category "1"), the control unit displays the detected error in the first display area (for example, first display area 870) of the display device, and the detected error is the first. When it belongs to a second category (for example, error category "2") different from the first category, it is displayed in the second display area (for example, second display area 880) of the display device, and the error and the first category of the first category are displayed. When the errors of the two categories overlap, the notification sound of one of the errors is output from the sound output device (see FIG. 152).

The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program that describes the processing content of the function that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices, optical disks, opto-magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. The magneto-optical recording medium includes MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

When a program is distributed, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or CD-ROM on which the program is recorded is sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. Further, the computer can also sequentially execute processing according to the received program every time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the above-mentioned gaming balls and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

It should also be considered that the disclosed embodiments are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 41 Display device 100 Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (2)

Display device and
Sound output device and
A control unit capable of controlling error notification by the display device and the sound output device, and
Including,
The control unit is
When the detected error is accompanied by the first notification mode by the sound output device, the notification display of the detected error is displayed in the first display area of the display device.
When the detected error is accompanied by a second notification mode different from the first notification mode by the sound output device , the notification display of the detected error is displayed in a second display area different from the first display area of the display device. Display,
Wherein Ru is displayed by the cascade arranged in a predetermined order the notification display of the two or more errors when displaying the notification display two or more errors in the first display area and the second display area,
Yu technique machine. Display device and
Sound output device and
A control unit capable of controlling error notification by the display device and the sound output device, and
Including
The control unit is
When the detected error is accompanied by the first notification mode by the sound output device, the notification display of the detected error is displayed in the first display area of the display device.
When the detected error is accompanied by a second notification mode different from the first notification mode by the sound output device, the notification display of the detected error is displayed in a second display area different from the first display area of the display device. To display
Game machine.

Images